WO2022061667A1 - 波束生成方法以及相关装置 - Google Patents

波束生成方法以及相关装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022061667A1
WO2022061667A1 PCT/CN2020/117517 CN2020117517W WO2022061667A1 WO 2022061667 A1 WO2022061667 A1 WO 2022061667A1 CN 2020117517 W CN2020117517 W CN 2020117517W WO 2022061667 A1 WO2022061667 A1 WO 2022061667A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
reference signal
information
phase
access network
signal resources
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/117517
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
罗晓宇
陈雷
向高
管鹏
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to CN202080103803.3A priority Critical patent/CN116097578A/zh
Priority to EP20954519.3A priority patent/EP4207624A4/en
Priority to PCT/CN2020/117517 priority patent/WO2022061667A1/zh
Publication of WO2022061667A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022061667A1/zh
Priority to US18/183,174 priority patent/US20230217286A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/08Testing, supervising or monitoring using real traffic
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0686Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0695Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission using beam selection
    • H04B7/06952Selecting one or more beams from a plurality of beams, e.g. beam training, management or sweeping
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0613Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0615Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal
    • H04B7/0617Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal for beam forming
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0613Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0615Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal
    • H04B7/0619Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal using feedback from receiving side
    • H04B7/0621Feedback content
    • H04B7/0628Diversity capabilities

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to a beam forming method and related apparatuses.
  • high-gain antenna arrays are usually used between base stations and terminal devices to form directional analog beams for communication. Only when the direction of the transmit beam of the base station is aligned with the direction of the receive beam of the terminal device, can normal communication be realized between the base station and the terminal device.
  • the main method for the base station to select the transmit beam is: the base station generates multiple fixed weights to simulate the transmit beam, and then the base station simulates the transmit beam through the multiple fixed weights and simulates the multiple fixed weights on the reference signal resources corresponding to the transmit beam.
  • the reference signals corresponding to the reference signal resources are respectively sent to the terminal equipment, and the reference signals are measured by the terminal equipment.
  • the terminal device reports the measurement information of the reference signal (including the reference signal receiving power (RSRP) of the reference signal, the reference signal receiving quality (RSRQ), etc.) of the reference signal to the base station, and then the base station According to the measurement information, a fixed-weight analog transmit beam is selected from the plurality of fixed-weight analog transmit beams as a transmit beam of the base station.
  • RSRP reference signal receiving power
  • RSRQ reference signal receiving quality
  • the directions of the main lobes of the plurality of fixed-weight simulated transmit beams are discontinuous, so a pit will appear between the two fixed-weight simulated transmit beams.
  • the depth of the pit is related to this fixed weight analog transmit beamforming parameter.
  • the fixed weight simulates the total number of transmit beams, beam width, beam gain, and the like. Due to the mobility of the terminal equipment, the phase position between the base station and the terminal equipment varies. If the terminal device is located in the pit between the two fixed-weight analog transmit beams, the base station selects any fixed-weight analog transmit beam from the two fixed-weight analog transmit beams as the transmit beam of the base station, which will lose the beam of the base station gain, resulting in reduced communication performance between the base station and the terminal device.
  • the present application provides a beam forming method and a related apparatus, which are used to improve the communication performance between an access network device and a terminal device.
  • a first aspect of the present application provides a communication method, the communication method comprising:
  • the terminal device receives the M reference signal resources sent by the access network device; then, the terminal device measures the M reference signal resources respectively to obtain first measurement information, where the first measurement information includes first phase information, the first phase
  • the information is the phase information obtained by the terminal equipment by measuring N of the M reference signal resources respectively, N and M are both integers greater than or equal to 1, and M is greater than or equal to N;
  • the network device sends first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the first phase information.
  • the terminal device measures the first phase information of the N reference signal resources, and sends the first indication information to the access network device to indicate the first phase information.
  • the first phase information of the N reference signal resources can indicate the channel change between the access network device and the terminal device, so that the access network device can combine the first phase information to generate a matching channel between the terminal device and the access network device.
  • the M reference signal resources are used for beam management, and the first phase information is used for the access network device to generate a first transmission beam, and the first transmission beam is used for the access network device to communicate with each other. communication between the terminal devices.
  • the terminal device during the beam management process, the terminal device newly reports the first phase information, so that the access network device can combine the first phase information to generate the first phase information that meets the channel conditions between the terminal device and the access network device.
  • a transmission beam then, the access network device communicates with the terminal device through the first transmission beam, thereby improving the transmission performance between the terminal device and the access network device.
  • the first transmit beam does not belong to a transmit beam set
  • the transmit beam set includes transmit beams generated by the access network device and corresponding to the M reference signal resources respectively.
  • the first transmission beam does not belong to the transmission beams in the M transmission beams generated by the access network device, and the M transmission beams are transmission beams with fixed weights generated by the access network device .
  • the main lobe direction of the first transmit beam is aligned with the terminal device, then the access network device and the terminal device communicate and transmit through the first transmit beam, and the beam gain of the first transmit beam can be greatly improved, thereby improving the connection between the terminal device and the terminal device. Communication performance between networked devices.
  • the channel capacity corresponding to the first transmission beam is maximized, and the channel corresponding to the first transmission beam is improved. capacity.
  • the M transmission beams are M transmission beams corresponding to the M reference signal resources generated by the access network device, and the M transmission beams are transmission beams with fixed weights.
  • the first phase information includes a phase difference between phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively; or,
  • the first phase information includes the phase difference between the phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively and the first reference phase, where the first reference phase is the phase corresponding to the first reference signal resource, and the first reference signal resource is the The reference signal resource with the largest RSRP or the largest RSRQ among the N reference signal resources.
  • the first phase information includes the phase difference between the phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively; or , the first phase information includes the phase difference between the phase corresponding to the N reference signal resources and the first reference phase, and this method can be adapted to the reporting method of RSRP in the existing beam management process, and the terminal equipment and The changes on both sides of the access network equipment are small, and the practicability is strong.
  • the first measurement information includes N channel status information reference signal resource indicators (CRI), N RSRPs, and the first phase information.
  • the first phase The information includes N*(N-1) phase differences, or N-1 phase differences; the N CRIs are the CRIs corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively, and the N RSRPs are the N reference signal resources respectively Corresponding RSRP; the N*(N-1) phase differences are the phase differences between the phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively, and the N-1 phase differences are the phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively phase difference from the first reference phase.
  • the specific content included in the first measurement information measured by the terminal device during the beam management process is shown.
  • the N reference signal resources in the M reference signal resources are received by the terminal device through the same receive beam.
  • the access network device obtains the amplitude information of the N reference signals corresponding to the N reference signal resources (that is, the RSRP of the N reference signals) and the N reference signal based on the measurement by the terminal device using the same receive beam
  • the first transmit beam generated by calculating the first phase information of the reference signals. Therefore, the receiving beam of the terminal device should be limited on the terminal device side, so that the access network device can generate the first transmit beam that matches the channel conditions between the terminal device and the access network device, thereby improving the connection between the terminal device and the access network device.
  • the communication performance of the communication between devices since the access network device obtains the amplitude information of the N reference signals corresponding to the N reference signal resources (that is, the RSRP of the N reference signals) and the N reference signal based on the measurement by the terminal device using the same receive beam
  • the first transmit beam generated by calculating the first phase information of the reference signals. Therefore, the receiving beam of the terminal device should be limited on the terminal device side, so that the access network device can generate the first transmit beam that
  • the method before the terminal device receives the M reference signal resources sent by the access network device, the method further includes:
  • the terminal device sends the first capability information of the terminal device to the access network device, where the first capability information carries second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal device has the capability for the access network
  • the measurement capability of the device to measure the first phase information required for generating the first transmit beam.
  • the terminal device sends the first capability information of the terminal device to the access network device, so that the access network device can configure an appropriate resource configuration and reporting method for the terminal device according to the first capability information, In order to correctly analyze the reported amount of the terminal device.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal device supports measurement of phase information corresponding to the reference signal resource used for beam management.
  • the terminal device indicates through the second indication information whether the terminal device supports the measurement of the phase information corresponding to the reference signal resource used for beam management, so that the access network device can configure the terminal device appropriately
  • the resource configuration and reporting method of the terminal device can be used to facilitate the access network device to correctly parse the reported amount of the terminal device and improve the parsing efficiency.
  • the first capability information further carries one or more of the following information: the terminal device supports the maximum number of transmit beams corresponding to the reference signal resources combined for beam management; the terminal device supports Quantization capability information for quantizing the first phase information.
  • the terminal device may also carry the maximum number of transmit beams supported by the terminal device and quantitative capability information in the first capability information, so that the access network device can configure appropriate resource configuration for the terminal device and reporting methods.
  • the method before the terminal device receives the M reference signal resources sent by the access network device, the method further includes: the terminal device receives the first configuration information sent by the access network device; then, the The terminal device determines to report the first phase information of the N reference signal resources according to the first configuration information.
  • the access network device sends the first configuration information to the terminal device, so as to notify the terminal device to measure the first phase information of the N reference signal resources, and follow the instructions indicated by the first configuration information.
  • the configuration mode reports the first phase information. In this way, the access network device can correctly parse the first phase information reported by the terminal device.
  • the first configuration information includes second configuration information of the first resource set, the second configuration information includes a repetition field, the repetition field is OFF, and the first resource set includes the M reference signal resources.
  • the second configuration information is used to configure that the terminal device does not expect the access network device to use the same transmission spatial filter (ie, transmission beam) to transmit the M reference signal resources.
  • the possible implementation methods improve the achievability of the solution.
  • the first configuration information further includes one or more of the following information:
  • third indication information where the third indication information is used to indicate that the first resource set is used for the access network device to generate the first transmission beam
  • the reporting granularity of the first phase information is the subband reporting granularity, size information of each subband.
  • the above-mentioned third indication information, the reporting granularity information of the first phase information, and the size information of each subband may also be reported through other messages or information, which are not specifically limited in this application.
  • the method further includes:
  • the terminal device sends twelfth indication information and thirteenth indication information to the access network device, where the twelfth indication information is used to indicate N CRIs corresponding to the N reference signal resources, and the thirteenth indication information is used for is used to indicate the RSRP corresponding to the N reference signal resources.
  • a second aspect of the present application provides a communication method, the communication method comprising:
  • the access network device sends M reference signal resources to the terminal device; then, the access network device receives the first indication information sent by the terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate first phase information, the first phase information Phase information obtained by measuring N reference signal resources for the terminal device, the M reference signal resources include the N reference signal resources, N and M are both integers greater than or equal to 1, and M is greater than or equal to N; the access The network device generates a first transmission beam according to the first phase information indicated by the first indication information, and the first transmission beam is used for communication between the access network device and the terminal device.
  • the terminal device sends first indication information to the access network device to indicate the first phase information.
  • the channel conditions between the access network equipment and the terminal equipment are constantly changing, and the N reference signal resources correspond to N transmission beams respectively. Therefore, the first phase information of the N reference signal resources can indicate the channel change between the access network device and the terminal device, so that the access network device can combine the first phase information to generate a matching channel between the terminal device and the access network device.
  • the first transmission beam of the channel condition is used to improve the communication performance between the access network equipment and the terminal equipment.
  • the M reference signal resources are used for beam management.
  • the terminal device during the beam management process, the terminal device newly reports the first phase information, so that the access network device can combine the first phase information to generate the first phase information that meets the channel conditions between the terminal device and the access network device.
  • a transmission beam then, the access network device communicates with the terminal device through the first transmission beam, thereby improving the transmission performance between the terminal device and the access network device.
  • the first transmit beam does not belong to a transmit beam set
  • the transmit beam set includes transmit beams generated by the access network device and corresponding to the M reference signal resources respectively.
  • the first transmission beam does not belong to the transmission beams in the M transmission beams generated by the access network device, and the M transmission beams are transmission beams with fixed weights generated by the access network device .
  • the main lobe direction of the first transmit beam is aligned with the terminal device, then the access network device and the terminal device communicate and transmit through the first transmit beam, and the beam gain of the first transmit beam can be greatly improved, thereby improving the connection between the terminal device and the terminal device. Communication performance between networked devices.
  • the channel capacity corresponding to the first transmission beam is maximized, and the channel corresponding to the first transmission beam is improved. capacity.
  • the M transmission beams are M transmission beams corresponding to the M reference signal resources generated by the access network device, and the M transmission beams are transmission beams with fixed weights.
  • the first phase information includes a phase difference between the phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively; or, the first phase information includes the phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively and The phase difference between the first reference phases, where the first reference phase is the phase corresponding to the first reference signal resource, and the first reference signal resource is the reference signal resource with the highest RSRP or the highest RSRQ among the N reference signal resources.
  • the first phase information includes the phase difference between the phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively; or , the first phase information includes the phase difference between the phase corresponding to the N reference signal resources and the first reference phase, and this method can be adapted to the reporting method of RSRP in the existing beam management process, and the terminal equipment and The changes on both sides of the access network equipment are small, and the practicability is strong.
  • the first phase information includes N*(N-1) phase differences, or N-1 phase differences; the N*(N-1) phase differences are the N phase differences The phase differences between the phases corresponding to the reference signal resources respectively, and the N-1 phase differences are the phase differences between the phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively and the first reference phase.
  • the specific content included in the first measurement information measured by the terminal device during the beam management process is shown.
  • the N reference signal resources in the M reference signal resources are received by the terminal device through the same receive beam.
  • the access network device obtains the amplitude information of the N reference signals corresponding to the N reference signal resources (that is, the RSRP of the N reference signals) and the N reference signal based on the measurement by the terminal device using the same receive beam
  • the first transmit beam generated by calculating the first phase information of the reference signals. Therefore, the receiving beam of the terminal device should be limited on the terminal device side, so that the access network device can generate the first transmit beam that matches the channel conditions between the terminal device and the access network device, thereby improving the connection between the terminal device and the access network device.
  • the communication performance of the communication between devices since the access network device obtains the amplitude information of the N reference signals corresponding to the N reference signal resources (that is, the RSRP of the N reference signals) and the N reference signal based on the measurement by the terminal device using the same receive beam
  • the first transmit beam generated by calculating the first phase information of the reference signals. Therefore, the receiving beam of the terminal device should be limited on the terminal device side, so that the access network device can generate the first transmit beam that
  • the method before the access network device sends the M reference signal resources to the terminal device, the method further includes: the access network device receiving the first capability information of the terminal device sent by the terminal device , the first capability information carries second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal device has the measurement capability to measure the first phase information required by the access network device to generate the first transmission beam; Then, the access network device determines, according to the first capability information, that the terminal device has a measurement capability of measuring the first phase information.
  • the terminal device sends the first capability information of the terminal device to the access network device, so that the access network device can configure an appropriate resource configuration and reporting method for the terminal device according to the first capability information, In order to correctly analyze the reported amount of the terminal device.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal device supports measurement of phase information corresponding to the reference signal resource used for beam management.
  • the terminal device indicates through the second indication information whether the terminal device supports the measurement of the phase information corresponding to the reference signal resource used for beam management, so that the access network device can configure the terminal device appropriately
  • the resource configuration and reporting method of the terminal device can be used to facilitate the access network device to correctly parse the reported amount of the terminal device and improve the parsing efficiency.
  • the first capability information further carries one or more of the following information: the terminal device supports the maximum number of transmit beams corresponding to the reference signal resources combined for beam management; the terminal device supports Quantization capability information for quantizing the first phase information.
  • the terminal device may also carry the maximum number of transmit beams supported by the terminal device and quantitative capability information in the first capability information, so that the access network device can configure appropriate resource configuration for the terminal device and reporting methods.
  • the method before the access network device sends the M reference signal resources to the terminal device, the method further includes: the access network device sends first configuration information to the terminal device, where the first configuration The information is used to configure the terminal equipment to report the first phase information of the N reference signal resources.
  • the access network device sends the first configuration information to the terminal device, so as to notify the terminal device to measure the first phase information of the N reference signal resources, and follow the instructions indicated by the first configuration information.
  • the configuration mode reports the first phase information. In this way, the access network device can correctly parse the first phase information reported by the terminal device.
  • the first configuration information includes second configuration information of the first resource set, the second configuration information includes a repetition field, the repetition field is OFF, and the first resource set includes the M references signal resource.
  • the second configuration information is used to configure that the terminal device does not expect the access network device to use the same transmission spatial filter (ie, transmission beam) to transmit the M reference signal resources.
  • the possible implementation methods improve the achievability of the solution.
  • the first configuration information further includes one or more of the following information:
  • third indication information where the third indication information is used to indicate that the first resource set is used for the access network device to generate the first transmission beam
  • the reporting granularity of the first phase information is the subband reporting granularity, size information of each subband.
  • the above-mentioned third indication information, the reporting granularity information of the first phase information, and the size information of each subband may also be reported through other messages or information, which are not specifically limited in this application.
  • the method further includes:
  • the access network device receives the twelfth indication information and the thirteenth indication information sent by the terminal device, where the twelfth indication information is used to indicate the N CRIs corresponding to the N reference signal resources, and the thirteenth indication information used to indicate the RSRP corresponding to the N reference signal resources; the access network device determines the RSRP corresponding to the N reference signal resources according to the twelfth indication information and the thirteenth indication information; the access network device determines the RSRP corresponding to the N reference signal resources according to the Generating the first transmission beam by the first phase information indicated by the first indication information includes: generating, by the access network device, the first transmission beam according to the first phase information and the RSRP corresponding to the N reference signal resources.
  • a specific manner for the access network device to generate the first transmission beam is provided, that is, the access network device generates the first transmission beam according to the first phase information and the RSRP corresponding to the N reference signal resources. Since the first phase information and the RSRP corresponding to the N reference signal resources can represent the channel condition between the terminal device and the access network device, the access network device can pass the first phase information and the N reference signal resources The RSRP corresponding to the signal resource generates a first transmit beam that matches the channel condition between the terminal device and the access network device.
  • the access network device generates the first transmission beam according to the first phase information and the RSRP corresponding to the N reference signal resources, including: the access network device generates the first transmission beam according to the first phase information and the N reference signal resources.
  • the RSRP of the N reference signal resources determines a first combining weight; the access network device generates the first transmit beam according to the first combining weight and a second weight set, where the second weight set includes the N reference signals The weight of the N transmit beams corresponding to the resource.
  • a third aspect of the present application provides a communication method, the communication method comprising:
  • the terminal device receives the second reference signal resource sent by the access network device, where the second reference signal resource is the reference signal resource sent by the access network device through the R ports of the access network device and on the R transmission beams,
  • the R ports are in one-to-one correspondence with the R transmit beams, the R transmit beams are transmit beams corresponding to the R reference signal resources generated by the access network device, and R is an integer greater than or equal to 2; then, the The terminal device measures the second reference signal resource to obtain second measurement information, where the second measurement information includes second phase information, and the second phase information is the second reference signal resource measured by the terminal device on the R ports respectively The obtained phase information; the terminal device sends fourth indication information to the access network device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the second phase information.
  • the terminal device measures the second phase information of the second reference signal resources of the N ports, and sends fourth indication information to the access network device to indicate the second phase information.
  • the channel conditions between the access network device and the terminal device are constantly changing, and the R ports correspond to the R transmit beams of the access network device respectively. Therefore, the second phase information of the second reference signal resource can indicate the channel change between the access network device and the terminal device, so that the access network device can combine the second phase information to generate a matching channel between the terminal device and the access network device.
  • a new transmit beam according to the channel condition, or, from the R transmit beams of the access network device select a transmit beam that matches the channel conditions between the terminal device and the access network device, so as to improve the access network device and the terminal device. communication performance between them.
  • the second reference signal resource is used for beam synthesis
  • the second phase information is used for the access network device to generate a second transmission beam
  • the second transmission beam is used for the access network device communicate with the terminal device.
  • a new beam forming process is added on the basis of the existing beam management process, and the terminal device measures and obtains the second phase information, so that the access network device can combine the second phase information to generate matching between the terminal device and the terminal device.
  • the second transmission beam of the channel condition between the access network devices so as to improve the communication performance between the access network device and the terminal device.
  • the second transmit beam does not belong to a transmit beam set
  • the transmit beam set includes transmit beams corresponding to M reference signal resources generated by the access network device
  • the M reference signal resources are used for
  • the M reference signal resources include the R reference signal resources, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 2, and the M is greater than or equal to the R.
  • the second transmission beam does not belong to the transmission beams in the M transmission beams generated by the access network device, and the M transmission beams are transmission beams with fixed weights generated by the access network device .
  • the main lobe direction of the second transmit beam is aligned with the terminal device, then the access network device and the terminal device communicate and transmit through the first transmit beam, and the beam gain of the second transmit beam can be greatly improved, thereby improving the connection between the terminal device and the terminal device. Communication performance between networked devices.
  • the channel capacity corresponding to the second transmission beam is maximized, and the channel corresponding to the second transmission beam is improved. capacity.
  • the M transmission beams are M transmission beams corresponding to the M reference signal resources generated by the access network device, and the M transmission beams are transmission beams with fixed weights.
  • the second phase information includes a phase difference between phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively; or,
  • the phase difference between the respective phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources on the R ports and a second reference phase, where the second reference phase is the second reference signal of the port with the smallest port number among the R ports The phase corresponding to the resource.
  • the second phase information includes the phase difference between the phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively, or , the phase difference between the corresponding phase of the second reference signal resource on the R ports and the second reference phase
  • this method can be adapted to the reporting method of RSRP in the existing beam management process, and the terminal equipment and The changes on both sides of the access network equipment are small, and the practicability is strong.
  • the second measurement information includes RSRPs corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively;
  • the second phase information includes R*(R-1) phase differences, or, R-1 phase differences;
  • the R*(R-1) phase differences are the phase differences between the phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports;
  • the R-1 phase differences are the R The phase difference between the respective phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources on the respective ports and the second reference phase.
  • the specific content of the second measurement information is provided.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device sending eleventh indication information to the access network device, where the eleventh indication information is used to indicate the second reference signal resources of the R ports Corresponding RSRP respectively.
  • the terminal device further sends the RSRPs corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports of the access network device respectively.
  • the access network device can generate the second transmit beam according to the RSRP and the second phase information corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively. That is, the beam forming process is also used to obtain the RSRPs corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively, and it is not necessary to obtain the RSRPs corresponding to the R transmission beams through the beam management process.
  • receiving, by the terminal device, the second reference signal resource sent by the access network device includes: the terminal device receiving the second reference signal resource sent by the access network device using the same receive beam.
  • the access network device calculates and generates the second transmit beam based on the second phase information obtained by the terminal device using the same receive beam measurement, the receive beam of the terminal device should be limited on the terminal device side, In order to facilitate the access network device to generate a second transmission beam matching the channel conditions between the terminal device and the access network device, the communication performance of the communication between the terminal device and the access network device is improved.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device receives M reference signal resources sent by the access network device, the The M reference signal resources are used for beam management; the terminal device measures the M reference signal resources respectively to obtain the RSRPs corresponding to the R reference signal resources in the M reference signal resources, and the terminal device passes the first receiving beam Receiving the R pieces of reference signal information, R and M are both integers greater than or equal to 2, and M is greater than or equal to R; the terminal device sends fifth indication information and sixth indication information to the access network device, and the fifth indication The information is used to indicate the CRIs corresponding to the R reference signal resources respectively, and the sixth indication information is used to indicate the RSRPs corresponding to the R reference signal resources respectively; the terminal equipment receives the second reference signal resources sent by the access network equipment, including : the terminal device receives the second reference signal resource sent by the access network device through the first receiving beam.
  • the terminal device may report the RSRPs corresponding to the R reference signal resources respectively in the beam management process; and in the beam forming process, the terminal device reports the second phase information.
  • the access network device can generate the second transmission beam according to the RSRP and the second phase information corresponding to the R reference signal resources respectively, and communicate with the terminal device through the second transmission beam, thereby improving the efficiency between the terminal device and the access network device. The communication performance of the communication between them.
  • the method before the terminal device measures the second reference signal resource and obtains the second measurement information, the method further includes: the terminal device receives seventh indication information sent by the access network device; the terminal device The device determines, according to the seventh indication information, to measure the phases of the second reference signal resources of the R ports of the access network device, where the R ports are configured in the access network device for sending the second reference The first R ports among the P ports of the signal resource, where P is an integer greater than R.
  • the access network device configures the terminal device to receive the second reference signal resource at P ports of the access network device, but the access network device determines the P number reported by the terminal device through the beam management process R of the transmit beams fit into the new transmit beam. Then the access network device can use the seventh indication information to instruct the terminal device to measure and report the phases of the second reference signal resources of the R ports of the access network device, thereby facilitating the access network device to generate the second transmission beam and improving the solution feasibility and practicality.
  • the method before the terminal device receives the second reference signal resource sent by the access network device, the method further includes: the terminal device sending the second capability information of the terminal device to the access network device ; wherein, the second capability information carries eighth indication information, and the eighth indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal device supports a reference signal transmission mode; the reference signal transmission mode is: the access network device transmits through the R beams and send the second reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource through the R ports of the access network device in consecutive R symbols in the time domain; the R transmit beams are in one-to-one correspondence with the R ports, and the R The ports correspond to the R symbols one-to-one.
  • the terminal device first reports the second capability information of the terminal device to the access network device, and indicates whether the terminal device supports reference signal transmission through the eighth indication information carried in the second capability information model.
  • the access network device can configure an appropriate resource configuration and reporting method for the terminal device according to the second capability information, so that the access network device can correctly parse the reporting amount of the terminal device and improve the implementability of the solution.
  • the second capability information also carries the maximum number of symbols supported by the terminal device, where the maximum number of symbols is the maximum number of symbols of the continuous measurement reference signal supported by the terminal device.
  • the second capability information may also carry the maximum number of symbols that the terminal device supports for continuous measurement of reference signals, so that the access network device can configure an appropriate resource configuration for the terminal device according to the maximum number of symbols and reporting methods to adapt to the reporting capabilities of the terminal equipment, thereby providing a basis for the implementation of the scheme and ensuring the practicability and integrity of the scheme.
  • the method before the terminal device receives the second reference signal resource sent by the access network device, the method further includes: the terminal device receiving the second configuration information sent by the access network device; the terminal device It is determined according to the second configuration information that the second reference signal resource is used for beamforming and reporting the second phase information of the second reference signal resource of the R ports.
  • the access network device configures an appropriate resource configuration and reporting method for the terminal device.
  • the second configuration information may be sent to the terminal device, so that the terminal device can determine according to the second configuration information. Reporting methods and other relevant information to facilitate the implementation of the plan.
  • a fourth aspect of the present application provides a communication method, the communication method comprising:
  • the access network device sends the second reference signal resource to the terminal device through the R ports of the access network device and on the R transmit beams, the R ports are in one-to-one correspondence with the R transmit beams, and the R transmit beams sending beams corresponding to the R reference signal resources generated for the access network device, where R is an integer greater than or equal to 2; then, the access network device receives the fourth indication information sent by the terminal device, the fourth indication information indicates second phase information, and the second phase information is the phase information obtained by the terminal equipment by measuring the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively; the access network equipment indicates the second phase information according to the fourth indication information The phase information generates a second transmit beam, and the second transmit beam is used for communication between the access network device and the terminal device.
  • the access network device sends the second reference signal resource to the terminal device through the R ports of the access network device and on the R transmission beams; then, the access network device receives the fourth indication sent by the terminal device.
  • the fourth indication information indicates second phase information
  • the second phase information is phase information obtained by the terminal device by measuring the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively.
  • the second phase information of the second reference signal resource can indicate the channel change between the access network device and the terminal device, so that the access network device can combine the second phase information to generate a matching channel between the terminal device and the access network device.
  • the second reference signal resource is used for beamforming.
  • the present application adds a beamforming process, and in the beamforming process, the terminal device measures the second phase information of the second reference signal resources of the R ports of the access network device respectively. That is, a second reference signal resource for beamforming is defined, so as to obtain the second phase information.
  • the access network device can combine the second phase information to generate the second transmission beam matching the channel conditions between the terminal device and the access network device.
  • the second transmit beam does not belong to a transmit beam set
  • the transmit beam set includes transmit beams corresponding to M reference signal resources generated by the access network device
  • the M reference signal resources are used for
  • the M reference signal resources include the R reference signal resources, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 2, and the M is greater than or equal to the R.
  • the second transmission beam does not belong to the transmission beams in the M transmission beams generated by the access network device, and the M transmission beams are transmission beams with fixed weights generated by the access network device .
  • the main lobe direction of the second transmit beam is aligned with the terminal device, then the access network device and the terminal device communicate and transmit through the first transmit beam, and the beam gain of the second transmit beam can be greatly improved, thereby improving the connection between the terminal device and the terminal device. Communication performance between networked devices.
  • the channel capacity corresponding to the second transmission beam is maximized, and the channel corresponding to the second transmission beam is improved. capacity.
  • the M transmission beams are M transmission beams corresponding to the M reference signal resources generated by the access network device, and the M transmission beams are transmission beams with fixed weights.
  • the second phase information includes a phase difference between phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively; or, the second reference signal resources on the R ports are respectively The corresponding phases are respectively the phase differences with the second reference phase, where the second reference phase is the phase corresponding to the second reference signal resource of the port with the smallest port number among the R ports.
  • the second phase information includes the phase difference between the phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively, or , the phase difference between the corresponding phase of the second reference signal resource on the R ports and the second reference phase
  • this method can be adapted to the reporting method of RSRP in the existing beam management process, and the terminal equipment and The changes on both sides of the access network equipment are small, and the practicability is strong.
  • the method further includes: receiving, by the access network device, eleventh indication information sent by the terminal device, where the eleventh indication information is used to indicate the second reference signal resources of the R ports corresponding RSRPs respectively; the second phase information includes R*(R-1) phase differences, or R-1 phase differences; the R*(R-1) phase differences are the first phase differences of the R ports The phase difference between the phases corresponding to the two reference signal resources respectively; the R-1 phase differences are the phase differences between the phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources on the R ports respectively and the second reference phase.
  • the information specifically included in the second phase information is provided, and the RSRPs corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports further sent by the terminal device to the access network device.
  • the access network device can generate the second transmit beam according to the RSRP and the second phase information corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively. That is, the beam forming process is also used to obtain the RSRPs corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively, and it is not necessary to obtain the RSRPs corresponding to the R transmission beams through the beam management process.
  • the method further includes: sending, by the access network device, seventh indication information to the terminal device, where the seventh indication information is used to indicate to the terminal device second reference signals for the R ports The phase information of the resource is measured, the R ports are the first R ports among the P ports configured for sending the second reference signal resource in the access network device, and P is an integer greater than R.
  • the access network device configures the terminal device to receive the second reference signal resource at P ports of the access network device, but the access network device determines the P number reported by the terminal device through the beam management process R of the transmit beams fit into the new transmit beam. Then the access network device can use the seventh indication information to instruct the terminal device to measure and report the phases of the second reference signal resources of the R ports of the access network device, thereby facilitating the access network device to generate the second transmission beam and improving the solution feasibility and practicality.
  • the method before the access network device transmits the second reference signal resource to the terminal device through the R ports of the access network device and on the R transmission beams, the method further includes: the access The network device receives the second capability information of the terminal device sent by the terminal device, where the second capability information carries eighth indication information; then, the access network device determines whether the terminal device supports reference signal sending according to the eighth indication information mode; the reference signal transmission mode is: the access network device sends the second reference signal resource corresponding to the second reference signal resource through the R transmission beams and through the R ports of the access network device in consecutive R symbols in the time domain Two reference signals; the R transmit beams are in one-to-one correspondence with the R ports, and the R ports are in one-to-one correspondence with the R symbols.
  • the access network device receives the second capability information of the terminal device reported by the terminal device, and determines whether the terminal device supports reference signal transmission according to the eighth indication information carried in the second capability information model. In this way, the access network device can configure an appropriate resource configuration and reporting method for the terminal device according to the second capability information, so that the access network device can correctly parse the reporting amount of the terminal device and improve the implementability of the solution.
  • the second capability information also carries the maximum number of symbols supported by the terminal device, where the maximum number of symbols is the maximum number of symbols of the continuous measurement reference signal supported by the terminal device.
  • the second capability information may also carry the maximum number of symbols that the terminal device supports for continuous measurement of reference signals, so that the access network device can configure an appropriate resource configuration for the terminal device according to the maximum number of symbols and reporting methods to adapt to the reporting capabilities of the terminal equipment, thereby providing a basis for the implementation of the scheme and ensuring the practicability and integrity of the scheme.
  • the method before the access network device transmits the second reference signal resource to the terminal device through the R ports of the access network device and on the R transmission beams, the method further includes: the access The network device sends second configuration information to the terminal device, where the second configuration information is used to configure the second reference signal resource for beamforming, and configure the terminal device to report the second reference signal resource of the R ports. phase information.
  • the access network device configures an appropriate resource configuration and reporting method for the terminal device.
  • the second configuration information may be sent to the terminal device, so that the terminal device can determine according to the second configuration information. Reporting methods and other relevant information to facilitate the implementation of the plan.
  • the method further includes: the access network device sends M reference signal resources to the terminal device, where the M reference signal resources are used for beam management; the access network device receives the terminal device The third message sent, where the third message carries fifth indication information and sixth indication information, the fifth indication information is used to indicate the CRIs corresponding to the R reference signal resources respectively, and the sixth indication information is used to indicate the R reference signal resources RSRPs corresponding to the reference signal resources respectively, the R reference signal resources are in one-to-one correspondence with the R transmission beams; the access network device determines the RSRPs corresponding to the R reference signal resources according to the third message; the access network device determines the RSRPs corresponding to the R reference signal resources respectively; The device generating the second transmission beam according to the second phase information indicated by the fourth indication information includes: the access network device generating the second transmission beam according to the second phase information and the RSRPs corresponding to the R reference signal resources respectively.
  • a new beam forming process is added on the basis of the beam management process, so that the access network device can combine the second phase information obtained in the beam forming process with the R obtained in the beam management process
  • the RSRP corresponding to the respective reference signal resources generates the second transmission beam, and communicates with the terminal device through the second transmission beam, so as to improve the communication performance between the access network device and the terminal device.
  • the access network device generates the second transmission beam according to the second phase information and the RSRPs corresponding to the R reference signal resources respectively, including: the access network device generates the second transmission beam according to the second phase information
  • the RSRP corresponding to the information and the R reference signal resources respectively generates a second combination weight
  • the access network device generates the second transmission beam according to the second combination weight and a third weight set, and the third weight set includes the Weights of the R transmit beams corresponding to the R reference signal resources.
  • a fifth aspect of the present application provides a communication method, the communication method comprising:
  • the terminal device receives M reference signal resources sent by the access network device; then, the terminal device measures N reference signal resources in the M reference signal resources to obtain first phase information, where both N and M are greater than or equal to 1 is an integer, M is greater than or equal to N; then, the terminal device sends first indication information to the access network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the first phase information.
  • the terminal device measures the first phase information of the N reference signal resources, and sends the first indication information to the access network device to indicate the first phase information.
  • the first phase information of the N reference signal resources can indicate the channel change between the access network device and the terminal device, so that the access network device can combine the first phase information to generate a matching channel between the terminal device and the access network device.
  • the M reference signal resources are used for beam management, and the first phase information is used for the access network device to generate a first transmission beam, and the first transmission beam is used for the access network device to communicate with each other. communication between the terminal devices.
  • the terminal device during the beam management process, the terminal device newly reports the first phase information, so that the access network device can combine the first phase information to generate the first phase information that meets the channel conditions between the terminal device and the access network device.
  • a transmission beam then, the access network device communicates with the terminal device through the first transmission beam, thereby improving the transmission performance between the terminal device and the access network device.
  • the first phase information includes a phase difference between phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively; or,
  • the first phase information includes the phase difference between the phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively and the first reference phase, where the first reference phase is the phase corresponding to the first reference signal resource, and the first reference signal resource is the The reference signal resource with the largest RSRP or the largest RSRQ among the N reference signal resources.
  • the first phase information includes the phase difference between the phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively; or , the first phase information includes the phase difference between the phase corresponding to the N reference signal resources and the first reference phase, and this method can be adapted to the reporting method of RSRP in the existing beam management process, and the terminal equipment and The changes on both sides of the access network equipment are small, and the practicability is strong.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device measuring the RSRPs corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively.
  • the terminal device measures and obtains the RSRPs corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively.
  • the first phase information includes N*(N-1) phase differences, or N-1 phase differences; the N CRIs are CRIs corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively , the N RSRPs are the RSRPs corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively; the N*(N-1) phase differences are the phase differences between the phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively, and the N-1 phase differences are The phase difference is the phase difference between the phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively and the first reference phase.
  • the N reference signal resources in the M reference signal resources are received by the terminal device through the same receive beam.
  • the access network device obtains the amplitude information of the N reference signals corresponding to the N reference signal resources (that is, the RSRP of the N reference signals) and the N reference signal based on the measurement by the terminal device using the same receive beam
  • the first transmit beam generated by calculating the first phase information of the reference signals. Therefore, the receiving beam of the terminal device should be limited on the terminal device side, so that the access network device can generate the first transmit beam that matches the channel conditions between the terminal device and the access network device, thereby improving the connection between the terminal device and the access network device.
  • the communication performance of the communication between devices since the access network device obtains the amplitude information of the N reference signals corresponding to the N reference signal resources (that is, the RSRP of the N reference signals) and the N reference signal based on the measurement by the terminal device using the same receive beam
  • the first transmit beam generated by calculating the first phase information of the reference signals. Therefore, the receiving beam of the terminal device should be limited on the terminal device side, so that the access network device can generate the first transmit beam that
  • the method before the terminal device receives the M reference signal resources sent by the access network device, the method further includes:
  • the terminal device sends the first capability information of the terminal device to the access network device, where the first capability information carries second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal device has the capability for the access network
  • the measurement capability of the device to measure the first phase information required for generating the first transmit beam.
  • the terminal device sends the first capability information of the terminal device to the access network device, so that the access network device can configure an appropriate resource configuration and reporting method for the terminal device according to the first capability information, In order to correctly analyze the reported amount of the terminal device.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal device supports measurement of phase information corresponding to the reference signal resource used for beam management.
  • the terminal device indicates through the second indication information whether the terminal device supports the measurement of the phase information corresponding to the reference signal resource used for beam management, so that the access network device can configure the terminal device appropriately
  • the resource configuration and reporting method of the terminal device can be used to facilitate the access network device to correctly parse the reported amount of the terminal device and improve the parsing efficiency.
  • the first capability information further carries one or more of the following information: the terminal device supports the maximum number of transmit beams corresponding to the reference signal resources combined for beam management; the terminal device supports Quantization capability information for quantizing the first phase information.
  • the terminal device may also carry the maximum number of transmit beams supported by the terminal device and quantitative capability information in the first capability information, so that the access network device can configure appropriate resource configuration for the terminal device and reporting methods.
  • the method before the terminal device receives the M reference signal resources sent by the access network device, the method further includes: the terminal device receives the first configuration information sent by the access network device; then, the The terminal device determines to report the first phase information of the N reference signal resources according to the first configuration information.
  • the access network device sends the first configuration information to the terminal device, so as to notify the terminal device to measure the first phase information of the N reference signal resources, and follow the instructions indicated by the first configuration information.
  • the configuration mode reports the first phase information. In this way, the access network device can correctly parse the first phase information reported by the terminal device.
  • the first configuration information includes second configuration information of the first resource set, the second configuration information includes a repetition field, the repetition field is OFF, and the first resource set includes the M references signal resource.
  • the second configuration information is used to configure that the terminal device does not expect the access network device to use the same transmission spatial filter (ie, transmission beam) to transmit the M reference signal resources.
  • the possible implementation methods improve the achievability of the scheme.
  • the first configuration information further includes one or more of the following information:
  • third indication information where the third indication information is used to indicate that the first resource set is used for the access network device to generate the first transmission beam
  • the reporting granularity of the first phase information is the subband reporting granularity, size information of each subband.
  • the above-mentioned third indication information, the reporting granularity information of the first phase information, and the size information of each subband may also be reported through other messages or information, which are not specifically limited in this application.
  • the method further includes:
  • the terminal device sends twelfth indication information and thirteenth indication information to the access network device, where the twelfth indication information is used to indicate N CRIs corresponding to the N reference signal resources, and the thirteenth indication information is used for is used to indicate the RSRP corresponding to the N reference signal resources.
  • a sixth aspect of the present application provides a communication method, the communication method comprising:
  • the terminal device receives the second reference signal resource sent by the access network device, where the second reference signal resource is the reference signal resource sent by the access network device through the R ports of the access network device and on the R transmission beams,
  • the R ports are in one-to-one correspondence with the R transmit beams, the R transmit beams are transmit beams corresponding to the R reference signal resources generated by the access network device, and R is an integer greater than or equal to 2; then, the The terminal device measures the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively to obtain second phase information; the terminal device sends a second message to the access network device, the second message carries the fourth indication information, and the first Four indication information is used to indicate the second phase information.
  • the terminal device measures the second phase information of the second reference signal resources of the N ports, and sends fourth indication information to the access network device to indicate the second phase information.
  • the channel conditions between the access network device and the terminal device are constantly changing, and the R ports correspond to the R transmit beams of the access network device respectively. Therefore, the second phase information of the second reference signal resource can indicate the channel change between the access network device and the terminal device, so that the access network device can combine the second phase information to generate a matching channel between the terminal device and the access network device.
  • a new transmit beam according to the channel condition, or, from the R transmit beams of the access network device select a transmit beam that matches the channel conditions between the terminal device and the access network device, so as to improve the access network device and the terminal device. communication performance between them.
  • the second reference signal resource is used for beam synthesis
  • the second phase information is used for the access network device to generate a second transmission beam
  • the second transmission beam is used for the access network device communicate with the terminal device.
  • a new beam forming process is added on the basis of the existing beam management process, and the terminal device measures and obtains the second phase information, so that the access network device can combine the second phase information to generate matching between the terminal device and the terminal device.
  • the second transmission beam of the channel condition between the access network devices so as to improve the communication performance between the access network device and the terminal device.
  • the second transmit beam does not belong to a transmit beam set
  • the transmit beam set includes transmit beams corresponding to M reference signal resources generated by the access network device
  • the M reference signal resources are used for
  • the M reference signal resources include the R reference signal resources, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 2, and the M is greater than or equal to the R.
  • the second transmission beam does not belong to the transmission beams in the M transmission beams generated by the access network device, and the M transmission beams are transmission beams with fixed weights generated by the access network device .
  • the main lobe direction of the second transmit beam is aligned with the terminal device, then the access network device and the terminal device communicate and transmit through the first transmit beam, and the beam gain of the second transmit beam can be greatly improved, thereby improving the connection between the terminal device and the terminal device. Communication performance between networked devices.
  • the channel capacity corresponding to the second transmission beam is maximized, and the channel corresponding to the second transmission beam is improved. capacity.
  • the M transmission beams are M transmission beams corresponding to the M reference signal resources generated by the access network device, and the M transmission beams are transmission beams with fixed weights.
  • the second phase information includes a phase difference between phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively; or,
  • the phase difference between the respective phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources on the R ports and a second reference phase, where the second reference phase is the second reference signal of the port with the smallest port number among the R ports The phase corresponding to the resource.
  • the second phase information includes the phase difference between the phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively, or , the phase difference between the corresponding phase of the second reference signal resource on the R ports and the second reference phase
  • this method can be adapted to the reporting method of RSRP in the existing beam management process, and the terminal equipment and The changes on both sides of the access network equipment are small, and the practicability is strong.
  • the second phase information includes R*(R-1) phase differences, or R-1 phase differences; the R*(R-1) phase differences are the R The phase difference between the phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the ports; the R-1 phase differences are the difference between the phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources on the R ports and the second reference phase respectively. phase difference.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device measures the RSRPs corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively; the terminal device sends eleventh indication information to the access network device, the The eleventh indication information is used to indicate the respective RSRPs corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports.
  • the terminal device further sends the RSRPs corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports of the access network device respectively.
  • the access network device can generate the second transmit beam according to the RSRP and the second phase information corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively. That is, the beam forming process is also used to obtain the RSRPs corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively, and it is not necessary to obtain the RSRPs corresponding to the R transmission beams through the beam management process.
  • receiving, by the terminal device, the second reference signal resource sent by the access network device includes: the terminal device receiving the second reference signal resource sent by the access network device using the same receive beam.
  • the access network device calculates and generates the second transmit beam based on the second phase information obtained by the terminal device using the same receive beam measurement, the receive beam of the terminal device should be limited on the terminal device side, In order to facilitate the access network device to generate a second transmission beam matching the channel conditions between the terminal device and the access network device, the communication performance of the communication between the terminal device and the access network device is improved.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device receives M reference signal resources sent by the access network device, the The M reference signal resources are used for beam management; the terminal device measures the M reference signal resources respectively to obtain the RSRPs corresponding to the R reference signal resources in the M reference signal resources, and the terminal device passes the first receiving beam Receiving the R pieces of reference signal information, R and M are both integers greater than or equal to 2, and M is greater than or equal to R; the terminal device sends fifth indication information and sixth indication information to the access network device, and the fifth indication The information is used to indicate the CRIs corresponding to the R reference signal resources respectively, and the sixth indication information is used to indicate the RSRPs corresponding to the R reference signal resources respectively; the terminal equipment receives the second reference signal resources sent by the access network equipment, including : the terminal device receives the second reference signal resource sent by the access network device through the first receiving beam.
  • the terminal device may report the RSRPs corresponding to the R reference signal resources respectively in the beam management process; and in the beam forming process, the terminal device reports the second phase information.
  • the access network device can generate the second transmission beam according to the RSRP and the second phase information corresponding to the R reference signal resources respectively, and communicate with the terminal device through the second transmission beam, thereby improving the efficiency between the terminal device and the access network device. The communication performance of the communication between them.
  • the method before the terminal device measures the second reference signal resource and obtains the second phase information, the method further includes: the terminal device receives seventh indication information sent by the access network device; the terminal device The device determines, according to the seventh indication information, to measure the phases of the second reference signal resources of the R ports of the access network device, where the R ports are configured in the access network device for sending the second reference The first R ports among the P ports of the signal resource, where P is an integer greater than R.
  • the access network device configures the terminal device to receive the second reference signal resource at P ports of the access network device, but the access network device determines the P number reported by the terminal device through the beam management process R of the transmit beams fit into the new transmit beam. Then the access network device can use the seventh indication information to instruct the terminal device to measure and report the phases of the second reference signal resources of the R ports of the access network device, thereby facilitating the access network device to generate the second transmission beam and improving the solution feasibility and practicality.
  • the method before the terminal device receives the second reference signal resource sent by the access network device, the method further includes: the terminal device sending the second capability information of the terminal device to the access network device ; wherein, the second capability information carries eighth indication information, and the eighth indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal device supports a reference signal transmission mode; the reference signal transmission mode is: the access network device transmits through the R beams and send the second reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource through the R ports of the access network device in consecutive R symbols in the time domain; the R transmit beams are in one-to-one correspondence with the R ports, and the R The ports correspond to the R symbols one-to-one.
  • the terminal device first reports the second capability information of the terminal device to the access network device, and indicates whether the terminal device supports reference signal transmission through the eighth indication information carried in the second capability information model.
  • the access network device can configure an appropriate resource configuration and reporting method for the terminal device according to the second capability information, so that the access network device can correctly parse the reporting amount of the terminal device and improve the implementability of the solution.
  • the second capability information also carries the maximum number of symbols supported by the terminal device, where the maximum number of symbols is the maximum number of symbols of the continuous measurement reference signal supported by the terminal device.
  • the second capability information may also carry the maximum number of symbols that the terminal device supports for continuous measurement of reference signals, so that the access network device can configure an appropriate resource configuration for the terminal device according to the maximum number of symbols and reporting methods to adapt to the reporting capabilities of the terminal equipment, thereby providing a basis for the implementation of the scheme and ensuring the practicability and integrity of the scheme.
  • the method before the terminal device receives the second reference signal resource sent by the access network device, the method further includes: the terminal device receiving the second configuration information sent by the access network device; the terminal device It is determined according to the second configuration information that the second reference signal resource is used for beamforming and reporting the second phase information of the second reference signal resource of the R ports.
  • the access network device configures an appropriate resource configuration and reporting method for the terminal device.
  • the second configuration information may be sent to the terminal device, so that the terminal device can determine according to the second configuration information. Reporting methods and other relevant information to facilitate the implementation of the plan.
  • a seventh aspect of the present application provides a communication device, the communication device comprising:
  • a transceiver module configured to receive M reference signal resources sent by the access network device
  • the processing module is configured to measure the M reference signal resources respectively, and obtain first measurement information, where the first measurement information includes first phase information, and the first phase information is for the communication device to measure the M reference signal resources respectively.
  • N and M are both integers greater than or equal to 1, and M is greater than or equal to N;
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send first indication information to the access network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the first phase information.
  • the M reference signal resources are used for beam management, and the first phase information is used for the access network device to generate a first transmission beam, and the first transmission beam is used for the access network device to communicate with each other. communication between the communication devices.
  • the first transmit beam does not belong to a transmit beam set
  • the transmit beam set includes transmit beams generated by the access network device and corresponding to the M reference signal resources respectively.
  • the first phase information includes a phase difference between phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively; or,
  • the first phase information includes the phase difference between the phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively and the first reference phase, where the first reference phase is the phase corresponding to the first reference signal resource, and the first reference signal resource is the The reference signal resource with the largest RSRP or the largest RSRQ among the N reference signal resources.
  • the first measurement information includes N CRIs, N RSRPs, and the first phase information, where the first phase information includes N*(N-1) phase differences, or N- 1 phase difference;
  • the N CRIs are the CRIs corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively,
  • the N RSRPs are the RSRPs corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively;
  • the N*(N-1) phase differences are the Phase differences between the phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively, and the N-1 phase differences are the phase differences between the phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively and the first reference phase.
  • the N reference signal resources among the M reference signal resources are received by the communication apparatus through the same receive beam.
  • the transceiver module is also used for:
  • the first capability information carries second indication information
  • the second indication information is used to indicate whether the communication device has the capability to generate the communication device for the access network device.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate whether the communication apparatus supports measurement of phase information corresponding to the reference signal resource used for beam management.
  • the first capability information further carries one or more of the following information: the communication apparatus supports the maximum number of transmit beams corresponding to the reference signal resources used for beam management combined; the communication apparatus Quantization capability information for quantizing the first phase information.
  • the transceiver module is also used for:
  • This processing module is also used to:
  • the first configuration information includes second configuration information of the first resource set, the second configuration information includes a repetition field, the repetition field is OFF, and the first resource set includes the M references signal resource.
  • the first configuration information further includes one or more of the following information:
  • third indication information where the third indication information is used to indicate that the first resource set is used for the access network device to generate the first transmission beam
  • the reporting granularity of the first phase information is the subband reporting granularity, size information of each subband.
  • the transceiver module is also used for:
  • Send twelfth indication information and thirteenth indication information to the access network device where the twelfth indication information is used to indicate the N CRIs corresponding to the N reference signal resources, and the thirteenth indication information is used to indicate the RSRPs corresponding to the N reference signal resources.
  • An eighth aspect of the present application provides a communication device, the communication device comprising:
  • a transceiver module configured to send M reference signal resources to a terminal device; receive first indication information sent by the terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate first phase information, and the first phase information is for the terminal device to measure N Phase information obtained from reference signal resources, the M reference signal resources include the N reference signal resources, N and M are both integers greater than or equal to 1, and M is greater than or equal to N;
  • the processing module is configured to generate a first transmission beam according to the first phase information indicated by the first indication information, where the first transmission beam is used for communication between the communication apparatus and the terminal device.
  • the M reference signal resources are used for beam management.
  • the first transmit beam does not belong to a transmit beam set
  • the transmit beam set includes transmit beams generated by the communication apparatus and corresponding to the M reference signal resources respectively.
  • the first phase information includes a phase difference between the phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively; or, the first phase information includes the phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively and The phase difference between the first reference phases, where the first reference phase is the phase corresponding to the first reference signal resource, and the first reference signal resource is the reference signal resource with the highest RSRP or the highest RSRQ among the N reference signal resources.
  • the first phase information includes N*(N-1) phase differences, or N-1 phase differences; the N*(N-1) phase differences are the N phase differences The phase differences between the phases corresponding to the reference signal resources respectively, and the N-1 phase differences are the phase differences between the phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively and the first reference phase.
  • the N reference signal resources in the M reference signal resources are received by the terminal device through the same receive beam.
  • the transceiver module is also used for:
  • the first capability information carries second indication information
  • the second indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal device has the information required for the communication device to generate the first transmit beam.
  • This processing module is also used to:
  • the terminal device It is determined according to the first capability information that the terminal device has a measurement capability of measuring the first phase information.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal device supports measurement of phase information corresponding to the reference signal resource used for beam management.
  • the first capability information further carries one or more of the following information: the terminal device supports the maximum number of transmit beams corresponding to the reference signal resources combined for beam management; the terminal device supports Quantization capability information for quantizing the first phase information.
  • the transceiver module is also used for:
  • the first configuration information includes second configuration information of the first resource set, the second configuration information includes a repetition field, the repetition field is OFF, and the first resource set includes the M references signal resource.
  • the first configuration information further includes one or more of the following information:
  • third indication information where the third indication information is used to indicate that the first resource set is used for the communication device to generate the first transmission beam
  • the reporting granularity of the first phase information is the subband reporting granularity, size information of each subband.
  • the transceiver module is also used for:
  • the terminal device Receive the twelfth indication information and the thirteenth indication information sent by the terminal device, where the twelfth indication information is used to indicate the N CRIs corresponding to the N reference signal resources, and the thirteenth indication information is used to indicate the N RSRP corresponding to each reference signal resource;
  • This processing module is also used to:
  • This processing module is specifically used for:
  • a first transmit beam is generated according to the first phase information and the RSRP corresponding to the N reference signal resources.
  • processing module is specifically used for:
  • the first transmission beam is generated according to the first synthesis weight and a second weight set, where the second weight set includes weights of the N transmission beams corresponding to the N reference signal resources.
  • a ninth aspect of the present application provides a communication device, the communication device comprising:
  • a transceiver module configured to receive a second reference signal resource sent by the access network device, where the second reference signal resource is a reference signal sent by the access network device through the R ports of the access network device and on the R transmission beams Signal resources, the R ports are in one-to-one correspondence with the R transmission beams, the R transmission beams are the transmission beams corresponding to the R reference signal resources generated by the access network device, and R is an integer greater than or equal to 2;
  • a processing module configured to measure the second reference signal resource to obtain second measurement information, where the second measurement information includes second phase information, and the second phase information is the second phase information measured by the communication device of the R ports respectively Phase information obtained from reference signal resources;
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send fourth indication information to the access network device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the second phase information.
  • the second reference signal resource is used for beam synthesis
  • the second phase information is used for the access network device to generate a second transmission beam
  • the second transmission beam is used for the access network device communicate with the communication device.
  • the second transmit beam does not belong to a transmit beam set
  • the transmit beam set includes transmit beams corresponding to M reference signal resources generated by the access network device
  • the M reference signal resources are used for
  • the M reference signal resources include the R reference signal resources, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 2, and the M is greater than or equal to the R.
  • the second phase information includes a phase difference between phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively; or,
  • the phase difference between the respective phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources on the R ports and a second reference phase, where the second reference phase is the second reference signal of the port with the smallest port number among the R ports The phase corresponding to the resource.
  • the second measurement information includes RSRPs corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively;
  • the second phase information includes R*(R-1) phase differences, or, R-1 phase differences;
  • the R*(R-1) phase differences are the phase differences between the phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports;
  • the R-1 phase differences are the R The phase difference between the respective phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources on the respective ports and the second reference phase.
  • the transceiver module is also used for:
  • Eleventh indication information is sent to the access network device, where the eleventh indication information is used to indicate the respective RSRPs corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports.
  • the transceiver module is specifically used for:
  • the second reference signal resource sent by the access network device is received by using the same receive beam.
  • the transceiver module is specifically used for:
  • This processing module is also used to:
  • the transceiver module is also used to:
  • the transceiver module is specifically used for:
  • the second reference signal resource sent by the access network device is received through the first receiving beam.
  • the transceiver module is also used for:
  • This processing module is also used to:
  • the seventh indication information it is determined to measure the phases of the second reference signal resources of the R ports of the access network device, where the R ports are configured in the access network device for sending second reference signals The first R ports among the P ports of the resource, where P is an integer greater than R.
  • the transceiver module is also used for:
  • the second capability information carries eighth indication information, and the eighth indication information is used to indicate whether the communication device supports a reference signal sending mode;
  • the reference signal The transmission mode is: the access network device sends the second reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource through the R transmission beams and the R ports of the access network device in consecutive R symbols in the time domain; the The R transmit beams are in one-to-one correspondence with the R ports, and the R ports are in one-to-one correspondence with the R symbols.
  • the second capability information further carries the maximum number of symbols supported by the communication device, where the maximum number of symbols is the maximum number of symbols of the continuous measurement reference signal supported by the communication device.
  • the transceiver module is also used for:
  • This processing module is also used to:
  • the second reference signal resource is used for beamforming and reporting the second phase information of the second reference signal resource of the R ports.
  • a tenth aspect of the present application provides a communication device, the communication device comprising:
  • the transceiver module is used to transmit the second reference signal resource to the terminal device through the R ports of the communication device and on the R transmit beams, the R ports are in one-to-one correspondence with the R transmit beams, and the R transmit beams are The transmission beams corresponding to the R reference signal resources generated by the communication apparatus, where R is an integer greater than or equal to 2; receiving fourth indication information sent by the terminal device, where the fourth indication information indicates second phase information, the second The phase information is phase information obtained by the terminal equipment by measuring the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively;
  • the processing module is configured to generate a second transmission beam according to the second phase information indicated by the fourth indication information, where the second transmission beam is used for communication between the communication apparatus and the terminal device.
  • the second reference signal resource is used for beamforming.
  • the second transmit beam does not belong to a transmit beam set
  • the transmit beam set includes transmit beams corresponding to M reference signal resources generated by the communication device
  • the M reference signal resources are used for beams Management
  • the M reference signal resources include the R reference signal resources
  • M is an integer greater than or equal to 2
  • the M is greater than or equal to the R.
  • the second phase information includes a phase difference between phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively; or, the second reference signal resources on the R ports are respectively The corresponding phases are respectively the phase differences with the second reference phase, where the second reference phase is the phase corresponding to the second reference signal resource of the port with the smallest port number among the R ports.
  • the transceiver module is also used for:
  • the eleventh indication information sent by the terminal device, where the eleventh indication information is used to indicate the RSRPs corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively;
  • the second phase information includes R*(R-1) Phase difference, or R-1 phase differences;
  • the R*(R-1) phase differences are the phase differences between the phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively;
  • the R-1 phase differences The phase difference is the phase difference between the respective phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources on the R ports and the second reference phase.
  • the transceiver module is also used for:
  • the transceiver module is also used for:
  • This processing module is also used to:
  • the reference signal transmission mode is: the communication device transmits R consecutive beams in the time domain through the R transmission beams and the R ports of the communication device The symbol transmits the second reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource; the R transmit beams are in one-to-one correspondence with the R ports, and the R ports are in one-to-one correspondence with the R symbols.
  • the second capability information also carries the maximum number of symbols supported by the terminal device, where the maximum number of symbols is the maximum number of symbols of the continuous measurement reference signal supported by the terminal device.
  • the transceiver module is also used for:
  • Second configuration information is used to configure the second reference signal resources for beamforming, and configure the terminal device to report second phase information of the second reference signal resources of the R ports .
  • the transceiver module is also used for:
  • the third message carries fifth indication information and sixth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate the CRIs corresponding to the R reference signal resources respectively, and the sixth indication information is used for Indicate the RSRPs corresponding to the R reference signal resources respectively, and the R reference signal resources are in one-to-one correspondence with the R transmission beams;
  • This processing module is also used to:
  • This processing module is specifically used for:
  • the second transmission beam is generated according to the second phase information and the RSRPs corresponding to the R reference signal resources respectively.
  • processing module is specifically used for:
  • the second transmission beam is generated according to the second synthesis weight and a third weight set, where the third weight set includes weights of the R transmission beams corresponding to the R reference signal resources.
  • An eleventh aspect of the present application provides a communication device, the communication device comprising:
  • a transceiver module configured to receive M reference signal resources sent by the access network device
  • a processing module configured to measure N reference signal resources in the M reference signal resources to obtain first phase information, where N and M are both integers greater than or equal to 1, and M is greater than or equal to N;
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send first indication information to the access network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the first phase information.
  • the M reference signal resources are used for beam management, and the first phase information is used for the access network device to generate a first transmission beam, and the first transmission beam is used for the access network device to communicate with each other. communication between the communication devices.
  • the first phase information includes a phase difference between phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively; or,
  • the first phase information includes the phase difference between the phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively and the first reference phase, where the first reference phase is the phase corresponding to the first reference signal resource, and the first reference signal resource is the The reference signal resource with the largest RSRP or the largest RSRQ among the N reference signal resources.
  • processing module is also used to:
  • the RSRPs corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively are measured.
  • the first phase information includes N*(N-1) phase differences, or N-1 phase differences; the N CRIs are CRIs corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively , the N RSRPs are the RSRPs corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively; the N*(N-1) phase differences are the phase differences between the phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively, and the N-1 phase differences are The phase difference is the phase difference between the phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively and the first reference phase.
  • the N reference signal resources among the M reference signal resources are received by the communication apparatus through the same receive beam.
  • the transceiver module is also used for:
  • the first capability information carries second indication information
  • the second indication information is used to indicate whether the communication device has the capability to generate the communication device for the access network device.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate whether the communication apparatus supports measurement of phase information corresponding to the reference signal resource used for beam management.
  • the first capability information further carries one or more of the following information: the communication apparatus supports the maximum number of transmit beams corresponding to the reference signal resources used for beam management combined; the communication apparatus Quantization capability information for quantizing the first phase information.
  • the transceiver module is also used for:
  • This processing module is also used to:
  • the first configuration information includes second configuration information of the first resource set, the second configuration information includes a repetition field, the repetition field is OFF, and the first resource set includes the M references signal resource.
  • the first configuration information further includes one or more of the following information:
  • third indication information where the third indication information is used to indicate that the first resource set is used for the access network device to generate the first transmission beam
  • the reporting granularity of the first phase information is the subband reporting granularity, size information of each subband.
  • the transceiver module is also used for:
  • Send twelfth indication information and thirteenth indication information to the access network device where the twelfth indication information is used to indicate the N CRIs corresponding to the N reference signal resources, and the thirteenth indication information is used to indicate the RSRPs corresponding to the N reference signal resources.
  • a twelfth aspect of the present application provides a communication device, the communication device comprising:
  • a transceiver module configured to receive a second reference signal resource sent by the access network device, where the second reference signal resource is a reference signal sent by the access network device through the R ports of the access network device and on the R transmission beams Signal resources, the R ports are in one-to-one correspondence with the R transmission beams, the R transmission beams are the transmission beams corresponding to the R reference signal resources generated by the access network device, and R is an integer greater than or equal to 2;
  • a processing module configured to measure the second reference signal resources of the R ports, respectively, to obtain second phase information
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send a second message to the access network device, where the second message carries the fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate the second phase information.
  • the second reference signal resource is used for beam synthesis
  • the second phase information is used for the access network device to generate a second transmission beam
  • the second transmission beam is used for the access network device communicate with the communication device.
  • the second transmit beam does not belong to a transmit beam set
  • the transmit beam set includes transmit beams corresponding to M reference signal resources generated by the access network device
  • the M reference signal resources are used for
  • the M reference signal resources include the R reference signal resources, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 2, and the M is greater than or equal to the R.
  • the second phase information includes a phase difference between phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively; or,
  • the phase difference between the respective phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources on the R ports and a second reference phase, where the second reference phase is the second reference signal of the port with the smallest port number among the R ports The phase corresponding to the resource.
  • the second phase information includes R*(R-1) phase differences, or R-1 phase differences; the R*(R-1) phase differences are the R The phase difference between the phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the ports; the R-1 phase differences are the difference between the phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources on the R ports and the second reference phase respectively. phase difference.
  • processing module is also used to:
  • the transceiver module is also used to:
  • Eleventh indication information is sent to the access network device, where the eleventh indication information is used to indicate the RSRPs corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively.
  • the transceiver module is specifically used for:
  • the second reference signal resource sent by the access network device is received by using the same receive beam.
  • the transceiver module is also used for:
  • This processing module is also used to:
  • the transceiver module is also used to:
  • the transceiver module is specifically used for:
  • the second reference signal resource sent by the access network device is received through the first receiving beam.
  • the transceiver module is also used for:
  • This processing module is also used to:
  • the seventh indication information it is determined to measure the phases of the second reference signal resources of the R ports of the access network device, where the R ports are configured in the access network device for sending second reference signals The first R ports among the P ports of the resource, where P is an integer greater than R.
  • the transceiver module is also used for:
  • the second capability information carries eighth indication information, and the eighth indication information is used to indicate whether the communication device supports a reference signal sending mode;
  • the reference signal The transmission mode is: the access network device sends the second reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource through the R transmission beams and the R ports of the access network device in consecutive R symbols in the time domain; the The R transmit beams are in one-to-one correspondence with the R ports, and the R ports are in one-to-one correspondence with the R symbols.
  • the second capability information further carries the maximum number of symbols supported by the communication device, where the maximum number of symbols is the maximum number of symbols of the continuous measurement reference signal supported by the communication device.
  • the transceiver module is also used for:
  • This processing module is also used to:
  • the second reference signal resource is used for beamforming and reporting the second phase information of the second reference signal resource of the R ports.
  • a thirteenth aspect of the present application provides a communication device, where the communication device includes: a processor and a memory.
  • a computer program or computer instruction is stored in the memory, and the processor is further configured to call and execute the computer program or computer instruction stored in the memory, so that the processor implements any one of the implementation manners in the first aspect.
  • the communication device further includes a transceiver, and the processor is configured to control the transceiver to send and receive signals.
  • a fourteenth aspect of the present application provides a communication device, where the communication device includes: a processor and a memory.
  • a computer program or computer instruction is stored in the memory, and the processor is used to call and execute the computer program or computer instruction stored in the memory, so that the processor implements any one of the implementation manners in the second aspect.
  • the communication device further includes a transceiver, and the processor is configured to control the transceiver to send and receive signals.
  • a fifteenth aspect of the present application provides a communication device, where the communication device includes: a processor and a memory.
  • a computer program or computer instruction is stored in the memory, and the processor is further configured to invoke and execute the computer program or computer instruction stored in the memory, so that the processor implements any one of the implementation manners in the third aspect.
  • the communication device further includes a transceiver, and the processor is configured to control the transceiver to send and receive signals.
  • a sixteenth aspect of the present application provides a communication device, the communication device includes: a processor and a memory.
  • a computer program or computer instruction is stored in the memory, and the processor is further configured to invoke and execute the computer program or computer instruction stored in the memory, so that the processor implements any one of the implementation manners in the fourth aspect.
  • the communication device further includes a transceiver, and the processor is configured to control the transceiver to send and receive signals.
  • a seventeenth aspect of the present application provides a communication device, where the communication device includes: a processor and a memory.
  • the memory stores computer programs or computer instructions
  • the processor is used to invoke and execute the computer programs or computer instructions stored in the memory, so that the processor implements any one of the implementation manners in the fifth aspect.
  • the communication device further includes a transceiver, and the processor is configured to control the transceiver to send and receive signals.
  • An eighteenth aspect of the present application provides a communication device, the communication device includes: a processor and a memory; a computer program or computer instructions are stored in the memory, and the processor is further configured to call and execute the computer program or computer program stored in the memory.
  • the communication device further includes a transceiver, and the processor is configured to control the transceiver to send and receive signals.
  • a nineteenth aspect of the present application provides a computer program product comprising instructions, characterized in that, when it runs on a computer, the computer causes the computer to execute the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect, the fourth aspect, the first aspect, and the third aspect.
  • a twentieth aspect of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, comprising computer instructions that, when the instructions are run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect, the fourth aspect, and the fifth aspect and any one of the implementations of any one of the sixth aspect.
  • a twenty-first aspect of the present application provides a chip device, including a processor for invoking a computer program or computer instructions in the memory, so that the processor executes the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect, and the first aspect.
  • a chip device including a processor for invoking a computer program or computer instructions in the memory, so that the processor executes the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect, and the first aspect.
  • the processor is coupled to the memory through an interface.
  • a twenty-second aspect of the present application provides a communication system, the communication system including the communication device of the seventh aspect and the communication device of the eighth aspect.
  • a twenty-third aspect of the present application provides a communication system, which includes the communication device of the ninth aspect and the communication device of the tenth aspect.
  • the terminal device receives M reference signal resources sent by the access network device; then, the terminal device measures the M reference signal resources respectively to obtain first measurement information, where the first measurement information includes first phase information , the first phase information is phase information obtained by the terminal device by measuring N reference signal resources respectively, the M reference signal resources include N reference signal resources, N and M are both integers greater than or equal to 1, and M is greater than or is equal to N; then, the terminal device sends a first message to the access network device, where the first message carries first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate the first phase information.
  • the terminal device measures the first phase information of the N reference signal resources, and sends the first indication information to the access network device to indicate the first phase information.
  • the channel conditions between the access network equipment and the terminal equipment are constantly changing, and the N reference signal resources respectively correspond to the N transmission beams of the access network equipment. Therefore, the first phase information of the N reference signal resources can indicate the channel change between the access network device and the terminal device, so that the access network device can combine the first phase information to generate a matching channel between the terminal device and the access network device.
  • a new transmit beam according to the channel condition, or, from the N transmit beams of the access network device select a transmit beam that matches the channel condition between the terminal device and the access network device, so as to improve the access network device and the terminal device. communication performance between them.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a communication processing method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram of a channel status information reference signal (CSI-RS) resource according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • CSI-RS channel status information reference signal
  • FIG. 2C is another schematic diagram of CSI-RS resources according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 2D is a schematic diagram of the phase of the first reference signal and the phase of the second reference signal according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 2E is a schematic diagram of first configuration information according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 3A is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of a communication processing method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3B is a schematic diagram of a second reference signal resource according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 3C is another schematic diagram of a second reference signal resource according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 3D is a schematic diagram of second configuration information according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is another schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is another schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is another schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is another schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is another schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • a beam is a communication resource.
  • the beams can be wide beams, or narrow beams, or other types of beams.
  • the beam forming technology may be beamforming technology or other technical means.
  • the beamforming technology may specifically be a digital beamforming technology, an analog beamforming technology, and a hybrid digital/analog beamforming technology. Different beams can be considered as different resources.
  • the same information or different information can be sent through different beams.
  • multiple beams with the same or similar communication characteristics may be regarded as one beam.
  • One or more antenna ports may be included in a beam for transmitting data channels, control channels, sounding signals, etc.
  • a transmit beam may refer to the distribution of signal strengths formed in different directions in space after a signal is transmitted through an antenna.
  • the receiving beam may refer to the signal strength distribution of the wireless signal received from the antenna in different directions in space. It can be understood that one or more antenna ports forming a beam can also be regarded as an antenna port set.
  • the embodiment of the beam in the protocol can also be a spatial filter.
  • Transmission configuration index state (TCI state): In 3GPP Release 15 (R15), for each physical channel or physical signal, the network can use different signaling to indicate the beam to the terminal device to instruct the terminal device how to Receive downlink physical channels or physical signals, and instruct terminal equipment how to send uplink physical channels or physical signals.
  • the R15 downlink beam indication is implemented through TCI.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system includes one or more access network devices 100 (only one is shown in FIG. 1 ) and one or more terminal devices (the two terminal devices shown in FIG. 1 are terminal device 101 and terminal device 102 respectively) .
  • the access network device 100 is respectively connected to the one or more terminal devices.
  • the access network device 100 is a device with a wireless transceiver function, and is used to communicate with the terminal device 101 .
  • the access network device 100 includes but is not limited to base stations, and the base stations include various forms of macro base stations, micro base stations, relay stations, and access network points.
  • the base station may be a base station in a new radio interface (new radio, NR), a transmission reception point (transmission reception point, TRP), a transmission point (transmission point, TP), a small cell, and a next-generation node.
  • the access network device 100 may also be a wearable device, a vehicle-mounted device, or the like.
  • Terminal equipment may be referred to as user equipment (UE), access terminal, subscriber unit, subscriber station, Mobile Station (MS), mobile station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication device , user devices, etc.
  • the terminal device can be a cellular phone, a smart phone, a wireless data card, a personal digital assistant (PDA) computer, a tablet computer, a wireless modem (modem), a laptop computer (laptop computer), machine type communication (MTC), various wireless communication-capable handheld devices (handset), computer equipment, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, computing devices, other processing devices connected to wireless modems , or a terminal device in a 5G communication system, or a terminal device in an NR system, or a terminal device in a communication system after the 5G network.
  • the terminal equipment in the public land mobile network Public Land Mobile Network, PLMN
  • PLMN Public Land Mobile Network
  • the terminal device may report channel information to the access network device, where the channel information is used to characterize the channel condition between the terminal device and the access network device.
  • the access network device can generate a transmission beam matching the channel condition according to the channel information, thereby improving the communication performance between the access network device and the terminal device.
  • the generation of the transmission beam by the access network device that matches the channel condition can be evolved from beam management to beam calculation.
  • the channel condition is reflected by taking the amplitude information of the reference signal (for example, the signal quality of the reference signal) and the phase information of the reference signal as an example for introduction.
  • the channel condition can also be characterized by other parameters.
  • delay spread Doppler spread
  • Doppler shift average delay
  • Average gain Spatial correlation parameters
  • transmission antenna spatial correlation parameters For example, the channel spatial correlation parameters.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device reports the amplitude information of the N reference signals to the access network device, it also reports the first phase information obtained by the terminal device by measuring the N reference signals to the access network device; then, The access network device generates a first transmit beam according to the first phase information and the amplitude information of the N reference signals.
  • the terminal device reports the amplitude information of the N reference signals to the access network device, it also reports the first phase information obtained by the terminal device by measuring the N reference signals to the access network device; then, The access network device generates a first transmit beam according to the first phase information and the amplitude information of the N reference signals.
  • the embodiment of the present application adds a beamforming process, and the beamforming process may be performed after the beam management process.
  • the terminal device measures the second phase information of the second reference signal resource sent by the access network device through the R ports of the access network device in the beamforming process, and reports the second phase information to the access network device;
  • the network access device generates a second transmit beam according to the second phase information and the amplitude information of the reference signal, where the amplitude information of the reference signal may be the amplitude information of the reference signal of the second reference signal resource of the R ports, or , during the beam management process, the amplitude information of the N reference signals measured and reported by the terminal equipment.
  • the amplitude information of the reference signal may be the amplitude information of the reference signal of the second reference signal resource of the R ports, or , during the beam management process, the amplitude information of the N reference signals measured and reported by the terminal equipment.
  • the signal quality of the reference signal includes multiple types. For example, RSRP, RSRQ) and signal to interference and noise ratio (signal to interference and noise ratio, SINR). That is, the signal quality of the reference signal can be characterized by at least one parameter among the RSRP, RSRQ and SINR.
  • the signal quality of the reference signal is represented by the RSRP of the reference signal as an example for description, and the same applies to other parameters.
  • FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a communication processing method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method includes:
  • the access network device sends M reference signal resources to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device receives the M reference signal resources sent by the access network device.
  • Step 201 is specifically: M reference signals respectively sent by the access network device to the terminal device according to the configuration of the M reference signal resources, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the M reference signal resources respectively sent by the access network device according to the configuration of the M reference signal resources. of M reference signals.
  • the access network device sends M reference signal resources to the terminal device.
  • Description mode 2 The access network device sends the M reference signals to the terminal device according to the configuration of the M reference signal resources.
  • Description mode 3 The terminal equipment receiving M reference signal resources sent by the access network equipment is equivalent to.
  • Description mode 4 The terminal device receives the M reference signals respectively sent by the access network device according to the configuration of the M reference signal resources.
  • each reference signal resource in the M reference signal resources corresponds to one transmission beam, and the transmission beams corresponding to different reference signal resources are the same or different. It should be noted that, the respective transmit beams corresponding to the M reference signal resources should include at least two different transmit beams.
  • the M reference signal resources are in one-to-one correspondence with the M transmission beams, that is, each reference signal resource has a corresponding transmission beam, and different reference signal resources correspond to different transmission beams.
  • the M transmission beams are transmission beams corresponding to the M reference signal resources generated by the access network device, and the M transmission beams are transmission beams with fixed weights.
  • the transmit beam with fixed weight is also called fixed (or static) analog transmit beam, or fixed pattern (pattern) analog transmit beam, or fixed codebook (codebook) analog transmit beam, or basic (basic) analog transmit beam transmit beam.
  • the codebook may also be called a weight (weight vector or weight matrix), so the M transmission beams are referred to as transmission beams with fixed weights hereinafter.
  • the fixed pattern refers to the number of analog transmit beams that the device can generate, the direction of the main lobe of each analog transmit beam, beam width, beam gain and other characteristic parameters are fixed, and the characteristic parameters do not change with time. changes with the change.
  • the access network device transmits M reference signal resources through M reference signal resources and through M transmission beams, respectively, the M reference signal resources and the M reference signals have a one-to-one correspondence, and the M reference signal resources One-to-one correspondence with the M transmit beams. Then, the terminal device receives the M reference signals respectively through the M reference signal resources.
  • the M reference signals are M CSI-RSs
  • the M reference signal resources are CSI-RS resources.
  • the M reference signal resources are used for beam management.
  • CSI-RS resources with a single port (port) or a two-port single symbol (symbol) and a frequency domain density (density) of 1 or 3 can be used for beam management.
  • the following describes the process of sending the CSI-RS corresponding to the CSI-RS resource by the access network device by taking a CSI-RS resource of a single port and a single symbol with a frequency domain density of 3 as an example.
  • the abscissa is an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (orthogonal frequency division multiplexing, OFDM) symbol, the ordinate is a frequency, and a resource element (resource element, RE) is a granularity.
  • a resource element resource element, RE
  • FIG. 2B three REs included in a resource block (RB) in a slot (slot) are occupied by a CSI-RS resource, that is, it can be understood that the position of the CSI-RS resource in the RB is The position of the shaded part (three REs in the RB) shown in FIG. 2B , and the number of RBs occupied by the CSI-RS resource is specifically configured by the access network device.
  • each CSI-RS resource has a corresponding transmit beam, and different CSI-RS resources correspond to different transmit beams.
  • the access network device can transmit 16 CSI-RSs through 16 slots and 16 transmit beams respectively.
  • 16 CSI-RS resources are located in 16 slots, 16 CSI-RS resources are in one-to-one correspondence with 16 transmit beams, and 16 CSI-RS resources are in one-to-one correspondence with 16 CSI-RS resources, so that the terminal equipment can 16 CSI-RS measurements.
  • each CSI-RS resource occupies three REs included in one RB in one slot.
  • the shaded parts of different types indicate that different CSI-RS resources occupy the positions of three REs of different RBs respectively, while The number of RBs occupied by each CSI-RS resource is specifically configured by the access network device.
  • each CSI-RS resource has a corresponding transmit beam, and different CSI-RS resources correspond to different transmit beams.
  • the 16 transmit beams are transmit beams with fixed weights. Then, the access network device can send 16 CSI-RSs through 4 slots respectively.
  • 16 CSI-RS resources correspond to 4 slots, 16 CSI-RS resources are in one-to-one correspondence with 16 transmit beams, and 16 CSI-RSs are in one-to-one correspondence with 16 CSI-RS resources. Measurement of the 16 CSI-RSs.
  • the access network device may send the 16 CSI-RSs periodically, semi-persistently, or aperiodically. For example, every other period (for example, 20ms), the access network device sends the 16 CSI-RSs once according to the resource configuration of the 16 CSI-RSs.
  • the terminal device measures M reference signal resources to obtain first measurement information.
  • the first measurement information includes first phase information.
  • the first phase information is phase information obtained by the terminal device by measuring N reference signals respectively.
  • the M reference signal resources include the N reference signal resources, where N and M are both integers greater than or equal to 1, and M is greater than or equal to N.
  • Step 202 is specifically as follows: the terminal device measures M reference signals corresponding to the M reference signal resources to obtain the first measurement information. That is to say, it can be understood that the terminal equipment measuring M reference resources to obtain the first measurement information is equivalent to the terminal equipment measuring M reference signals corresponding to the M reference signal resources to obtain the first measurement information.
  • the terminal device measures M reference signals corresponding to the M reference signal resources to obtain RSRPs of the M reference signals; then, the terminal device selects the N reference signals from the M reference signals Signal. The terminal device measures the N reference signals to obtain first phase information of the N reference signals.
  • the terminal device measures the M reference signals corresponding to the M reference signal resources, and obtains the RSRP of the M reference signals and the phase information of the M reference signals;
  • the RSRP of the M reference signals and the phase information of the M reference signals select the RSRP of the N reference signals and the first phase information of the N reference signals.
  • the terminal device can obtain the first measurement information, where the first measurement information includes the RSRP of the N reference signals, the CRI of the N reference signals, and the first phase information.
  • the terminal device selects the M reference When selecting N reference signals from the signal, the channel capacity formed by the N transmission beams corresponding to the N reference signals obtained by the selection should be the largest or the rank of the channel formed by the N transmission beams should be the highest.
  • the access network device transmits M reference signal resources through M transmission beams respectively in M reference signal resources, and the M reference signal resources respectively correspond to the M transmission beams generated by the access network device, and the M reference signal resources are in one-to-one correspondence with the M transmission beams generated by the access network device.
  • a transmit beam is a transmit beam with a fixed weight. Since the RSRPs of the M reference signals can reflect the beam quality of the M transmission beams, the terminal device can select N reference signals from the M reference signals in descending order of the size of the RSRPs, so that the N reference signals correspond to The channel capacity formed by the N transmit beams is maximized.
  • the access network device may configure the terminal device to report the RSRP and the first phase information corresponding to the N reference signals, or the communication protocol may stipulate that the terminal device reports the RSRP and the first phase information corresponding to the N reference signals. This application is not limited.
  • the content included in the first phase information is the phase of the reference signal, or the phase difference between different reference signals.
  • the first phase information includes the phases of the reference signals. 1.
  • the first phase information includes the phases of the N reference signals corresponding to the N reference signal resources.
  • the terminal device measures the phases of the N reference signals; then, the terminal device reports the phases of the N reference signals to the access network device through the indication information, or the terminal device directly reports the phase of the N reference signals to the access network device. phase.
  • the access network device calculates and obtains the difference between the N reference signals according to the phases of the N reference signals. phase difference between.
  • the N reference signals include a first reference signal and a second reference signal.
  • FIG. 2D shows the change of the phase of the first reference signal and the phase of the second reference signal as the frequency changes. It can be seen from this that the phase of the reference signal is related to the frequency used to transmit the reference signal. Therefore, if the terminal device wants to correctly reflect the phase information of the N reference signals, for different frequencies of the N reference signal resources, the terminal device needs to feed back the respective phases corresponding to the N reference signals on different frequencies.
  • the terminal device can feed back the initial frequencies of the N reference signals, the initial phases corresponding to the N reference signals at the initial frequencies, and the phase changes corresponding to the N reference signals as the frequency changes (also That is, the slope corresponding to the linear relationship between the phase of the reference signal and the frequency), so as to feed back the respective phases corresponding to the N reference signals at different frequencies.
  • the first phase information specifically includes any of the following:
  • the first phase information includes phase differences between phases corresponding to the N reference signals corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively.
  • the first phase information specifically includes N*(N-1) phase differences.
  • the N reference signal resources include reference signal resource 1, reference signal resource 2 and reference signal resource 3.
  • the reference signal resource 1 corresponds to phase 1
  • the reference signal resource 2 corresponds to phase 2
  • the reference signal resource 3 corresponds to phase 3.
  • the first phase information includes the phase difference between phase 1 and phase 2, the phase difference between phase 2 and phase 3, and the phase difference between phase 1 and phase 3.
  • the first phase information includes a phase difference between the phases corresponding to the N reference signals corresponding to the N reference signal resources and the first reference phase respectively.
  • the first phase information specifically includes N-1 phase differences.
  • the terminal device obtains the first phase information measured in the beam management process (specifically, the terminal device measures other reference signals in the N reference signals except the reference signal corresponding to the first reference phase, and obtains The phase difference between the phase of the other reference signal and the first reference phase), so the first measurement information includes the first phase information, the first measurement information also includes the N CRIs corresponding to the N reference signal resources, the RSRPs of the N reference signal resources (that is, the RSRPs of the N reference signals corresponding to the N reference signal resources).
  • the first reference phase includes any of the following possible forms:
  • the first reference phase is the phase corresponding to the reference signal resource with the largest RSRP among the N reference signal resources.
  • the first reference phase is the phase of the reference signal with the largest RSRP among the N reference signals corresponding to the N reference signal resources.
  • the terminal device may use the phase of the reference signal with the largest RSRP as the first reference phase to adapt to the RSRP reporting mechanism in the beam management process.
  • the first reference phase is the phase corresponding to the reference signal resource with the smallest RSRP among the N reference signal resources.
  • the first reference phase is the phase of the reference signal with the smallest RSRP among the N reference signals corresponding to the N reference signal resources.
  • the first reference phase is a reference signal resource whose RSRP is greater than or equal to a first preset threshold among the N reference signal resources.
  • the first reference phase is the phase of the reference signal whose RSRP is greater than or equal to the first preset threshold in the N reference signals corresponding to the N reference signal resources.
  • the value of the first preset threshold is -140dBm (decibel milliwatt), -116dBm, or -108dBm.
  • the value setting factors of the first preset threshold include: the receiver sensitivity of the terminal device, the signal strength required to support the lowest modulation and coding mode, the signal strength required to support the lowest transmission rate, the difference between the terminal device and the access network device. channel status, current network transmission conditions, etc.
  • the first reference phase is the reference signal resource first sent by the access network device among the N reference signal resources.
  • the first reference phase is a reference signal first sent by the access network device among the N reference signals corresponding to the N reference signal resources.
  • the access network device will respectively send four CSI-RSs on the time-frequency resources of the shaded part in FIG. 2C .
  • the access network device first transmits the CSI-RS carried on the 11th OFDM symbol, then the access network device takes the phase of the CSI-RS as the first reference phase.
  • the first reference phase is the last reference signal resource sent by the access network device among the N reference signal resources.
  • the first reference phase is the last reference signal sent by the access network device among the N reference signals corresponding to the N reference signal resources.
  • the access network device will respectively send four CSI-RSs on the time-frequency resources of the shaded part in FIG. 2C .
  • the access network device takes the phase of the CSI-RS as the first reference phase.
  • the first reference phase is the reference signal resource with the largest reference signal resource identifier among the N reference signal resources.
  • the first reference phase is the reference signal resource with the smallest reference signal resource identifier among the N reference signal resources.
  • the reference signal resource identifier is CSI-RS resource ID.
  • the first reference phase Some possible implementations of the first reference phase are shown above. In practical applications, there may be other implementations. Specifically, this application does not limit the selection of the first reference phase.
  • the terminal device does not need to report the phase corresponding to each reference signal, thereby saving signaling overhead.
  • the difference in the phase difference between the first reference signal and the second reference signal is small, that is, the phase difference between the first reference signal and the second reference signal is different.
  • the frequency is relatively stable, and the terminal equipment does not need to report the phase difference of the two reference signals at different frequencies, which further reduces signaling overhead.
  • the N reference signal resources are received by the terminal device through the same receive beam.
  • the terminal device receives N reference signals corresponding to the N reference signal resources sent by the access network device through the same receiving beam.
  • the access network device obtains the amplitude information of the N reference signals corresponding to the N reference signal resources (that is, the RSRP of the N reference signals) and the N reference signals based on the measurement by the terminal device using the same receive beam.
  • the first phase information is calculated to generate the first transmit beam. Therefore, the receiving beam of the terminal device should be limited on the terminal device side, so that the access network device can generate the first transmit beam that matches the channel conditions between the terminal device and the access network device, thereby improving the connection between the terminal device and the access network device.
  • the communication performance of the communication between devices is not limited to the terminal device side, so that the access network device can generate the first transmit beam that matches the channel conditions between the terminal device and the access network device, thereby improving the connection between the terminal device and the access network device.
  • the above step 202 shows the process of the terminal equipment measuring the RSRP corresponding to the M reference signal resources respectively and the first phase information corresponding to the N reference signal resources.
  • the process of measuring the RSRP corresponding to the M reference signal resources by the terminal device and the process of measuring the first phase information corresponding to the N reference signal resources by the terminal device may be two independent measurement processes.
  • the measurement sequence of the terminal equipment for measuring the RSRP corresponding to the M reference signal resources and the first phase information corresponding to the N reference signal resources is not limited.
  • the terminal device sends a first message to the access network device.
  • the first message carries first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate the first phase information.
  • the terminal device measures the first phase information and reports the first phase information in the beam management process. Therefore, the first message also carries twelfth indication information and thirteenth indication information, where the twelfth indication information is used to indicate the CRIs corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively. The thirteenth indication information is used to indicate the RSRP of the N reference signal resources.
  • the terminal equipment uses a seven-bit absolute value quantization method to report the largest RSRP among the RSRPs corresponding to the N CRIs. Except for the largest RSRP among the RSRPs, the four-bit relative difference quantization method is used for reporting. Therefore, in order to match the way in which the terminal equipment reports RSRP in the existing beam management process, the first phase information includes the phase difference between the phases of the N reference signals corresponding to the N reference signal resources and the first reference phase, and The content carried by the first message is described by taking the reference signal with the largest RSRP as the reference phase among the N reference signals corresponding to the N reference signal resources as an example.
  • the first message is used to indicate the bit widths occupied by different reporting amounts respectively.
  • the reported amount includes the CRI, the RSRP of the reference signal with the largest RSRP, the RSRP difference (Differential RSRP), and the phase difference (Differential Phase). Please refer to Table 1 for details.
  • the CSI-RS resource set includes M reference signal resources in step 201 above.
  • the table 1 is obtained by adding the reported amount Differential Phase to the existing table.
  • the Differential Phase is reported to the access network device using four bits. That is, each phase difference occupies four bits in the first message.
  • the table 2 is obtained by adding three rows of Differential Phase #2-#1, Differential Phase #3-#1 and Differential Phase #4-#1 in the existing table.
  • Differential Phase #2-#1 represents the phase difference between CRS-RS corresponding to CRI#1 and CRI#2 respectively.
  • Differential Phase #3-#1 indicates the phase difference between the CRS-RS corresponding to CRI#3 and CRI#1 respectively.
  • Differential Phase #4-#1 indicates the phase difference between the CRS-RS corresponding to CRI#4 and CRI#1 respectively.
  • phase differences that fall into different value ranges have corresponding values.
  • the phase of the reference signal corresponding to CRI#1 is 6/8*pi
  • the phase of the reference signal corresponding to CRI#2 is 7/8*pi
  • the Differential Phase#2-#1 falls within 1/8* pi ⁇ Phase>0
  • the value corresponding to 1/8*pi ⁇ Phase>0 is DIFFRSRP_7
  • four bits are used to represent DIFFRSRP_7, which is "0111”.
  • Differential Phase #3-#1 is similar to Differential Phase #4-#1, and will not be explained here.
  • Table 1 and Table 2 are examples, and do not belong to a limitation to the embodiments of the present application.
  • Table 3 other quantization precisions can also be used, or the phase difference can be represented according to other quantization precisions that the terminal device can support. For example, if the quantization precision supported by the terminal device is 1/4*pi, since the quantization range is 2*pi, it can be known that there are totally 8 states of phase difference.
  • the values corresponding to the phase differences in different value ranges are shown below in conjunction with Table 4:
  • the total number of states of the phase difference is determined by the size of the quantization range and the quantization precision.
  • the bit width occupied by each phase difference in the aforementioned Table 1 is related to the total number of states of the phase difference.
  • the state of the phase difference in Table 3 indicates that there are 16 kinds in total, so the bit width occupied by each phase difference is at least 4 bits.
  • the above Table 1 and Table 2 are only for introducing the specific form of the first indication information carried in the first message.
  • the first indication information reported by the terminal equipment can also be reported in other forms, and does not depend on the reporting method of RSRP in the beam management process. As long as the access network equipment and the terminal equipment have agreed on the reporting method in advance, the access network equipment The information reported by the terminal device can be correctly parsed.
  • This embodiment shows a manner in which the terminal device reports the first phase information and the amplitude information of the N reference signals (for example, the RSRPs of the N reference signals) corresponding to the first phase information and the N reference signal resources through the indication information, which avoids excessive signaling overhead. large problems, thereby reducing resource overhead.
  • the terminal device may also directly report the first phase information and the amplitude information of the N reference signals corresponding to the N reference signal resources to the access network device, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the foregoing step 203 shows the manner in which the terminal device reports the first indication information, the twelfth indication information and the thirteenth indication information to the access network device through the same message (the first message).
  • the first indication information, the twelfth indication information and the thirteenth indication information may be respectively sent to the access network device through different messages, or may also be the twelfth indication information and the thirteenth indication
  • the information is sent to the access network device through one message, and the first indication information is sent to the access network device through another message, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application are described by taking the manner in which the terminal device reports the first indication information, the twelfth indication information and the thirteenth indication information to the access network device through the same message (first message) as an example.
  • the access network device generates a first transmit beam according to the first phase information indicated by the first indication information.
  • the first transmission beam is used for communication between the access network device and the terminal device.
  • the first message also carries twelfth indication information and thirteenth indication information, where the twelfth indication information is used to indicate N CRIs corresponding to the N reference signal resources, and the thirteenth indication information is used to indicate the RSRP of N reference signals corresponding to N CRIs.
  • the access network device determines the RSRP of the N reference signals according to the twelfth indication information and the thirteenth indication information, and the access network device determines the first phase information of the N reference signals according to the first indication information. Then, the access network device generates a first transmit beam according to the first phase information of the N reference signals and the RSRP of the N reference signals.
  • the access network device determines the first weight set.
  • the first weight set includes weights respectively corresponding to the M transmission beams corresponding to the M reference signal resources. Specifically expressed as
  • the weight of the b i -th transmit beam in the M transmit beams is expressed as i is an integer greater than or equal to 0 and less than or equal to M-1. is a vector with a dimension of N t-ans ⁇ 1, where N t-ans is the number of antenna elements used in the access network device to transmit the reference signal corresponding to the b i -th transmit beam.
  • the number of antenna elements used by the access network device to transmit the reference signal corresponding to each of the M transmit beams is the same or different, and the terminal device is used to receive the corresponding number of the M transmit beams corresponding to each transmit beam.
  • the number of radio frequency channels of the reference signal is the same or different.
  • the number of antenna elements used for transmitting the reference signal corresponding to each of the M transmission beams in the access network equipment is N t-ans as an example.
  • the number of radio frequency channels used to receive the reference signal corresponding to each of the M transmission beams in the terminal device is N r as an example for introduction.
  • the access network equipment configures the terminal equipment to report the amplitude information of the N reference signals corresponding to the N reference signal resources (that is, the RSRP corresponding to the N reference signals respectively) and the first reference signal corresponding to the N reference signal resources. phase information.
  • the N transmission beams corresponding to the maximum RSRP strength among the M transmission beams are the N transmission beams corresponding to the first phase information of the N reference signals measured and reported by the terminal device.
  • W N is the set of weights of the N transmission beams.
  • W N is a subset of W.
  • W N including the weights of the first N transmission beams among the M transmission beams as an example for description.
  • W N includes the weights of the N transmission beams corresponding to the N RSRPs measured and reported by the terminal device.
  • the N transmission beams may be the RSRPs in the M reference signals corresponding to the M transmission beams.
  • the content reported by the terminal equipment is expanded (in the existing beam management process, the terminal equipment reports N reference signals Based on the RSRP, the first phase information of the N reference signals is newly reported), and the channel conditions between the terminal device and the access network device are indicated by the RSRP and the first phase information of the N reference signals.
  • Step 204 is described below by taking the terminal equipment reporting the first phase information of the N reference signals and the amplitude information of the N reference signals as an example.
  • Step 204 specifically includes step 204a and step 204b.
  • the amplitude information of the N reference signals is also referred to as the amplitude information of the N transmission beams (that is, the RSRP of the N reference signals, and is collectively referred to as the amplitude information of the N reference signals in the following steps 204a and 204b).
  • Step 204a The access network device determines the first synthesis weight ⁇ opt1 according to the first phase information and the amplitude information of the N reference signals.
  • the amplitude information of the N reference signals includes RSRPs of the N reference signals.
  • the first synthesis weight ⁇ opt1 is used by the access network device to generate a first transmission beam matching the channel conditions between the terminal device and the access network device.
  • the access network device determines the channel of each of the N transmission beams.
  • the access network device In order to calculate the first combination weight ⁇ opt1 , the access network device needs to obtain the channel of each of the N transmission beams. Taking the transmission beam with the fixed weight w b0 as an example, the terminal device measures and obtains: for the subcarrier k, the channel of the b 0th transmission beam with the fixed weight w b0 is:
  • H k is an N t-ans ⁇ N r matrix.
  • the channels of the N transmit beams are denoted as
  • the access network device calculates a first combining weight ⁇ opt1 that satisfies the channel capacity maximization requirement. Therefore, the problem can be specifically positioned as an optimization problem that solves the following equation (1):
  • argmax is the operator of the arguments of the maxima, and k is the number of the subcarrier.
  • the optimization problem described by the above formula (1) refers to: finding the first synthesis weight ⁇ opt1 in all ⁇ , so that the above formula (1) value is maximum.
  • the optimization problem shown above is an optimization problem determined based on the principle of maximizing channel capacity.
  • the solution of the optimization problem of Eq. (1) is limited by the constant modulus of ⁇ (subject to(st)
  • 2 1).
  • Equation (2) is a mathematical expression of the constant modulus limitation of a high-frequency device.
  • v 1 is the right singular vector or eigenvector corresponding to the largest eigenvalue of the channel covariance matrix R.
  • the channel covariance matrix R is:
  • ( ⁇ ) * is a complex conjugate operator
  • ( ⁇ )' is a conjugate transpose operator
  • k is the number of the subcarrier
  • the value of k is related to the transmission bandwidth of the reference signal.
  • the elements of the main diagonal of the channel covariance matrix of equation (5) are the squares of the amplitudes of the same transmit beam, and in equation (5)
  • Other elements in the channel protocol variance matrix other than the above-mentioned diagonal elements are the correlations of the amplitudes of different transmit beams.
  • the terminal device measures and obtains the first transmit beam, and obtains the Channel of the first transmit beam
  • the phase of the reference signal corresponding to the first transmit beam is expressed as
  • the element in the first row and the first column is actually the square of the amplitude of the reference signal corresponding to the first transmit beam, that is, the received energy of the reference signal corresponding to the first transmit beam. Specifically expressed as:
  • the off-diagonal elements can be calculated from the amplitude and phase of the different transmit beams.
  • the elements of the first row and the second column in formula (5) is the correlation between transmit beam w b0 and transmit beam w b1 .
  • set N r to 1, then It can be expressed as:
  • the access network device obtains the phase difference between the N reference signals corresponding to the N transmission beams according to the first phase information; then, the access network device determines the N reference signals according to the phase difference between the N reference signals phase of the reference signals, and generate a first synthesis weight ⁇ opt1 according to the phases of the N reference signals and the RSRP of the N reference signals (also referred to as the amplitude information of the N transmission beams).
  • the above equations (4) and (5) take the example that the transmission bandwidth ranges of the N reference signals corresponding to the N transmission beams are the same to describe the process of the access network device calculating the first synthesis weight ⁇ opt1 . .
  • the transmission bandwidth ranges of the N reference signals may also be different.
  • the following takes the process of determining the phase difference between the reference signal corresponding to the transmission beam w b0 and the reference signal corresponding to the transmission beam w b1 as an example to introduce the corresponding N transmission beams respectively.
  • the determination process of the phase difference between N reference signals The same applies to the acquisition of the phase difference between other reference signals.
  • the channel for the transmission beam w b0 is expressed as The channel for transmit beam w b1 is denoted as
  • the above-mentioned channel covariance matrix is constructed using the phase difference and amplitude of the reference signal using the subcarriers in the overlapping range.
  • the phase of the reference signal corresponding to the transmit beam w b1 within the range is adjusted to obtain The phase of the reference signal corresponding to the transmission beam w b1 within the range is calculated, and then the phase difference between the reference signal corresponding to the transmission beam w b1 and the reference signal corresponding to the transmission beam w b0 is calculated.
  • the specific adjustment method is as follows: the access network device adjusts according to the linear relationship between the phase and the frequency of the reference signal corresponding to the transmission beam w b1 .
  • the phase of the reference signal corresponding to the transmit beam w b1 of sub-carrier 1 is equal to the phase of the reference signal corresponding to the transmit beam w b1 of sub-carrier 2 plus the slope * (frequency of sub-carrier 1 - frequency of sub-carrier 2), the slope is the slope corresponding to the linear relationship between the phase of the reference signal corresponding to the transmit beam w b1 and the frequency.
  • the access network device can obtain the phase differences of the reference signals corresponding to the N transmission beams within the same bandwidth, and then construct a channel covariance matrix similar to the above formula (4), thereby realizing the determination of the first synthesis weight ⁇ opt1 .
  • the above equations (4) and (5) introduce the process of the access network device calculating and obtaining the first synthesis weight ⁇ opt1 with the granularity of subcarriers.
  • the first synthesis weight ⁇ opt1 may also be calculated with other bandwidths as the granularity. For example, RE granularity, RB granularity, resource block group (resource block group, RBG) granularity, or full-band granularity, etc.
  • the first transmission beam matches the channel condition between the terminal device and the access network device, and the channel capacity corresponding to the first transmission beam is maximized.
  • the access network device and the terminal device communicate and transmit through the first transmit beam, and the beam gain of the first transmit beam can be greatly improved, thereby improving the Communication performance between terminal equipment and access network equipment.
  • the channel capacity corresponding to the first transmission beam is maximized, and the channel corresponding to the first transmission beam is improved. capacity.
  • the M transmission beams are M transmission beams corresponding to the M reference signal resources generated by the access network device, and the M transmission beams are transmission beams with fixed weights.
  • the first sending beam does not belong to the sending beam set
  • the sending beam set includes M sending beams
  • the respective weights corresponding to the M sending beams are represented by the aforementioned first weight set
  • the M sending beams are fixed.
  • the access network device communicates with the terminal device through the first transmission beam.
  • step 205 includes at least one of the following operations:
  • the access network device sends the reference signal corresponding to the first reference signal resource to the terminal device through the first transmission beam; then, the terminal device measures the reference signal corresponding to the first reference signal resource, so as to obtain the reference signal corresponding to the first transmission beam. channel information.
  • the access network device before the access network device sends the reference signal corresponding to the first reference signal resource, the access network device sends ninth indication information to the terminal device.
  • the ninth indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to receive the first reference signal resource through a first receive beam, where the first receive beam is used by the terminal device to receive N reference signals corresponding to the N reference signal resources receive beam.
  • the access network device configures the TCI state of the first reference signal resource through the quasi-co-location information periodic channel state information reference signal (qcl-InfoPeriodicCSI-RS) field in the first RRC signaling.
  • the specific configuration process is that the access network device configures the referencesignal value in the TCI of the first reference signal resource as the ID of any one of the N reference signal resources.
  • the access network device sends the first RRC signaling to the terminal device. In this way, the terminal device determines to receive the reference signal corresponding to the first reference signal resource through the first receiving beam according to the first RRC signaling.
  • the access network device sends the tenth indication information to the terminal device through the first sending beam.
  • the tenth indication information is used to instruct the terminal equipment to perform uplink transmission, downlink transmission and control channel transmission through the first receiving beam.
  • the tenth indication information includes the CRS-RS resource ID corresponding to any CRI in the foregoing Table 2, or includes the CRS-RS resource ID corresponding to the first reference signal resource.
  • the access network device configures the beam used for uplink transmission resources, downlink transmission resources and control channel transmission resources of the terminal device through TCIstate or spatial relationship information (spatialRelationInfo) in the second RRC signaling.
  • TCIstate or spatial relationship information (spatialRelationInfo) in the second RRC signaling.
  • spatialRelationInfo spatial relationship information
  • the specific configuration process is that the access network device configures the reference signal (referencesignal) value in the TCIstate or spatialRelationInfo of the terminal device for uplink transmission resources, downlink transmission resources and/or control channel transmission resources as the N reference signal resources The ID of any one of the reference signal resources; or, the access network device configures the referencesignal value in the TCIstate or spatialRelationInfo of the terminal device for uplink transmission resources, downlink transmission resources and/or control channel transmission resources as the first Reference the CRS-RS resource ID corresponding to the signal resource; then, the access network device sends the second RRC signaling to the terminal device. In this way, the terminal device determines to perform uplink transmission, downlink transmission and/or control channel transmission through the first receiving beam according to the second RRC signaling.
  • the reference signal reference signal
  • the access network equipment performs downlink transmission with the terminal equipment through the first transmission beam, and performs uplink transmission with the terminal equipment through the first transmission beam.
  • the terminal device performs time-frequency offset tracking on the first transmit beam.
  • the specific terminal device can obtain the time-frequency offset by measuring the first reference signal resource; or, the terminal device can obtain the time-frequency offset by measuring the tracking reference signal sent by the access network device and the first reference signal resource; or, the terminal device can measure the time-frequency offset for The time-frequency offset is obtained by synthesizing the N reference signal resources of the first transmit beam.
  • the terminal device performs path loss measurement on the first transmit beam.
  • the specific terminal device may measure the first reference signal resource to obtain the path loss; or, the terminal device may measure the path loss reference signal associated with the first reference signal resource sent by the access network device to obtain the path loss; or, the terminal device may measure the N
  • the reference signal corresponding to each reference signal resource obtains the path loss.
  • the terminal device measures the N reference signal resources, obtains the amplitude information and the first phase information of the N reference signal resources, and reports the amplitude information and the first phase information of the N reference signal resources to the access network device.
  • a phase information During the movement of the terminal equipment, the channel conditions between the access network equipment and the terminal equipment are constantly changing, and the N reference signal resources respectively correspond to the N transmission beams of the access network equipment. Therefore, the amplitude information and the first phase information of the N reference signal resources can indicate the channel variation between the access network device and the terminal device, so that the access network device can generate the amplitude information and the first phase information of the N reference signal resources.
  • the first transmit beam that matches the channel condition between the terminal device and the access network device or selects the first transmit beam that matches the channel condition between the terminal device and the access network device from N transmit beams of the access network device Send beams to improve communication performance between access network equipment and terminal equipment.
  • the above embodiment shown in FIG. 2A further includes step 206 and step 207 , and step 206 and step 207 are performed before step 201 .
  • the terminal device sends the first capability information of the terminal device to the access network device.
  • the first capability information carries second indication information, and the indication form of the second indication information includes any of the following:
  • the second indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal device supports the measurement and reporting required for dynamic beam transmission
  • the second indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal device has the measurement capability of measuring the first phase information
  • the second indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal device supports the measurement of the phase information corresponding to the reference signal resource used for beam management.
  • the terminal device may report the first capability information of the terminal device to the access network device.
  • the access network device can correctly configure the resource configuration and the reporting method for the terminal device, so as to avoid that the access network device cannot parse the correct reporting amount of the terminal device.
  • step 206 shows the manner in which the terminal device reports the second indication information through the first capability information.
  • the terminal device may also send the second indication information to the access network device independently, Alternatively, the terminal device may also carry the second indication information through other information or messages and report it to the access network device, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the terminal device performs the foregoing step 206 when the terminal device accesses the network or when the network requests.
  • the terminal device reports the first capability information to the access network device, and the first capability information is carried in the RRC message, then the terminal device adds a cell in the RRC message and passes the new
  • the augmentation element indicates the measurement capability of the terminal equipment for the phase information of the reference signal.
  • the specific form of the second indication information carried by the first capability information is shown below:
  • the second indication information includes a dynamic sending dynamic beam measurement capability field and a first value field.
  • the value of the first value field is used to indicate whether the terminal device supports the measurement and reporting required for dynamic beam transmission; or, it is used to indicate whether the terminal device has the measurement of the first phase information, or it is used to indicate Whether the terminal device supports the measurement of phase information corresponding to the reference signal resources used for beam management.
  • an example is given by taking the indication that the terminal device supports the measurement of the first phase information as an example.
  • Example 1 When the first value field is true, it indicates that the terminal device supports the measurement of the first phase information; when the first value field is false, it indicates that the terminal device does not support the measurement of the first phase information. Measurement. On the contrary, when the first value field is true, it indicates that the terminal device does not support the measurement of the first phase information; when the first value field is false, it indicates that the terminal device supports the measurement of the first phase information .
  • Example 1 Based on Example 1, the dynamic beam measurement capability field and the first value field are represented below in the form of ASN.1 pseudocodes in the standard.
  • Example 2 When the first value field is 0, it indicates that the terminal device supports the measurement of the first phase information; when the first value field is 1, it indicates that the terminal device does not support the measurement of the first phase information. Measurement. On the contrary, when the first value field is 0, it means that the terminal device does not support the measurement of the first phase information; when the first value field is 1, it means that the terminal device supports the measurement of the first phase information .
  • the dynamic beam measurement capability field and the first value field may also be represented in the following ACN.1 pseudocode form.
  • the dynamic beam measurement capability field and the first value field may also be represented in the following ACN.1 pseudocode form.
  • DynamicBeam is a dynamic beam measurement capability field
  • ENUMERATED ⁇ support ⁇ is a first value field
  • support indicates that the terminal device supports the dynamic beam measurement capability.
  • the second indication information includes a phase difference measurement capability field and a second value field.
  • the value of the second value field is used to indicate that the terminal device supports the measurement of the phase difference.
  • Example 1 When the second value field is true, it means that the terminal device supports the measurement of the phase difference; when the second value field is false, it means that the terminal device does not support the measurement of the phase difference. On the contrary, when the second value field is true, it indicates that the terminal device does not support the measurement of the phase difference; when the second value field is false, it indicates that the terminal device supports the measurement of the phase difference.
  • phase difference measurement capability field and the first value field are represented below in the form of ASN.1 pseudocodes in the standard.
  • Example 2 When the second value field is 0, it means that the terminal device supports the measurement of the phase difference; when the second value field is 1, it means that the terminal device does not support the measurement of the phase difference. On the contrary, when the second value field is 0, it means that the terminal device does not support the measurement of the phase difference; when the second value field is 1, it means that the terminal device supports the measurement of the phase difference.
  • phase difference measurement capability field and the first value field are represented below in the form of ACN.1 pseudocodes in the standard.
  • phase difference measurement capability field and the second value field may also be represented in the following ASN.1 pseudocode form.
  • DifferentialPhaseReport is a phase difference measurement capability field
  • ENUMERATED ⁇ support ⁇ is a second value field
  • support indicates that the terminal device supports phase difference measurement.
  • the first capability information further includes one or more of the following information:
  • the terminal device supports the maximum number of transmit beams corresponding to the combined reference signal resources used for beam management.
  • the terminal device uses the maximum number of combined transmit beams supported by the terminal device to represent that the terminal device supports measuring the phase of the reference signal corresponding to how many transmit beams the terminal device supports.
  • Quantization capability information for quantizing the first phase information by the terminal device.
  • the quantization capability information is used to indicate the capability of the terminal device to quantize the phase information of the reference signal.
  • the quantization capability information includes the quantization precision supported by the terminal device.
  • the access network device may configure a reporting manner of the first phase information by the terminal device according to the quantitative capability information of the terminal device.
  • the first phase information includes phase differences between N reference signals corresponding to the N reference signal resources and a first reference phase, where the first reference phase is the phase of the reference signal with the largest RSRP among the N reference signals.
  • the terminal equipment supports the quantization accuracy of pi/8. Since the maximum range of the phase is 2pi, the access network equipment can be configured to report the phase difference that can support 16 states (specifically, the 16 states shown in Table 3).
  • the access network equipment configures 4 bits for each phase difference report, as shown in Table 1, and Differential Phase occupies 4 bits.
  • the quantization capability information includes a phase difference step size reporting field and a supported quantization precision field.
  • the following uses the standard ASN.1 pseudocode form to represent the phase difference step size reporting field and the supported quantization precision field:
  • the access network device sends the first configuration information to the terminal device.
  • the first configuration information is used to configure the terminal device to report the first phase information corresponding to the N reference signal resources.
  • the first configuration information includes second configuration information of the first resource set, where the second configuration information is used to configure the terminal device not to expect the access network device to use the same transmission spatial filter (ie, transmission beam) to transmit the first resource All reference signal resources in the set.
  • the first resource set includes the M reference signal resources.
  • the second configuration information includes a repetition field.
  • the repetition field is OFF, indicating that the terminal device does not expect the access network device to use the same transmission spatial filter to transmit all the reference signal resources of the first resource set.
  • the repetition field is ON, it means that the terminal device expects the access network device to use the same transmission space filter to send all the reference signal resources of the first resource set. It is suitable for the scenario in which the access network device performs multi-transmission beam synthesis in this embodiment. In general, if the reported amount contains phase information, the repetition field in the associated channel measurement ResourceConfig#1 cannot be configured to be ON.
  • the specific form of the first configuration information is shown below with reference to FIG. 2E .
  • the first configuration information includes reporting amount cri-RSRP-Phase, reporting number nrofReportedRS and channel measurement ResourceConfig#1 (channel measurement ResourceConfig#1 can be understood as the above-mentioned second configuration information.
  • the reporting amount is configured as cri -RSRP-Phase
  • the repetition field in ResourceConfig#1 is OFF.
  • the reporting of the first phase information is decoupled from the CRS-RSRP. Therefore, the reporting amount configuration shown in FIG. 2E may also have other representation forms.
  • the reporting configuration of the first phase information is CRI-Phase or Phase.
  • the reporting of RSRP is completed in the beam management process, and the CRI-Phase or Phase is associated with the reporting amount CRS-RSRP.
  • the CRI-Phase or Phase may be associated and reported in the first configuration information through indication information. Quantitative CRS-RSRP.
  • the reporting granularity of the RSRP is the full-band reporting granularity, which means that the RSRP measured by the terminal device on different frequency resources is reported after performing a linear average.
  • the reporting manner of the RSRP and the first phase information may be a full-band reporting manner or a sub-band reporting manner, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the granularity of the subband may be configured by the access network device, or determined by the terminal device, or pre-configured by the communication protocol.
  • the granularity of the subband is related to factors such as the scheduling bandwidth of the access network device, the bandwidth of the CSI-RS resources, and the number of CSI-RS resources. For example, when the bandwidth of the CSI-RS resource is large, considering the frequency selectivity, the RSRP and phase information obtained by measuring the reference signal on different frequency resources are quite different, so the terminal equipment uses the subband reporting method to report the A phase information and RSRP of the N reference signals.
  • the reporting periods of the reported amounts CRI, RSRP, and Phase are the same or different. If CRI-RSRP is the reported amount, then each report includes CRI and RSRP. The following shows a possible reporting period of Phase:
  • T_Phase Number of receive beams*T_RSRP
  • the reporting period of Phase is T_Phase
  • the reporting period of CRI-RSRP is T_RSRP.
  • the T_Phase is proportional to T_RSRP.
  • the number of receive beams is the number of receive beams used by the terminal device to receive the reference signal corresponding to the reference signal resource, which is an inherent capability of the terminal device.
  • the number of receiving beams is pre-configured on the access network device, or reported by the terminal device to the access network device.
  • the terminal device may carry the maximum number of receive beams (maxNumberRxBeam) supported by the terminal device in the first capability information in step 206 .
  • the maximum number of receive beams is used to define whether the terminal device supports receiving beam switching using CSI-RS resources.
  • the terminal equipment should indicate a value for indicating the repetition times of CSI-RS resources in a CSI-RS resource set that it prefers.
  • the switching of the receiving beam must be supported.
  • the maximum number of receive beams please refer to the communication standard TS.38.306.
  • the first configuration information further includes at least one of the following information:
  • Third indication information where the third indication information is used to indicate that the first resource set is used for the access network device to generate a first transmission beam, and the first resource set includes M reference signal resources;
  • the reporting granularity information includes full-band reporting granularity or sub-band reporting granularity.
  • the size of each subband is 4RB, 8RB or 16RB.
  • other particle sizes are also possible, such as 10M (mega).
  • the terminal device determines to report the first phase information of the N reference signal resources according to the first configuration information.
  • the terminal device determines according to the first configuration information that the M reference signal resources are used to generate the first transmission beam, and determines the reporting granularity of the first phase information.
  • This embodiment of the present application further provides an embodiment, which is similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 2A , and the difference lies in steps 203 to 204 . Moreover, step 203a is newly added in this embodiment, and step 203a is executed before step 203 .
  • Step 203a The terminal device calculates the first synthesis weight ⁇ opt1 .
  • Step 203 is replaced with: the terminal device sends a first message to the access network device, where the first message carries the first composition weight ⁇ opt1 .
  • step 204 For the replaced step 204, please refer to the related introduction of the step 204b in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2A, which will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 3A is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of a communication processing method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication processing method includes:
  • the access network device sends the second reference signal resource to the terminal device on the R transmission beams through the R ports of the access network device.
  • the terminal device receives the second reference signal resource sent by the access network device.
  • the access network device transmits the reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource through the R transmission beams and R consecutive symbols in the time domain through the R ports of the access network device, and the terminal device transmits the reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource through the second reference signal resource.
  • a reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource is received.
  • the R ports are in one-to-one correspondence with the R symbols, and the R ports are in one-to-one correspondence with the R transmit beams.
  • the access network device sends the second reference signal resource to the terminal device on the R transmission beams through the R ports of the access network device, which is equivalent to the access network device using the R transmission beams and the access network through the R transmission beams.
  • the R ports of the device transmit the reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource in R consecutive symbols in the time domain.
  • Receiving the second reference signal resource sent by the access network device by the terminal device is equivalent to: the terminal device receiving the reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource through the second reference signal resource, or the terminal device according to the configuration of the second reference signal resource A reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource is received.
  • the R transmit beams are transmit beams corresponding to the R reference signal resources generated by the access network device, the R transmit beams are transmit beams with fixed weights respectively, and R is an integer greater than or equal to 2.
  • R is an integer greater than or equal to 2.
  • the R transmission beams are the R transmission beams corresponding to the R CRIs reported by the terminal device in the beam management process; or the R CRIs selected by the access network device from the CRIs reported by the terminal device in the beam management process
  • the corresponding R transmission beams; or, the access network equipment selects R transmission beams from the M transmission beams according to a preset rule, and the M transmission beams are transmission beams with fixed weights generated by the access network equipment , which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the R reference signal resources are used for beam management, and the second reference signal resources are used for beam synthesis.
  • the port numbers of the R ports of the access network device are in one-to-one correspondence with the R transmit beams corresponding to the R CRIs reported by the terminal device in the beam management process.
  • the second reference signal resource is used for beam synthesis, that is, for the access network device to generate a new transmit beam to match the channel conditions between the terminal device and the access network device.
  • the second reference signal resource is a CSI-RS resource with R symbols of R ports and a frequency domain density (density) of 1 or 3.
  • the second reference signal resource is a CSI-RS resource with four symbols of four ports and a frequency domain density of three.
  • port0 corresponds to transmit beam 1
  • port1 corresponds to transmit beam 2
  • port3 corresponds to transmit beam 3
  • port4 corresponds to transmit beam 4.
  • the access network device transmits the second reference signal resource through port0, port1, port2, and port3 of the access network device and in transmit beam 1, transmit beam 2, transmit beam 3, and transmit beam 4. That is, the port0 to port4 are all used to send the second reference signal resource, and the access network device sends the second reference signal resource across four consecutive OFDM symbols in the time domain (specifically, the time-frequency resources of the shaded part in FIG. 3B ) , each symbol corresponds to a port. That is, the access network device sends the same reference signal through the R ports.
  • Table 5 represents the position of the second reference signal resource in a slot, please refer to Table 5:
  • ( k 0 , l 0 ) is the 10th OFDM symbol of the slot and the k0th RE corresponding to the 10th OFDM symbol.
  • k 0 is 0
  • l 0 is 0.
  • Row X is a newly introduced column.
  • the terminal equipment When the terminal equipment subsequently reports the second capability information of the terminal equipment, it may indicate whether the terminal equipment supports the measurement of the CSI-RS resources shown by Row X through the second capability information.
  • the second reference signal resource is a CSI-RS resource with four symbols of four ports and a frequency domain density of 1.
  • the access network device transmits the second reference signal resource through port0, port1, port2, and port3 of the access network device and in transmit beam 1, transmit beam 2, transmit beam 3, and transmit beam 4. That is, the port0 to port4 are all used to send the second reference signal resource, and the access network device continuously sends the second reference signal resource across four OFDM symbols in the time domain (specifically, the time-frequency resource with the shaded part in FIG. 3C ) ), each symbol corresponds to a port. That is, the access network device sends the same reference signal through the R ports.
  • Table 6 represents the position of the second reference signal resource in a slot, please refer to Table 6:
  • ( k 0 , l 0 ) is the 10th OFDM symbol of the slot and the k0th RE corresponding to the 10th OFDM symbol.
  • k 0 is 0
  • l 0 is 0.
  • Table 6 above including k 0 , l 0 , etc.) are consistent with the notation in Section 7.4.1.5.3 of the communication standard TS 38.211 v16.2.0.
  • Section 7.4.1.5 of the communication standard TS 38.211 v16.2.0 The related introduction of notation in Section 3.
  • Row Y is a newly introduced column.
  • the second capability information may indicate whether the terminal device supports the measurement of the CSI-RS resources shown by Row Y.
  • Table 5 and Table 6 are only examples, and in this embodiment, there is no limitation on whether the access network device and the terminal device support code-division multiple access (code-division multiple, CDM). Also, when R is 2, the above-mentioned Table 5 and Table 6 need not be introduced.
  • port numbers of port0 to port3 shown in FIG. 3B and FIG. 3C above are relative port numbers.
  • the port numbers of port0 to port3 may be 3000, 3001, 3002, and 3003, etc., which are not specifically limited in this application. 3B and 3C described above are only for illustrating that the first access network device sends the second reference signal resource on different R ports.
  • the CSI-RS corresponding to the second reference signal resource has two possible forms, which are respectively introduced below:
  • the CSI-RS corresponding to the second reference signal resource in step 301 belongs to an existing CSI-RS type, and the CSI-RS belongs to the CSI-RS used for channel measurement, that is, (CSI-RS for channel acquisition).
  • the second reference signal resource can also be said to be used for channel measurement.
  • the CSI-RS belongs to a CSI-RS resource set, and there is no repetition field and no trs-info field in the CSI-RS resource set configuration.
  • the reported amount of the CSI-RS association includes a channel quality indicator (CQI), a precoding matrix indicator (PMI), a CRI, a layer indicator (layer indicator, LI), a rank indicator ( One or more of rank indicator, RI); in other words, the reported amount of the CSI-RS association does not include RSRP or SINR.
  • the RSRP of the reference signal corresponding to the R transmit beams should be obtained in combination with the beam management process. .
  • the CSI-RS corresponding to the second reference signal resource in step 301 is a new type of CSI-RS.
  • the CSI-RS is used for dynamic transmit beamforming, or, for transmit beamforming.
  • the second reference signal resource can also be said to be used for beamforming.
  • the CSI-RS type is usually marked by adding a field to the CSI-RS resource or the CSI-RS resource set to which the CSI-RS belongs to mark the CSI-RS for dynamic transmission beamforming.
  • the standard ACN.1 pseudocode form :
  • the access network device may acquire the RSRP of the reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource on the R transmission beams in the beam forming process, or may acquire the R transmission beams in combination with the beam management process
  • the RSRP of the corresponding R reference signals is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the R ports are virtual antenna ports or physical antenna ports of the access network device.
  • the terminal device receives the reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource sent by the access network device through the same receiving beam.
  • the access network device generates the second transmit beam based on the second phase information of the reference signals corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports measured by the terminal device using the same receive beam. Therefore, the receiving beam of the terminal device should be limited on the terminal device side, so that the access network device can generate a second transmit beam that matches the channel conditions between the terminal device and the access network device, thereby improving the connection between the terminal device and the access network device.
  • the communication performance of the communication between devices is not limited to the terminal device side, so that the access network device can generate a second transmit beam that matches the channel conditions between the terminal device and the access network device, thereby improving the connection between the terminal device and the access network device.
  • the terminal device measures the second reference signal resource to obtain second measurement information.
  • the second measurement information includes second phase information, and the second phase information is phase information obtained by the terminal device by measuring the second reference signal resources on the R ports respectively.
  • the terminal device measures the second phase information of the reference signals corresponding to the second reference signal resources on the R ports respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 3B , the terminal device measures the reference signals corresponding to the second reference signal resources on the time-frequency resources of the shaded parts of different types, so that the reference signals corresponding to the second reference signal resources corresponding to port0 to port3 can be obtained respectively. phase information.
  • the terminal device measuring the second reference signal resource to obtain the second measurement information is equivalent to the terminal device measuring the reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource to obtain the second measurement information.
  • the content included in the second phase information is the phase of the reference signal, or the phase difference of the reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource between different ports.
  • the second phase information includes the phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively.
  • the second phase information includes the respective phases of the reference signals corresponding to the second reference signal resources on the R ports.
  • the terminal device respectively measures the phases of the reference signals corresponding to the second reference signal resources on the R ports. Then, the terminal device may report the phase of the reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource on the R ports to the access network device through the indication information; or, the terminal device directly reports the phase of the reference signal on the R ports to the access network device The phase of the reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource.
  • the terminal device needs to consider the influence of the frequency on the phase of the reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource.
  • the terminal device For specific reporting requirements, please refer to step 202 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2A. The related introduction will not be repeated here.
  • the second phase information specifically includes any of the following:
  • the second phase information includes the phase difference between the phases corresponding to the reference signals corresponding to the second reference signal resources on the R ports respectively.
  • the terminal device respectively measures the phases of the reference signals corresponding to the second reference signal resources on the R ports; then, the terminal device calculates the phase between the phases of the reference signals corresponding to the second reference signal resources on the R ports Difference.
  • the second phase information specifically includes R*(R-1) phase differences.
  • the second phase information includes a phase difference between the phase corresponding to the reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource on the R ports and the second reference phase respectively.
  • the second phase information includes R-1 phase differences.
  • the second reference phase includes any of the following possible implementations:
  • the second reference phase is the phase corresponding to the second reference signal resource of the port with the smallest port number among the R ports.
  • the second reference phase is the phase of the reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource on the port with the smallest port number among the R ports.
  • the phase of the reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource on the port whose relative port number is 0 among the R ports is used as the second reference phase.
  • the second reference phase is the phase corresponding to the second reference signal resource of the port with the largest port number among the R ports.
  • the second reference phase is the phase of the reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource on the port with the largest port number among the R ports.
  • the second reference phase is the phase corresponding to the second reference signal resource of the port on which the access network device first transmits the second reference signal resource among the R ports.
  • the second reference phase is the phase of the reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource on the port on which the access network device first transmits the reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource among the R ports.
  • the second reference signal resource includes the time-frequency resources of the shaded part shown in FIG. 3B , and the second reference signal resource occupied by each port corresponds to the time of one type of shaded part shown in FIG. 3B . frequency resources.
  • the access network device will transmit the second reference signal resource in the shaded part in FIG. 3B .
  • the access network device first sends the reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource carried in the 11th OFDM symbol through port0, then the access network device sends the second reference signal on port0
  • the phase of the reference signal corresponding to the signal resource is used as the second reference phase.
  • the second reference phase is the phase corresponding to the second reference signal resource of the port on which the access network device lastly sent the second reference signal resource among the R ports.
  • the second reference phase is the phase of the reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource on the port on which the access network device finally sends the reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource among the R ports.
  • the second reference signal resource includes the time-frequency resources of the shaded part shown in FIG. 3B , and the second reference signal resource occupied by each port corresponds to the time of one type of shaded part shown in FIG. 3B . frequency resources.
  • the access network device will transmit the second reference signal resource in the shaded part in FIG. 3B .
  • the access network device finally sends the reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource carried in the 14th OFDM symbol through port3, then the access network device sends the second reference signal on port3
  • the phase of the reference signal corresponding to the resource is used as the second reference phase.
  • the second reference phase is the phase corresponding to the second reference signal resource of the port corresponding to any one of the R transmission beams.
  • the second reference phase is the phase of the reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource of the port corresponding to any one of the R transmission beams.
  • any one of the R transmission beams may be the transmission beam with the largest RSRP measured by the terminal device during the beam management process; or, in the process of step 302, the terminal device measures the second reference of the R ports The transmit beam corresponding to the port with the largest RSRP in the reference signal corresponding to the signal resource.
  • the second measurement information further includes the RSRP corresponding to the second reference signal resource of the R ports, that is, the corresponding RSRP of the R transmission beams.
  • the RSRP is measured by the terminal device according to the reference signals corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports.
  • the terminal device measures the reference signals corresponding to the second reference signal resources on the time-frequency resources of the shaded parts of different types, so that the reference signals corresponding to the second reference signal resources corresponding to port0 to port3 can be obtained respectively.
  • the second measurement information further includes the RSRP of the reference signals corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports.
  • the above step 302 shows the second phase information obtained by the terminal equipment by measuring the second reference signal resources on the R ports, and implementation mode 2 based on the CSI-RS corresponding to the second reference signal resources in the above step 301, the terminal equipment The technical solution of the RSRP corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports is also measured.
  • process 1 the terminal device measures the second phase information obtained by the second reference signal resources of the R ports.
  • Process 2 Based on implementation mode 2 of the CSI-RS corresponding to the second reference signal resource in the above step 301, the terminal device measures the RSRPs corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively.
  • Process 1 and Process 2 may be two independent measurement processes; and, the second phase information obtained by the terminal device measuring the second reference signal resources of the R ports and the second phase information obtained by the terminal device measuring the second reference signal resources of the R ports
  • the measurement sequence of the corresponding RSRPs is not limited.
  • the terminal device sends a second message to the access network device.
  • the second message carries fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the second phase information.
  • the terminal equipment uses a seven-bit absolute value quantization method to report the largest RSRP among the RSRPs corresponding to the N CRIs. Except for the largest RSRP among the RSRPs, the four-bit relative difference quantization method is used for reporting. Therefore, in order to match the way in which the terminal equipment reports RSRP in the existing beam management process, the second phase information includes the phase difference between the phase of the reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource of the R ports and the second reference phase. The content carried by the second message is described as an example.
  • the second reference phase difference is the phase corresponding to the second reference signal resource of the port corresponding to the transmit beam with the largest RSRP.
  • the largest transmission beam of the RSRP is the transmission beam corresponding to the largest RSRP among the R RSRPs measured and reported by the terminal device in the beam management process.
  • bit width used to indicate each phase difference in the second message is shown. Please refer to Table 7 for details:
  • the terminal device reports the phase difference Differential Phase to the access network device through four bits. That is, each phase difference occupies four bits in the second message.
  • Differential Phase #2-#1 represents the phase difference between the CRS-RS corresponding to CRI#1 and CRI#2 respectively
  • Differential Phase #3-#1 represents the CRS corresponding to CRI#3 and CRI#1 respectively -The phase difference between RSs
  • Differential Phase #4-#1 indicates the phase difference between the CRS-RSs corresponding to CRI#4 and CRI#1 respectively.
  • CRI#1, CRI#2, and CRI#3 are respectively the CRIs of the R reference signal resources corresponding to the R RSRPs reported by the terminal equipment in the beam management process.
  • Differential Phase #2-#1 Differential Phase #3-#1 and Differential Phase #4-#1 respectively occupy four bits.
  • quantization accuracy of the phase difference please refer to the relevant descriptions about Table 3 and Table 4 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2A, which will not be repeated here.
  • the above Tables 7 and 8 are only to introduce the specific form of the fourth indication information carried in the second message.
  • the terminal equipment can also report the fourth indication information in other forms, and does not depend on RSRP in the beam management process. As long as the access network device and the terminal device have agreed on the report mode in advance, the access network device can correctly parse the report information of the terminal device.
  • the second message further carries eleventh indication information, and the eleventh indication information is used to indicate the second reference of the R ports. RSRP of the reference signal corresponding to the signal resource.
  • the respective RSRPs corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports may be reported in descending order of port numbers, or reported in descending order of port numbers.
  • the second measurement information in the above step 302 further includes the port numbers corresponding to the RSRPs reported by the terminal equipment. That is, the second message also carries fourteenth indication information, where the fourteenth indication information is used to indicate the port numbers corresponding to the RSRPs reported by the terminal equipment respectively.
  • This embodiment shows a manner in which the terminal device reports the second phase information by means of indication information, thereby avoiding the problem of excessive signaling overhead and reducing resource overhead.
  • the terminal device may also directly report the second phase information to the access network device, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the foregoing step 303 shows the manner in which the terminal device sends the fourth indication information, the eleventh indication information and the fourteenth indication information to the access network device through the same message (the second message).
  • the fourth indication information, the eleventh indication information and the fourteenth indication information may be respectively sent to the access network device through different messages, or the fourth indication information may be sent to the access network device through one message.
  • network access equipment, and the eleventh indication information and the fourteenth indication information are sent to the access network equipment through another message, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application are introduced by taking the manner in which the terminal device sends the fourth indication information, the eleventh indication information and the fourteenth indication information to the access network device through the same message (the second message) as an example.
  • the access network device generates a second transmit beam according to the second phase information indicated by the fourth indication information.
  • the second transmission beam is used for communication between the access network device and the terminal device.
  • the manner in which the access network device obtains the RSRPs corresponding to the R transmit beams respectively includes the following two possible implementation manners.
  • the second message further carries eleventh indication information, where the eleventh indication information is used to indicate the RSRP of the reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource of the R ports.
  • the access network device determines the RSRPs of the reference signals corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports according to the eleventh indication information, and the access network device determines the second reference signals of the R ports according to the fourth indication information The second phase information of the reference signal corresponding to the signal. Then, the access network device generates a second transmit beam according to the RSRP and the second phase information of the reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports.
  • Implementation Mode 2 In the beam management process, the access network device receives the CRIs corresponding to the R reference signal resources and the RSRPs corresponding to the R reference signal resources reported by the terminal device respectively, and the R CRIs are respectively one with the R transmission beams. A correspondence. The access network device determines, according to the fourth indication information, second phase information of the reference signals corresponding to the second reference signals of the R ports. Then, the access network device generates a second transmission beam according to the RSRP and the second phase information corresponding to the R reference signal resources.
  • the specific process for the access network device to generate the second transmission beam in combination with the RSRP and the phase information is similar to the steps 204a to 204b in the embodiment shown in the foregoing FIG. 2A , please refer to the foregoing FIG. 2A for details. The related introduction of steps 204a to 204b in the embodiment shown in 2A will not be repeated here.
  • the main lobe direction of the second transmit beam is aimed at the terminal device, then the access network device and the access network device communicate and transmit through the second transmit beam, and the beam gain of the second transmit beam can be greatly improved, thereby Improve the communication performance between terminal equipment and access network equipment.
  • the channel capacity corresponding to the second transmission beam is maximized, and the channel corresponding to the second transmission beam is improved. capacity.
  • the M transmission beams are M transmission beams corresponding to the M reference signal resources generated by the access network device, and the M transmission beams are transmission beams with fixed weights.
  • the second transmit beam does not belong to the transmit beam set, and the transmit beam set includes the M transmit beams.
  • the access network device communicates with the terminal device through the second transmission beam.
  • Step 305 is similar to step 205 in the foregoing embodiment shown in FIG. 2A .
  • Step 305 please refer to the relevant introduction of step 205 in the foregoing embodiment shown in FIG. 2A , which will not be repeated here.
  • the reporting of the second phase information can be combined with other relevant channel information (specifically including CQI, PMI, CRI). , LI, and one or more of RI) are reported together.
  • the second phase information is measured according to each port, and other relevant channel information may be measured according to CSI-RS resources. That is to say, the measurement of the second phase information is used as a part of the channel measurement, so in step 305, there is no need to measure the channel corresponding to the second transmission beam.
  • the terminal device measures the second phase information of the second reference signal resources of the N ports, and sends fourth indication information to the access network device to indicate the second phase information.
  • the channel conditions between the access network device and the terminal device are constantly changing, and the R ports correspond to the R transmit beams of the access network device respectively. Therefore, the second phase information of the second reference signal resource can indicate the channel change between the access network device and the terminal device, so that the access network device can combine the second phase information to generate a matching channel between the terminal device and the access network device.
  • the R transmission beams may be R transmission beams corresponding to the R CRIs reported by the terminal device in the beam management process. Then, in this implementation manner, the implementation shown in FIG. 3A further includes steps 301 a to 301 c, and steps 301 a to 301 c are performed before step 301 .
  • the access network device sends M reference signal resources to the terminal device.
  • Step 301a is similar to step 201 in the foregoing embodiment shown in FIG. 2A .
  • Step 301a please refer to the relevant introduction of step 201 in the foregoing embodiment shown in FIG. 2A , which will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device measures M reference signal resources to obtain third measurement information.
  • the third measurement information includes the RSRPs corresponding to the R reference signal resources respectively and the R CRIs corresponding to the R reference signal resources, and the R CRIs respectively correspond to the R transmission beams in the foregoing step 301 .
  • the terminal device when the terminal device receives the R reference signals corresponding to the R reference signal resources sent by the access network device, the terminal device receives the R reference signals through the same receiving beam, and here the terminal device receives the R reference signals through the first receiving beam. The beams receive the R reference signals. Then it can be known that in the above step 301, the terminal device receives the reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource through the first receiving beam.
  • the terminal equipment measuring the M reference signal resources to obtain the third measurement information is equivalent to the terminal equipment measuring the reference signals corresponding to the M reference signal resources respectively to obtain the third measurement information.
  • each reference signal resource in the M reference signal resources corresponds to one transmission beam, and the transmission beams corresponding to different reference signal resources are the same or different. It should be noted that, the respective transmit beams corresponding to the M reference signal resources should include at least two different transmit beams.
  • the M reference signal resources are in one-to-one correspondence with the M transmission beams, that is, each reference signal resource has a corresponding transmission beam, and different reference signal resources correspond to different transmission beams.
  • the R transmission beams corresponding to the R reference signal resources are different.
  • the terminal device sends a third message to the access network device, where the third message carries fifth indication information and sixth indication information.
  • the fifth indication information is used to indicate the CRIs corresponding to the R reference signal resources respectively, and the sixth indication information is used to indicate the RSRPs corresponding to the R reference signal resources respectively.
  • the access network device determines the RSRPs corresponding to the R reference signal resources respectively according to the fifth indication information and the sixth indication information.
  • step 301c is described by taking the manner in which the terminal device reports the RSRPs corresponding to the R reference signal resources to the access network device through the indication information as an example.
  • the terminal device may directly report the RSRPs corresponding to the R reference signal resources to the access network device, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • Step 301c takes the manner in which the terminal device sends the fifth indication information and the sixth indication information to the access network device through the same message (third message) as an example to introduce the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the terminal device may also send the fifth indication information and the sixth indication information respectively through different messages, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • steps 301a to 301c may be performed periodically or aperiodically, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the terminal equipment uses the same receiving beam to receive the reference signals corresponding to the R CRIs respectively.
  • steps 301 to 303 are performed periodically, aperiodically, or semi-persistently. Therefore, when the access network device selects the R transmission beams, the access network device can first select the R transmission beams corresponding to the R CRIs reported by the terminal device most recently in the beam management process, and then the access network device performs the steps 301 to step 303.
  • the access network device configures the terminal device to receive the second reference signal resource at P ports of the access network device, but the access network device determines, through the beam management process, the P number of transmissions reported by the terminal device Only R transmit beams of the beams are suitable for the new transmit beam.
  • the embodiment shown in FIG. 3A further includes step 301 d and step 301 e, and step 301 d and step 301 e are executed before step 301 .
  • Step 301d The access network device sends seventh indication information to the terminal device.
  • the seventh indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to measure the second phase information of the second reference signal resources of the R ports of the access network device.
  • the R ports are the first R ports, or the last R ports, or any R ports among the P ports in the access network device, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the P ports are configured ports in the access network device for sending the second reference signal resource. P is an integer greater than 2, and P is greater than R. That is, the access network device indicates through the seventh indication information that the terminal device performs measurement of the second reference signal resource on the designated ports (the R ports). For example, as shown in FIG. 3B , the access network device instructs the terminal device to receive the second reference signal resource at port0 and port2.
  • the access network device may send the seventh indication information to the terminal device through media access control (media access control element, MAC CE) or downlink control information (downlink control information, DCI).
  • media access control media access control element, MAC CE
  • DCI downlink control information
  • Step 301e The terminal device determines, according to the seventh indication information, to measure the second reference signal resources of the R ports of the access network device.
  • the embodiment shown in FIG. 3A further includes step 306 and step 307 , and step 306 and step 307 are performed before step 301 .
  • the terminal device sends the second capability information of the terminal device to the access network device.
  • the second capability information carries eighth indication information, and the indication form of the eighth indication information includes any of the following:
  • the eighth indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal device supports the reference signal transmission mode
  • the reference signal transmission mode is: the access network device transmits the reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource through R transmission beams and R consecutive symbols in the time domain through the R ports of the access network device.
  • the R transmit beams are in one-to-one correspondence with the R ports, and the R ports are in one-to-one correspondence with the R symbols.
  • the access network equipment includes port0 to port3.
  • port0 corresponds to transmit beam 1
  • port1 corresponds to transmit beam 2
  • port3 corresponds to transmit beam 3
  • port4 corresponds to transmit beam 4.
  • the access network device transmits the second reference signal resource through port0, port1, port2, and port3 and through transmit beam 1, transmit beam 2, transmit beam 3, and transmit beam 4. That is, the port0 to port4 are all used to send the second reference signal resources, and the second reference signal resources (specifically, the shaded part of the time-frequency resources in FIG. 3A ) are continuously sent across four OFDM symbols in the time domain, and each symbol corresponds to a port. That is, the access network device sends the same reference signal through the R ports.
  • the eighth indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal device supports the measurement of the reference signal resources shown by Row X.
  • Row X For the related introduction of Row X, please refer to Table 4 or Table 5 in the aforementioned step 301.
  • the eighth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports the maximum number of symbols for continuous measurement of reference signals.
  • the second capability information also carries the maximum number of symbols that the terminal device supports for continuous measurement of the reference signal.
  • the terminal device may notify the access network device in the form of ACN.1 pseudocode in the following standard that the terminal device supports measuring CSI-RS spanning 3 consecutive symbols.
  • the above step 306 shows the manner in which the terminal device reports the eighth indication information through the second capability information.
  • the terminal device may also send the eighth indication information to the access network device alone, or the terminal device may send the eighth indication information to the access network device alone.
  • the eighth indication information may also be carried through other information or messages and reported to the access network device, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the access network device sends the second configuration information to the terminal device.
  • the second configuration information is used to configure the second reference signal resource for beamforming and to configure the terminal device to report the second phase information of the second reference signal resource of the R ports.
  • the access network device configures the user equipment for the terminal device.
  • configuration for beam management For example, the configuration for beam management is ResourceConfig#1.
  • the first resource set used for beam management includes 16 CSI-RSs, the amount of reporting required by the access network device to be reported by the terminal device is CRI-RSRP, and the number of reports (nrofReportedRs) is 4.
  • the second configuration information includes reporting amount Differential Phase and channel measurement ResourceConfig#2.
  • the resource#20 included in ResourceConfig#2 is configured with information such as the number of ports used for beamforming, the time-frequency resource location corresponding to each port, and the like.
  • the number of ports used for beamforming configured on the access network device is less than the number of transmit beams nrofReportedRs reported by the beam management.
  • the access network device can configure the resource#20 in combination with FIG. 3B and Table 4, or configure the resource#20 in combination with FIG. 3C and Table 5, mainly to configure the number of ports used for beamforming, and the time-frequency corresponding to each port. Location.
  • the second phase information is reported through the beamforming process, and the RSRPs of the R reference signals corresponding to the R transmission beams may be reported during the beam management process.
  • resource#20 in the second configuration information is associated with ResourceConfig#1. That is, in the above step 301, the terminal device should use the receive beams used for receiving the R reference signals corresponding to the R transmit beams in the beam management process to receive the second reference signal resource.
  • the second phase information may be reported together with the CRS-RSRP, that is, the second phase information and the CRI -RSRP is measured by port.
  • the second configuration information is similar to that in FIG. 3C , the difference is that, in this implementation manner, the reporting amounts included in the second configuration information are CRI-RSRP-DifferentialPhase and channel measurement ResourceConfig#2.
  • steps 301 to 304 may be performed periodically and repeatedly, or may be performed aperiodically, or may be performed semi-continuously, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the access network device configures steps 301 to 304 to be performed periodically and repeatedly through the second configuration information. If steps 301 to 304 are executed aperiodically, the access network device triggers the execution of steps 301 to 304 as required after the aforementioned step 301 c and before step 301 . If steps 301 to 304 are semi-persistently executed, the access network device first performs activation, deactivation, and triggering operations after step 301 c and before step 301 , and then executes steps 301 to 304 .
  • the access network equipment configures the resources used for the aperiodic execution of steps 301 to 304 or the resources used for the semi-persistent execution of steps 301 to 304, and the corresponding reporting methods can refer to the existing configuration methods, which are not specified in this application. limited.
  • the terminal device determines, according to the second configuration information, that the second reference signal resource is used for beamforming and reports the second phase information of the second reference signal resource of the R ports of the access network device.
  • the terminal device determines the resource#20 of the second configuration information and the configuration used for beam management according to the second configuration information ResourceConfig#1 association. Then, the terminal device determines a receive beam for receiving the R reference signals reported by the terminal device in the beam management process, and receives the second reference signal resource through the receive beam.
  • the terminal device measures the second phase information of the second reference signal resources of the N ports, and sends fourth indication information to the access network device to indicate the second phase information.
  • the channel conditions between the access network device and the terminal device are constantly changing, and the R ports correspond to the R transmit beams of the access network device respectively. Therefore, the second phase information of the second reference signal resource can indicate the channel change between the access network device and the terminal device, so that the access network device can combine the second phase information to generate a matching channel between the terminal device and the access network device.
  • a new transmit beam according to the channel condition, or, from the R transmit beams of the access network device select a transmit beam that matches the channel conditions between the terminal device and the access network device, so as to improve the access network device and the terminal device. communication performance between them.
  • the access network device obtains the phase information and amplitude information of the reference signal through downlink measurement between the terminal device and the access network device, Thereby, a transmit beam matching the channel conditions between the terminal equipment and the access network equipment is generated.
  • the access network device can also obtain the phase information and amplitude information of the reference signal through uplink measurement between the terminal device and the access network device, so as to generate a signal matching the channel conditions between the terminal device and the access network device.
  • transmit beam For example, the terminal device sends a sounding reference signal (sounding reference signal, SRS) to the access network device; then, the access network device measures the SRS to obtain phase information and amplitude information of the SRS.
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • the terminal device sends the SRS to the access network device, and the access network device measures the SRS, that is, uplink measurement.
  • the access network device then generates a transmit beam matching the channel conditions between the terminal device and the access network device according to the measurement result.
  • the specific generation method please refer to steps 204a to 204b in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2A.
  • the access network device configures appropriate resources for the SRS, and there is no need to add additional information exchange between the access network device and the terminal device.
  • the terminal device sends the SRS to the access network device, and the access network device measures the SRS, that is, uplink measurement.
  • the access network device sends the measurement result to the terminal device, and then the terminal device calculates the combined weight.
  • the terminal equipment feeds back the synthesis weight to the access network equipment, and then the access network equipment generates a transmission beam matching the channel conditions between the terminal equipment and the access network equipment according to the synthesis weight.
  • the specific generation method please refer to the aforementioned FIG. 2A . Steps 204a to 204b in the illustrated embodiment.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication apparatus in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication apparatus may be used to perform the steps performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2A , and reference may be made to the relevant descriptions in the above method embodiments.
  • the communication device includes a transceiver module 401 and a processing module 402 .
  • a transceiver module 401 configured to receive M reference signal resources sent by an access network device
  • the processing module 402 is configured to measure the M reference signal resources respectively, and obtain first measurement information, where the first measurement information includes first phase information, and the first phase information is the measurement of the M reference signal resources by the communication device respectively
  • the phase information obtained by the N reference signal resources, N and M are both integers greater than or equal to 1, and M is greater than or equal to N;
  • the transceiver module 401 is further configured to send first indication information to the access network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the first phase information.
  • the M reference signal resources are used for beam management, and the first phase information is used for the access network device to generate a first transmission beam, and the first transmission beam is used for the access network device to communicate with each other. communication between the communication devices.
  • the first transmit beam does not belong to a transmit beam set
  • the transmit beam set includes transmit beams generated by the access network device and corresponding to the M reference signal resources respectively.
  • the first phase information includes a phase difference between phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively; or,
  • the first phase information includes the phase difference between the phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively and the first reference phase, where the first reference phase is the phase corresponding to the first reference signal resource, and the first reference signal resource is the The reference signal resource with the largest RSRP or the largest RSRQ among the N reference signal resources.
  • the first measurement information includes N reference signal resource indications CRI, N RSRPs, and the first phase information, where the first phase information includes N*(N-1) phase differences, Or, N-1 phase differences; the N CRIs are the CRIs corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively, the N RSRPs are the RSRPs corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively; the N*(N-1)
  • the phase difference is the phase difference between the phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively, and the N ⁇ 1 phase differences are the phase difference between the phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively and the first reference phase.
  • the N reference signal resources among the M reference signal resources are received by the communication apparatus through the same receive beam.
  • the transceiver module 401 is further used for:
  • the first capability information carries second indication information
  • the second indication information is used to indicate whether the communication device has the capability to generate the communication device for the access network device.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate whether the communication apparatus supports measurement of phase information corresponding to the reference signal resource used for beam management.
  • the first capability information further carries one or more of the following information: the communication apparatus supports the maximum number of transmit beams corresponding to the reference signal resources used for beam management combined; the communication apparatus Quantization capability information for quantizing the first phase information.
  • the transceiver module 401 is further used for:
  • the processing module 402 is also used for:
  • the first configuration information includes second configuration information of the first resource set, the second configuration information includes a repetition field, the repetition field is OFF, and the first resource set includes the M references signal resource.
  • the first configuration information further includes one or more of the following information:
  • third indication information where the third indication information is used to indicate that the first resource set is used for the access network device to generate the first transmission beam
  • the reporting granularity of the first phase information is the subband reporting granularity, size information of each subband.
  • the transceiver module 401 is further used for:
  • Send twelfth indication information and thirteenth indication information to the access network device where the twelfth indication information is used to indicate the N CRIs corresponding to the N reference signal resources, and the thirteenth indication information is used to indicate the RSRPs corresponding to the N reference signal resources.
  • the transceiver module 401 is configured to receive M reference signal resources sent by the access network device; the processing module 402 is configured to measure the M reference signal resources respectively to obtain first measurement information, the first measurement The information includes first phase information, where the first phase information is phase information obtained by the communication device respectively measuring N reference signal resources in the M reference signal resources, N and M are both integers greater than or equal to 1, and M is greater than or equal to 1. or equal to N; the transceiver module 401 is further configured to send first indication information to the access network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the first phase information.
  • the channel conditions between the access network equipment and the communication device are constantly changing, and the N reference signal resources correspond to N transmission beams respectively.
  • the first phase information of the N reference signal resources can indicate the channel change of the access network device and the communication device, so that the access network device can combine the first phase information to generate a matching relationship between the communication device and the access network device. or select a transmission beam matching the channel conditions between the communication device and the access network equipment from among the N transmission beams of the access network equipment, so as to improve the access network equipment Communication performance with this communication device.
  • a transceiver module 401 configured to receive M reference signal resources sent by an access network device
  • a processing module 402 configured to measure N reference signal resources in the M reference signal resources to obtain first phase information, where N and M are both integers greater than or equal to 1, and M is greater than or equal to N;
  • the transceiver module 401 is further configured to send first indication information to the access network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the first phase information.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication apparatus in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication apparatus may be used to perform the steps performed by the access network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2A , and reference may be made to the relevant descriptions in the above method embodiments.
  • the communication device includes a transceiver module 501 and a processing module 502 .
  • Transceiver module 501 configured to send M reference signal resources to a terminal device; receive first indication information sent by the terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate first phase information, and the first phase information is measured by the terminal device Phase information obtained from N reference signal resources, the M reference signal resources include the N reference signal resources, N and M are both integers greater than or equal to 1, and M is greater than or equal to N;
  • the processing module 502 is configured to generate a first transmit beam according to the first phase information indicated by the first indication information, where the first transmit beam is used for communication between the communication apparatus and the terminal device.
  • the M reference signal resources are used for beam management.
  • the first transmit beam does not belong to a transmit beam set
  • the transmit beam set includes transmit beams generated by the communication apparatus and corresponding to the M reference signal resources respectively.
  • the first phase information includes a phase difference between the phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively; or, the first phase information includes the phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively and The phase difference between the first reference phases, where the first reference phase is the phase corresponding to the first reference signal resource, and the first reference signal resource is the reference signal resource with the highest RSRP or the highest RSRQ among the N reference signal resources.
  • the first phase information includes N*(N-1) phase differences, or N-1 phase differences; the N*(N-1) phase differences are the N phase differences The phase differences between the phases corresponding to the reference signal resources respectively, and the N-1 phase differences are the phase differences between the phases corresponding to the N reference signal resources respectively and the first reference phase.
  • the N reference signal resources in the M reference signal resources are received by the terminal device through the same receive beam.
  • the transceiver module 501 is further used for:
  • the first capability information carries second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal device is capable of generating a first transmit beam for the communication device
  • the processing module 502 is also used for:
  • the terminal device It is determined according to the first capability information that the terminal device has a measurement capability of measuring the first phase information.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal device supports measurement of phase information corresponding to the reference signal resource used for beam management.
  • the first capability information further carries one or more of the following information: the terminal device supports the maximum number of transmit beams corresponding to the reference signal resources combined for beam management; the terminal device supports Quantization capability information for quantizing the first phase information.
  • the transceiver module 501 is further used for:
  • the first configuration information includes second configuration information of the first resource set, the second configuration information includes a repetition field, the repetition field is OFF, and the first resource set includes the M references signal resource.
  • the first configuration information further includes one or more of the following information:
  • third indication information where the third indication information is used to indicate that the first resource set is used for the communication device to generate the first transmission beam
  • the reporting granularity of the first phase information is the subband reporting granularity, size information of each subband.
  • the transceiver module 501 is further used for:
  • the terminal device Receive the twelfth indication information and the thirteenth indication information sent by the terminal device, where the twelfth indication information is used to indicate the N CRIs corresponding to the N reference signal resources, and the thirteenth indication information is used to indicate the N RSRP corresponding to each reference signal resource;
  • the processing module 502 is also used for:
  • the processing module 502 is specifically used for:
  • a first transmit beam is generated according to the first phase information and the RSRP corresponding to the N reference signal resources.
  • processing module 502 is specifically used for:
  • the first transmission beam is generated according to the first synthesis weight and a second weight set, where the second weight set includes weights of the N transmission beams corresponding to the N reference signal resources.
  • the transceiver module 501 is configured to send M reference signal resources to a terminal device; and receive first indication information sent by the terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate first phase information, the first phase
  • the information is phase information obtained by the terminal device by measuring N reference signal resources, the M reference signal resources include the N reference signal resources, N and M are both integers greater than or equal to 1, and M is greater than or equal to N; processing module 502, for generating a first transmission beam according to the first phase information indicated by the first indication information, where the first transmission beam is used for communication between the communication apparatus and the terminal device.
  • the channel conditions between the communication apparatus and the terminal equipment are constantly changing, and the N reference signal resources correspond to N transmission beams respectively.
  • the first phase information of the N reference signal resources can indicate the channel variation between the communication device and the terminal device, so that the communication device can combine the first phase information to generate the first phase information matching the channel conditions between the terminal device and the communication device. a transmission beam to improve the communication performance between the communication device and the terminal equipment.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication apparatus in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication apparatus may be used to perform the steps performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3A , and reference may be made to the relevant descriptions in the above method embodiments.
  • the communication device includes a transceiver module 601 and a processing module 602 .
  • Transceiver module 601 configured to receive a second reference signal resource sent by an access network device, where the second reference signal resource is sent by the access network device through R ports of the access network device and on R transmit beams Reference signal resources, the R ports are in one-to-one correspondence with the R transmission beams, the R transmission beams are the transmission beams corresponding to the R reference signal resources generated by the access network device, and R is an integer greater than or equal to 2 ;
  • a processing module 602 configured to measure the second reference signal resource to obtain second measurement information, where the second measurement information includes second phase information, and the second phase information is the communication device that measures the first number of the R ports respectively. 2. The phase information obtained from the reference signal resource;
  • the transceiver module 601 is further configured to send fourth indication information to the access network device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the second phase information.
  • the second reference signal resource is used for beam synthesis
  • the second phase information is used for the access network device to generate a second transmission beam
  • the second transmission beam is used for the access network device communicate with the communication device.
  • the second transmit beam does not belong to a transmit beam set
  • the transmit beam set includes transmit beams corresponding to M reference signal resources generated by the access network device
  • the M reference signal resources are used for
  • the M reference signal resources include the R reference signal resources, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 2, and the M is greater than or equal to the R.
  • the second phase information includes a phase difference between phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively; or,
  • the phase difference between the respective phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources on the R ports and a second reference phase, where the second reference phase is the second reference signal of the port with the smallest port number among the R ports The phase corresponding to the resource.
  • the second measurement information includes RSRPs corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively;
  • the second phase information includes R*(R-1) phase differences, or, R-1 phase differences;
  • the R*(R-1) phase differences are the phase differences between the phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports;
  • the R-1 phase differences are the R The phase difference between the respective phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources on the respective ports and the second reference phase.
  • the transceiver module 601 is further used for:
  • Eleventh indication information is sent to the access network device, where the eleventh indication information is used to indicate the respective RSRPs corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports.
  • the transceiver module 601 is specifically used for:
  • the second reference signal resource sent by the access network device is received by using the same receive beam.
  • the transceiver module 601 is specifically used for:
  • the processing module 602 is also used for:
  • the transceiver module 601 is also used for:
  • the fifth indication information is used to indicate the reference signal resource indication CRI corresponding to the R reference signal resources respectively
  • the sixth indication information is used to indicate the R number of reference signal resources RSRPs corresponding to the reference signal resources respectively;
  • the transceiver module 601 is specifically used for:
  • the second reference signal resource sent by the access network device is received through the first receiving beam.
  • the transceiver module 601 is further used for:
  • the processing module 602 is also used for:
  • the seventh indication information it is determined to measure the phases of the second reference signal resources of the R ports of the access network device, where the R ports are configured in the access network device for sending second reference signals The first R ports among the P ports of the resource, where P is an integer greater than R.
  • the transceiver module 601 is further used for:
  • the second capability information carries eighth indication information, and the eighth indication information is used to indicate whether the communication device supports a reference signal sending mode;
  • the reference signal The transmission mode is: the access network device sends the second reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource through the R transmission beams and the R ports of the access network device in consecutive R symbols in the time domain; the The R transmit beams are in one-to-one correspondence with the R ports, and the R ports are in one-to-one correspondence with the R symbols.
  • the second capability information further carries the maximum number of symbols supported by the communication device, where the maximum number of symbols is the maximum number of symbols of the continuous measurement reference signal supported by the communication device.
  • the transceiver module 601 is further used for:
  • the processing module 602 is also used for:
  • the second reference signal resource is used for beamforming and reporting the second phase information of the second reference signal resource of the R ports.
  • the transceiver module 601 is configured to receive a second reference signal resource sent by an access network device, where the second reference signal resource is the access network device that passes through R ports of the access network device and is in R
  • the R ports are in one-to-one correspondence with the R transmission beams, and the R transmission beams are the transmission beams corresponding to the R reference signal resources generated by the access network device, and R is an integer greater than or equal to 2
  • the processing module 602 is configured to measure the second reference signal resource to obtain second measurement information, where the second measurement information includes second phase information, and the second phase information is measured by the communication device respectively.
  • the phase information obtained by the second reference signal resources of the R ports; the transceiver module 601 is further configured to send fourth indication information to the access network device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the second phase information.
  • the second phase information of the second reference signal resource can indicate the channel change of the access network device and the communication device, so that the access network device can combine the second phase information to generate a matching relationship between the communication device and the access network device. or select a transmission beam matching the channel conditions between the communication device and the access network equipment from the R transmission beams of the access network equipment, so as to improve the access network equipment Communication performance with this communication device.
  • FIG. 6 is also used to implement the following technical solutions:
  • Transceiver module 601 configured to receive a second reference signal resource sent by an access network device, where the second reference signal resource is sent by the access network device through R ports of the access network device and on R transmit beams Reference signal resources, the R ports are in one-to-one correspondence with the R transmission beams, the R transmission beams are the transmission beams corresponding to the R reference signal resources generated by the access network device, and R is an integer greater than or equal to 2 ;
  • a processing module 602 configured to measure the second reference signal resources of the R ports, respectively, to obtain second phase information
  • the transceiver module 601 is further configured to send a second message to the access network device, where the second message carries the fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate the second phase information.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication apparatus in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication apparatus may be used to perform the steps performed by the access network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3A , and reference may be made to the relevant descriptions in the above method embodiments.
  • the communication device includes a transceiver module 701 and a processing module 702 .
  • Transceiver module 701 configured to send second reference signal resources to terminal equipment through R ports of the communication device and on R transmit beams, the R ports are in one-to-one correspondence with the R transmit beams, and the R transmit beams Generate the transmit beams corresponding to the R reference signal resources for the communication device, where R is an integer greater than or equal to 2; receive the fourth indication information sent by the terminal device, the fourth indication information indicates the second phase information, the first The two-phase information is the phase information obtained by the terminal equipment by measuring the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively;
  • the processing module 702 is configured to generate a second transmission beam according to the second phase information indicated by the fourth indication information, where the second transmission beam is used for communication between the communication apparatus and the terminal device.
  • the second reference signal resource is used for beamforming.
  • the second transmit beam does not belong to a transmit beam set
  • the transmit beam set includes transmit beams corresponding to M reference signal resources generated by the communication device
  • the M reference signal resources are used for beams Management
  • the M reference signal resources include the R reference signal resources
  • M is an integer greater than or equal to 2
  • the M is greater than or equal to the R.
  • the second phase information includes a phase difference between phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively; or, the second reference signal resources on the R ports are respectively The corresponding phases are respectively the phase differences with the second reference phase, where the second reference phase is the phase corresponding to the second reference signal resource of the port with the smallest port number among the R ports.
  • the transceiver module 701 is also used for:
  • the eleventh indication information sent by the terminal device, where the eleventh indication information is used to indicate the RSRPs corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively;
  • the second phase information includes R*(R-1) Phase difference, or R-1 phase differences;
  • the R*(R-1) phase differences are the phase differences between the phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively;
  • the R-1 phase differences The phase difference is the phase difference between the respective phases corresponding to the second reference signal resources on the R ports and the second reference phase.
  • the transceiver module 701 is also used for:
  • the transceiver module 701 is also used for:
  • the processing module 702 is also used for:
  • the reference signal transmission mode is: the communication device transmits R consecutive beams in the time domain through the R transmission beams and the R ports of the communication device The symbol transmits the second reference signal corresponding to the second reference signal resource; the R transmit beams are in one-to-one correspondence with the R ports, and the R ports are in one-to-one correspondence with the R symbols.
  • the second capability information also carries the maximum number of symbols supported by the terminal device, where the maximum number of symbols is the maximum number of symbols of the continuous measurement reference signal supported by the terminal device.
  • the transceiver module 701 is also used for:
  • Second configuration information is used to configure the second reference signal resources for beamforming, and configure the terminal device to report second phase information of the second reference signal resources of the R ports .
  • the transceiver module 701 is also used for:
  • the third message carries fifth indication information and sixth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate the reference signal resource indication CRI corresponding to the R reference signal resources respectively, and the sixth indication information is used to indicate the CRI.
  • the indication information is used to indicate the RSRPs corresponding to the R reference signal resources respectively, and the R reference signal resources are in one-to-one correspondence with the R transmission beams;
  • the processing module 702 is also used for:
  • the processing module 702 is specifically used for:
  • the second transmission beam is generated according to the second phase information and the RSRPs corresponding to the R reference signal resources respectively.
  • processing module 702 is specifically used for:
  • the second transmission beam is generated according to the second synthesis weight and a third weight set, where the third weight set includes weights of the R transmission beams corresponding to the R reference signal resources.
  • the transceiver module 701 is configured to transmit the second reference signal resource to the terminal device through R ports of the communication device and on R transmit beams, and the R ports are in one-to-one correspondence with the R transmit beams , the R transmission beams are the transmission beams corresponding to the R reference signal resources generated by the communication device, and R is an integer greater than or equal to 2; receiving the fourth indication information sent by the terminal equipment, the fourth indication information indicates the first Two-phase information, where the second phase information is the phase information obtained by the terminal device by measuring the second reference signal resources of the R ports respectively; the processing module 702 is configured to use the second phase information indicated according to the fourth indication information A second transmission beam is generated, and the second transmission beam is used for communication between the communication apparatus and the terminal device.
  • the second phase information of the second reference signal resource can characterize the channel variation between the communication device and the terminal device, so that the communication device can generate a new channel condition matching the channel condition between the terminal device and the communication device in combination with the second phase information.
  • the transmission beam or, from the R transmission beams of the communication device, select the transmission beam that matches the channel conditions between the terminal device and the communication device, so as to improve the communication performance between the communication device and the terminal device.
  • FIG. 8 A possible schematic structural diagram of the terminal device is shown below through FIG. 8 .
  • FIG. 8 shows a schematic structural diagram of a simplified terminal device.
  • the terminal device takes a mobile phone as an example.
  • the terminal device includes a processor, a memory, a radio frequency circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device.
  • the processor is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data, control terminal equipment, execute software programs, and process data of software programs.
  • the memory is mainly used to store software programs and data.
  • the radio frequency circuit is mainly used for the conversion of the baseband signal and the radio frequency signal and the processing of the radio frequency signal.
  • Antennas are mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • Input and output devices such as touch screens, display screens, and keyboards, are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users. It should be noted that some types of terminal equipment may not have input and output devices.
  • the processor When data needs to be sent, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit.
  • the radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and sends the radio frequency signal through the antenna in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor, which converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
  • FIG. 8 only one memory and processor are shown in FIG. 8 . In an actual end device product, there may be one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device or the like.
  • the memory may be set independently of the processor, or may be integrated with the processor, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the antenna and the radio frequency circuit with a transceiver function may be regarded as a transceiver unit of the terminal device, and the processor with a processing function may be regarded as a processing unit of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device includes a transceiver unit 810 and a processing unit 820 .
  • the transceiving unit may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiving device, or the like.
  • the processing unit may also be referred to as a processor, a processing single board, a processing module, a processing device, and the like.
  • the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver unit 810 may be regarded as a receiving unit, and the device for implementing the transmitting function in the transceiver unit 810 may be regarded as a transmitting unit, that is, the transceiver unit 810 includes a receiving unit and a transmitting unit.
  • the transceiver unit may also sometimes be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, or a transceiver circuit.
  • the receiving unit may also sometimes be referred to as a receiver, receiver, or receiving circuit, or the like.
  • the transmitting unit may also sometimes be referred to as a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, or the like.
  • transceiving unit 810 is configured to perform the sending and receiving operations of the terminal device in the above method embodiments
  • processing unit 820 is configured to perform other operations on the terminal device in the above method embodiments except the transceiving operations.
  • the transceiving unit 810 is configured to perform the transceiving operations of the terminal device in steps 201, 203, 206 and 207 in the foregoing FIG. 2A, and/or the transceiving unit 810 is further configured to perform Other transceiving steps of the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the processing unit 820 is used for the above-mentioned steps 202 and 208 in FIG. 2A , and/or the processing unit 820 is also used for performing other processing steps of the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the transceiving unit 810 is configured to perform the transceiving operations of the terminal device in steps 301, 303, 306 and 307 in the above-mentioned FIG. 3A, and/or the transceiving unit 810 is further configured to execute the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application other sending and receiving steps.
  • the processing unit 820 is used for the above steps 302 and 308 in FIG. 3A , and/or the processing unit 820 is also used for executing other processing steps of the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the chip When the terminal device is a chip, the chip includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit.
  • the transceiver unit may be an input/output circuit or a communication interface;
  • the processing unit may be a processor or a microprocessor or an integrated circuit or a logic circuit integrated on the chip.
  • the sending operation corresponds to the output of the input-output circuit
  • the receiving operation corresponds to the input of the input-output circuit.
  • the present application further provides a communication apparatus.
  • FIG. 9 is another schematic structural diagram of the communication apparatus in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the message processing apparatus may be used to perform the steps performed by the access network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2A . , you may refer to the relevant descriptions in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the message processing apparatus includes: a processor 901 , a memory 902 and a transceiver 903 .
  • the processor 901, the memory 902 and the transceiver 903 are respectively connected through a bus, and the memory stores computer instructions.
  • the processing module 502 in the foregoing embodiment may specifically be the processor 901 in this embodiment, so the specific implementation of the processor 901 will not be described again.
  • the transceiver module 501 in the foregoing embodiment may specifically be the transceiver 903 in this embodiment, and thus the specific implementation of the transceiver 903 will not be described again.
  • the present application further provides a communication apparatus.
  • FIG. 10 is another schematic structural diagram of the communication apparatus in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the message processing apparatus may be used to perform the steps performed by the access network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3A . , you may refer to the relevant descriptions in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the message processing apparatus includes: a processor 1001 , a memory 1002 and a transceiver 1003 .
  • the processor 1001, the memory 1002 and the transceiver 1003 are respectively connected through a bus, and the memory stores computer instructions.
  • the processing module 702 in the foregoing embodiment may specifically be the processor 1001 in this embodiment, so the specific implementation of the processor 1001 will not be described again.
  • the transceiver module 701 in the foregoing embodiment may specifically be the transceiver 1003 in this embodiment, and thus the specific implementation of the transceiver 1003 will not be described again.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, where the communication system includes the communication device shown in FIG. 4 and the communication device shown in FIG. 5 ; or, the communication system includes the communication device shown in FIG. 6 .
  • the communication device and the communication device shown in FIG. 7 are examples of the communication system.
  • the communication apparatus shown in FIG. 4 is used to perform all or part of the steps performed by the terminal equipment shown in FIG. 2A
  • the communication apparatus shown in FIG. 5 is used to perform all the steps performed by the access network equipment shown in FIG. 2A . or part of the steps.
  • the communication apparatus shown in FIG. 6 is used to perform all or part of the steps performed by the terminal equipment shown in FIG. 3A
  • the communication apparatus shown in FIG. 7 is used to perform all the steps performed by the access network equipment shown in FIG. 3A . or part of the steps.
  • Embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product including instructions, which, when executed on a computer, cause the computer to execute the communication method of the embodiments shown in FIG. 2A and FIG. 3A above.
  • Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer-readable storage medium, including computer instructions, which, when the computer instructions are executed on a computer, cause the computer to execute the communication methods of the embodiments shown in FIG. 2A and FIG. 3A .
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a chip device, including a processor for invoking a computer level or computer instruction stored in the memory, so that the processor executes the communication method of the embodiments shown in FIG. 2A and FIG. 3A .
  • the processor is coupled to the memory through an interface.
  • the chip device further includes a memory, and the memory stores computer programs or computer instructions.
  • the processor mentioned in any one of the above may be a general-purpose central processing unit, a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more of the above-mentioned Figures 2A and 2A.
  • the memory mentioned in any one of the above can be read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (random access memory, RAM), and the like.
  • the disclosed system, apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners.
  • the apparatus embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above-mentioned integrated units may be implemented in the form of hardware, or may be implemented in the form of software functional units.
  • the integrated unit if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solutions of the present application can be embodied in the form of software products in essence, or the parts that contribute to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solutions, and the computer software products are stored in a storage medium , including several instructions for causing a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: a U disk, a removable hard disk, a read-only memory, a random access memory, a magnetic disk or an optical disk and other media that can store program codes.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请实施例提供了一种波束生成方法及其相关装置,用于提升接入网设备与终端设备之间的通信性能。本申请实施例的波束生成方法包括:终端设备接收接入网设备发送的M个参考信号资源;所述终端设备分别测量所述M个参考信号资源,得到第一测量信息,所述第一测量信息包括第一相位信息,所述第一相位信息为所述终端设备分别测量所述M个参考信号资源中的N个参考信号资源得到的相位信息,所述N和所述M均为大于或等于1的整数,所述M大于或等于所述N;所述终端设备向所述接入网设备发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一相位信息。

Description

波束生成方法以及相关装置 技术领域
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种波束生成方法以及相关装置。
背景技术
在高频通信系统中,为了克服路径损耗,基站和终端设备之间通常都会使用高增益的天线阵列形成具有方向的模拟波束进行通信。只有当基站的发送波束的方向与终端设备的接收波束的方向对齐时,基站与终端设备之间才能实现正常通信。
目前,基站选择发送波束的主要方式为:基站生成多个固定权值模拟发送波束,然后基站通过该多个固定权值模拟发送波束并在多个固定权值模拟发送波束对应的参考信号资源上向终端设备分别发送该参考信号资源对应的参考信号,并由该终端设备测量该参考信号。然后,终端设备向基站上报该参考信号的测量信息(包括该参考信号的参考信号接收功率(reference signal receiving power,RSRP)、参考信号接收质量(Reference signal receiving quality,RSRQ)等),再由基站根据该测量信息从该多个固定权值模拟发送波束选择一个固定权值模拟发送波束作为该基站的发送波束。
但是,该多个固定权值模拟发送波束的主瓣方向是不连续的,因此两个固定权值模拟发送波束之间会出现凹坑。凹坑的深度与该固定权值模拟发送波束生成参数相关。例如,该固定权值模拟发送波束的总数、波束宽度、波束增益等。由于终端设备的移动性,所以基站与终端设备之间的相位位置是变化的。若终端设备处于该两个固定权值模拟发送波束之间的凹坑处,基站从该两个固定权值模拟发送波束选择任意一个固定权值模拟发送波束作为基站的发送波束都会损失基站的波束增益,导致基站与终端设备之间的通信性能降低。
发明内容
本申请提供了一种波束生成方法及其相关装置,用于提升接入网设备与终端设备之间的通信性能。
本申请第一方面提供一种通信方法,该通信方法包括:
终端设备接收接入网设备发送的M个参考信号资源;然后,该终端设备分别测量该M个参考信号资源,得到第一测量信息,该第一测量信息包括第一相位信息,该第一相位信息为该终端设备分别测量该M个参考信号资源中的N个参考信号资源得到的相位信息,N和M均为大于或等于1的整数,M大于或等于N;该终端设备向该接入网设备发送第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示该第一相位信息。
上述方案中,终端设备测量该N个参考信号资源的第一相位信息,并向接入网设备发送第一指示信息,以指示该第一相位信息。在终端设备的移动过程中,接入网设备与终端设备之间的信道条件是不停变化的,而N个参考信号资源分别对应的N个发送波束。因此,N个参考信号资源的第一相位信息可以体征该接入网设备与终端设备的信道变化情况,这样接入网设备可以结合第一相位信息生成匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的新的 发送波束,或者,从该接入网设备的N个发送波束中选择匹配匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的发送波束,以提升接入网设备与终端设备之间的通信性能。
一种可能的实现方式中,该M个参考信号资源用于波束管理,该第一相位信息用于该接入网设备生成第一发送波束,该第一发送波束用于该接入网设备与该终端设备之间进行通信。
在该可能的实现方式中,在波束管理过程中,终端设备新增上报第一相位信息,这样接入网设备可以结合该第一相位信息生成符合终端设备与接入网设备的信道条件的第一发送波束;然后,该接入网设备通过该第一发送波束与该终端设备进行通信,从而提高终端设备与接入网设备之间的传输性能。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一发送波束不属于发送波束集合,该发送波束集合包括该接入网设备生成的与该M个参考信号资源分别对应的发送波束。
在该可能的实现方式中,该第一发送波束不属于该接入网设备生成的M个发送波束中的发送波束,该M个发送波束为该接入网设备生成的固定权值的发送波束。第一发送波束的主瓣方向对准该终端设备,那么接入网设备与该终端设备通过第一发送波束进行通信传输,第一发送波束的波束增益能够大大得到提升,从而提高终端设备与接入网设备之间的通信性能。其次,相比于接入网设备从M个发送波束中选择一个发送波束与终端设备进行通信传输的方式来说,第一发送波束对应的信道容量最大化,提升了第一发送波束对应的信道的容量。该M个发送波束为该接入网设备生成的与M个参考信号资源对应的M个发送波束,该M个发送波束为固定权值的发送波束。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一相位信息包括该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;或者,
该第一相位信息包括该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位与第一基准相位之间的相位差,该第一基准相位为第一参考信号资源对应的相位,该第一参考信号资源为该N个参考信号资源中RSRP最大或RSRQ最大的参考信号资源。
在该可能的实现方式中,示出了第一相位信息的两种可能的携带内容的形式,即第一相位信息包括该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位两两之间的相位差;或者,该第一相位信息包括该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位与第一基准相位之间的相位差,而该方式能够与已有波束管理过程中RSRP的上报方式适配,对终端设备和接入网设备两侧改动较小,实用性较强。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一测量信息包括N个信道状态信息参考信号资源指示(channel status information reference signal resource indicator,CRI)、N个RSRP和该第一相位信息,该第一相位信息包括N*(N-1)个相位差,或者,N-1个相位差;该N个CRI为该N个参考信号资源分别对应的CRI,该N个RSRP为该N个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP;该N*(N-1)个相位差为该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差,该N-1个相位差为该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位与该第一基准相位之间的相位差。
在该可能的实现方式中,示出了在波束管理过程中,终端设备测量得到的第一测量信息具体包括的内容。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该M个参考信号资源中的该N个参考信号资源是由该终端设备通过同一接收波束接收的。
在该可能的实现方式中,由于接入网设备基于终端设备使用同一接收波束测量得到该N个参考信号资源对应的N个参考信号的幅度信息(即该N个参考信号的RSRP)和该N个参考信号的第一相位信息计算生成的第一发送波束。因此,在终端设备侧应当对终端设备的接收波束进行限定,以便于接入网设备生成匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的第一发送波束,从而提高终端设备与接入网设备之间进行通信的通信性能。
另一种可能的实现方式中,在该终端设备接收接入网设备发送的M个参考信号资源之前,该方法还包括:
该终端设备向该接入网设备发送该终端设备的第一能力信息,该第一能力信息携带第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示该终端设备是否具备对用于该接入网设备生成该第一发送波束所需的第一相位信息进行测量的测量能力。
在该可能的实现方式中,该终端设备向该接入网设备发送该终端设备的第一能力信息,这样接入网设备能够根据第一能力信息为终端设备配置合适的资源配置和上报方式,以便于正确解析终端设备的上报量。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二指示信息为用于指示该终端设备是否支持对用于波束管理的参考信号资源对应的相位信息的测量。
在该可能的实现方式中,该终端设备通过第二指示信息指示该终端设备是否支持对用于波束管理的参考信号资源对应的相位信息的测量,这样接入网设备能够为该终端设备配置合适的资源配置和上报方式,以便于接入网设备正确解析终端设备的上报量,提高解析效率。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一能力信息还携带以下信息中的一个或多个:该终端设备支持合并用于波束管理的参考信号资源对应的发送波束的最大个数;该终端设备对该第一相位信息进行量化的量化能力信息。
在该可能的实现方式中,该终端设备还可以在第一能力信息携带该终端设备支持合并的发送波束的最大个数和量化能力信息,以便于接入网设备为终端设备配置合适的资源配置和上报方式。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该终端设备接收接入网设备发送的M个参考信号资源之前,该方法还包括:该终端设备接收该接入网设备发送的第一配置信息;然后,该终端设备根据该第一配置信息确定上报该N个参考信号资源的第一相位信息。
在该可能的实现方式中,该接入网设备向终端设备发送该第一配置信息,以便于通知终端设备测量该N个参考信号资源的第一相位信息,并按照该第一配置信息指示的配置方式上报该第一相位信息。这样,接入网设备能够正确解析该终端设备上报的第一相位信息。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一配置信息包括第一资源集合的第二配置信息,该第二配置信息包括重复(repetition)字段,该repetition字段为OFF,该第一资源集合包括该M个参考信号资源。
在该可能的实现方式中,示出了该第二配置信息用于配置该终端设备不期待接入网设 备使用相同的发送空域滤波器(即发送波束)发送该M个参考信号资源的一种可能的实现方式,提升了方案的可实现性。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一配置信息还包括以下信息中的一个或多个:
第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于指示该第一资源集合用于该接入网设备生成该第一发送波束;
该第一相位信息的上报粒度信息;
当该第一相位信息的上报粒度为子带上报粒度时,每个子带的大小信息。
在该可能的实现方式中,提供了该第一配置信息中携带的一些其他内容。需要说明的是,上述第三指示信息、该第一相位信息的上报粒度信息和该每个子带的大小信息也可以通过其他消息或信息上报,具体本申请不做限定。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:
该终端设备向该接入网设备发送第十二指示信息和第十三指示信息,该第十二指示信息用于指示该N个参考信号资源对应的N个CRI,该第十三指示信息用于指示该N个参考信号资源对应的RSRP。
本申请第二方面提供一种通信方法,该通信方法包括:
接入网设备向终端设备发送M个参考信号资源;然后,该接入网设备接收该终端设备发送的第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示第一相位信息,该第一相位信息为该终端设备测量N个参考信号资源得到的相位信息,该M个参考信号资源包括该N个参考信号资源,N和M均为大于或等于1的整数,M大于或等于N;该接入网设备根据该第一指示信息指示的第一相位信息生成第一发送波束,该第一发送波束用于该接入网设备与该终端设备之间进行通信。
上述方案中,该终端设备向接入网设备发送第一指示信息,以指示该第一相位信息。在终端设备的移动过程中,接入网设备与终端设备之间的信道条件是不停变化的,而N个参考信号资源分别对应的N个发送波束。因此,N个参考信号资源的第一相位信息可以体征该接入网设备与终端设备的信道变化情况,这样接入网设备可以结合第一相位信息生成匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的第一发送波束,以提升接入网设备与终端设备之间的通信性能。
一种可能的实现方式中,该M个参考信号资源用于波束管理。
在该可能的实现方式中,在波束管理过程中,终端设备新增上报第一相位信息,这样接入网设备可以结合该第一相位信息生成符合终端设备与接入网设备的信道条件的第一发送波束;然后,该接入网设备通过该第一发送波束与该终端设备进行通信,从而提高终端设备与接入网设备之间的传输性能。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一发送波束不属于发送波束集合,该发送波束集合包括该接入网设备生成的与该M个参考信号资源分别对应的发送波束。
在该可能的实现方式中,该第一发送波束不属于该接入网设备生成的M个发送波束中的发送波束,该M个发送波束为该接入网设备生成的固定权值的发送波束。第一发送波束的主瓣方向对准该终端设备,那么接入网设备与该终端设备通过第一发送波束进行通信传输, 第一发送波束的波束增益能够大大得到提升,从而提高终端设备与接入网设备之间的通信性能。其次,相比于接入网设备从M个发送波束中选择一个发送波束与终端设备进行通信传输的方式来说,第一发送波束对应的信道容量最大化,提升了第一发送波束对应的信道的容量。该M个发送波束为该接入网设备生成的与M个参考信号资源对应的M个发送波束,该M个发送波束为固定权值的发送波束。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一相位信息包括该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;或者,该第一相位信息包括该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位与第一基准相位之间的相位差,该第一基准相位为第一参考信号资源对应的相位,该第一参考信号资源为该N个参考信号资源中RSRP最大或RSRQ最大的参考信号资源。
在该可能的实现方式中,示出了第一相位信息的两种可能的携带内容的形式,即第一相位信息包括该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位两两之间的相位差;或者,该第一相位信息包括该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位与第一基准相位之间的相位差,而该方式能够与已有波束管理过程中RSRP的上报方式适配,对终端设备和接入网设备两侧改动较小,实用性较强。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一相位信息包括N*(N-1)个相位差,或者,N-1个相位差;该N*(N-1)个相位差为该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差,该N-1个相位差为该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位与该第一基准相位之间的相位差。
在该可能的实现方式中,示出了在波束管理过程中,终端设备测量得到的第一测量信息具体包括的内容。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该M个参考信号资源中的该N个参考信号资源是由该终端设备通过同一接收波束接收的。
在该可能的实现方式中,由于接入网设备基于终端设备使用同一接收波束测量得到该N个参考信号资源对应的N个参考信号的幅度信息(即该N个参考信号的RSRP)和该N个参考信号的第一相位信息计算生成的第一发送波束。因此,在终端设备侧应当对终端设备的接收波束进行限定,以便于接入网设备生成匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的第一发送波束,从而提高终端设备与接入网设备之间进行通信的通信性能。
另一种可能的实现方式中,在该接入网设备向终端设备发送M个参考信号资源之前,该方法还包括:该接入网设备接收该终端设备发送的该终端设备的第一能力信息,该第一能力信息携带第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示该终端设备是否具备对用于接入网设备生成第一发送波束所需的第一相位信息进行测量的测量能力;然后,该接入网设备根据该第一能力信息确定该终端设备具备对第一相位信息进行测量的测量能力。
在该可能的实现方式中,该终端设备向该接入网设备发送该终端设备的第一能力信息,这样接入网设备能够根据第一能力信息为终端设备配置合适的资源配置和上报方式,以便于正确解析终端设备的上报量。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二指示信息为用于指示该终端设备是否支持对用于波束管理的参考信号资源对应的相位信息的测量。
在该可能的实现方式中,该终端设备通过第二指示信息指示该终端设备是否支持对用 于波束管理的参考信号资源对应的相位信息的测量,这样接入网设备能够为该终端设备配置合适的资源配置和上报方式,以便于接入网设备正确解析终端设备的上报量,提高解析效率。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一能力信息还携带以下信息中的一个或多个:该终端设备支持合并用于波束管理的参考信号资源对应的发送波束的最大个数;该终端设备对该第一相位信息进行量化的量化能力信息。
在该可能的实现方式中,该终端设备还可以在第一能力信息携带该终端设备支持合并的发送波束的最大个数和量化能力信息,以便于接入网设备为终端设备配置合适的资源配置和上报方式。
另一种可能的实现方式中,在该接入网设备向终端设备发送M个参考信号资源之前,该方法还包括:该接入网设备向该终端设备发送第一配置信息,该第一配置信息用于配置该终端设备上报该N个参考信号资源的第一相位信息。
在该可能的实现方式中,该接入网设备向终端设备发送该第一配置信息,以便于通知终端设备测量该N个参考信号资源的第一相位信息,并按照该第一配置信息指示的配置方式上报该第一相位信息。这样,接入网设备能够正确解析该终端设备上报的第一相位信息。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一配置信息包括第一资源集合的第二配置信息,该第二配置信息包括repetition字段,该repetition字段为OFF,该第一资源集合包括该M个参考信号资源。
在该可能的实现方式中,示出了该第二配置信息用于配置该终端设备不期待接入网设备使用相同的发送空域滤波器(即发送波束)发送该M个参考信号资源的一种可能的实现方式,提升了方案的可实现性。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一配置信息还包括以下信息中的一个或多个:
第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于指示该第一资源集合用于该接入网设备生成该第一发送波束;
该第一相位信息的上报粒度信息;
当该第一相位信息的上报粒度为子带上报粒度时,每个子带的大小信息。
在该可能的实现方式中,提供了该第一配置信息中携带的一些其他内容。需要说明的是,上述第三指示信息、该第一相位信息的上报粒度信息和该每个子带的大小信息也可以通过其他消息或信息上报,具体本申请不做限定。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:
该接入网设备接收该终端设备发送的第十二指示信息和第十三指示信息,该第十二指示信息用于指示该N个参考信号资源对应的N个CRI,该第十三指示信息用于指示该N个参考信号资源对应的RSRP;该接入网设备根据该第十二指示信息和该第十三指示信息确定该N个参考信号资源对应的RSRP;该接入网设备根据该第一指示信息指示的第一相位信息生成第一发送波束,包括:该接入网设备根据该第一相位信息和该N个参考信号资源对应的RSRP生成第一发送波束。
在该可能的实现方式中,提供接入网设备生成第一发送波束的具体方式,即接入网设 备根据该第一相位信息和该N个参考信号资源对应的RSRP生成第一发送波束。由于该第一相位信息和该N个参考信号资源对应的RSRP能够表征该终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件,因此,接入网设备能够通过该第一相位信息和该N个参考信号资源对应的RSRP生成匹配该终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的第一发送波束。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该接入网设备根据该第一相位信息和该N个参考信号资源对应的RSRP生成第一发送波束,包括:该接入网设备根据该第一相位信息和该N个参考信号资源的RSRP确定第一合成权;该接入网设备根据该第一合成权和第二权值集合生成该第一发送波束,该第二权值集合包括该N个参考信号资源对应的N个发送波束的权值。
在该可能的实现方式中,提供了接入网设备根据该第一相位信息和该N个参考信号资源对应的RSRP生成第一发送波束的具体过程,提升了方案的可实现性。
本申请第三方面提供一种通信方法,该通信方法包括:
终端设备接收接入网设备发送的第二参考信号资源,该第二参考信号资源是该接入网设备通过该接入网设备的R个端口并在R个发送波束上发送的参考信号资源,该R个端口与该R个发送波束一一对应,该R个发送波束为该接入网设备生成的与R个参考信号资源对应的发送波束,R为大于或等于2的整数;然后,该终端设备测量该第二参考信号资源,得到第二测量信息,该第二测量信息包括第二相位信息,该第二相位信息为该终端设备分别测量所述R个端口的该第二参考信号资源得到的相位信息;该终端设备向该接入网设备发送第四指示信息,该第四指示信息用于指示该第二相位信息。
上述方案中,终端设备测量该N个端口的第二参考信号资源的第二相位信息,并向接入网设备发送第四指示信息,以指示该第二相位信息。在终端设备的移动过程中,接入网设备与终端设备之间的信道条件是不停变化的,而R个端口分别对应接入网设备的R个发送波束。因此,第二参考信号资源的第二相位信息可以体征该接入网设备与终端设备的信道变化情况,这样接入网设备可以结合第二相位信息生成匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的新的发送波束,或者,从该接入网设备的R个发送波束中选择匹配匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的发送波束,以提升接入网设备与终端设备之间的通信性能。
一种可能的实现方式中,该第二参考信号资源用于波束合成,该第二相位信息用于所述接入网设备生成第二发送波束,该第二发送波束用于该接入网设备与该终端设备之间进行通信。
在该可能的实现方式中,在已有的波束管理过程的基础上新增波束合成的过程,终端设备测量得到第二相位信息,这样接入网设备可以结合第二相位信息生成匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的第二发送波束,以提升接入网设备与终端设备之间的通信性能。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二发送波束不属于发送波束集合,该发送波束集合包括该接入网设备生成的与M个参考信号资源对应的发送波束,该M个参考信号资源用于波束管理,该M个参考信号资源包括该R个参考信号资源,M为大于或等于2的整数,该M大于或等于该R。
在该可能的实现方式中,该第二发送波束不属于该接入网设备生成的M个发送波束中的 发送波束,该M个发送波束为该接入网设备生成的固定权值的发送波束。第二发送波束的主瓣方向对准该终端设备,那么接入网设备与该终端设备通过第一发送波束进行通信传输,第二发送波束的波束增益能够大大得到提升,从而提高终端设备与接入网设备之间的通信性能。其次,相比于接入网设备从M个发送波束中选择一个发送波束与终端设备进行通信传输的方式来说,第二发送波束对应的信道容量最大化,提升了第二发送波束对应的信道的容量。该M个发送波束为该接入网设备生成的与M个参考信号资源对应的M个发送波束,该M个发送波束为固定权值的发送波束。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二相位信息包括该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;或者,
该R个端口上该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位分别与第二基准相位之间的相位差,该第二基准相位为所述R个端口中端口号最小的端口的该第二参考信号资源对应的相位。
在该可能的实现方式中,提供了第二相位信息携带的内容的两种形式,即第二相位信息包括该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差,或者,该R个端口上该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位分别与第二基准相位之间的相位差,而该方式能够与已有波束管理过程中RSRP的上报方式适配,对终端设备和接入网设备两侧改动较小,实用性较强。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二测量信息包括该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP;该第二相位信息包括R*(R-1)个相位差,或者,R-1个相位差;该R*(R-1)个相位差为该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;该R-1个相位差为该R个端口上该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位分别与第二基准相位之间的相位差。
在该可能的实现方式中,提供了该第二测量信息的具体内容。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该终端设备向该接入网设备发送第十一指示信息,该第十一指示信息用于指示该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP。
在该可能的实现方式中,该终端设备进一步发送给接入网设备的该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP。这样接入网设备可以根据该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP和该第二相位信息生成第二发送波束。也就是该波束合成过程也用于获取该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP,可以不需要通过波束管理过程来获取R个发送波束对应的RSRP。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该终端设备接收接入网设备发送的第二参考信号资源,包括:该终端设备使用同一接收波束接收该接入网设备发送的该第二参考信号资源。
在该可能的实现方式中,由于接入网设备基于终端设备使用同一接收波束测量得到第二相位信息计算生成的第二发送波束,因此,在终端设备侧应当对终端设备的接收波束进行限定,以便于接入网设备生成匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的第二发送波束,从而提高终端设备与接入网设备之间进行通信的通信性能。
另一种可能的实现方式中,在该终端设备接收接入网设备发送的第二参考信号资源之前,该方法还包括:该终端设备接收该接入网设备发送的M个参考信号资源,该M个参考 信号资源用于波束管理;该终端设备分别测量该M个参考信号资源,得到该M个参考信号资源中的R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP,且该终端设备通过第一接收波束接收该R个参考信号资,R和M均为大于或等于2的整数,M大于或等于R;该终端设备向该接入网设备发送第五指示信息和第六指示信息,该第五指示信息用于指示该R个参考信号资源分别对应的CRI,该第六指示信息用于指示R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP;该终端设备接收接入网设备发送的第二参考信号资源,包括:该终端设备通过该第一接收波束接收该接入网设备发送的该第二参考信号资源。
在该可能的实现方式中,该终端设备可以在波束管理过程上报该R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP;而在波束合成过程中,终端设备上报第二相位信息。这样接入网设备可以根据该R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP和第二相位信息生成第二发送波束,并通过该第二发送波束与终端设备进行通信,从而提高终端设备与接入网设备之间进行通信的通信性能。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该终端设备测量该第二参考信号资源,得到第二测量信息之前,该方法还包括:该终端设备接收该接入网设备发送的第七指示信息;该终端设备根据该第七指示信息确定对该接入网设备的R个端口的第二参考信号资源的相位进行测量,该R个端口为该接入网设备中已被配置的用于发送第二参考信号资源的P个端口中的前R个端口,P为大于R的整数。
在该可能的实现方式中,若接入网设备配置该终端设备在该接入网设备的P个端口接收该第二参考信号资源,但是接入网设备通过波束管理流程确定终端设备上报的P个发送波束中的R个发送波束适合新的发送波束。那么接入网设备可以通过第七指示信息指示终端设备该接入网设备的R个端口的第二参考信号资源的相位进行测量并上报,从而便于接入网设备生成第二发送波束,提高方案的可行性和实用性。
另一种可能的实现方式中,在该终端设备接收接入网设备发送的第二参考信号资源之前,该方法还包括:该终端设备向该接入网设备发送该终端设备的第二能力信息;其中,该第二能力信息携带第八指示信息,该第八指示信息用于指示该终端设备是否支持参考信号发送模式;该参考信号发送模式为:该接入网设备通过该R个发送波束并通过该接入网设备的R个端口在时域上连续的R个符号发送该第二参考信号资源对应的第二参考信号;该R个发送波束与该R个端口一一对应,该R个端口与该R个符号一一对应。
在该可能的实现方式中,终端设备先向该接入网设备上报该终端设备的第二能力信息,并通过该第二能力信息中携带的第八指示信息指示该终端设备是否支持参考信号发送模式。这样,接入网设备能够根据该第二能力信息为终端设备配置合适的资源配置和上报方式,以便于接入网设备正确解析终端设备的上报量,提高方案的可实现性。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二能力信息还携带该终端设备支持的最大符号个数,该最大符号数为该终端设备支持的连续测量参考信号的最大符号个数。
在该可能的实现方式中,该第二能力信息还可以携带该终端设备支持连续测量参考信号的最大符号个数,这样接入网设备可以根据该最大符号个数为终端设备配置合适的资源配置和上报方式,以适配终端设备的上报能力,从而为方案的实施提供基础,保障方案的可实施性和完整性。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该终端设备接收接入网设备发送的第二参考信号资源之前,该方法还包括:该终端设备接收该接入网设备发送的第二配置信息;该终端设备根据该第二配置信息确定:该第二参考信号资源用于波束合成以及上报该R个端口的第二参考信号资源的第二相位信息。
在该可能的实现方式中,该接入网设备为该终端设备配置合适的资源配置和上报方式,具体可以通过该第二配置信息发送给终端设备,这样终端设备可以根据该第二配置信息确定上报方式等相关信息,以便于方案的实施。
本申请第四方面提供一种通信方法,该通信方法包括:
接入网设备通过该接入网设备的R个端口并在R个发送波束上向终端设备发送第二参考信号资源,该R个端口与该R个发送波束一一对应,该R个发送波束为该接入网设备生成的与R个参考信号资源对应的发送波束,R为大于或等于2的整数;然后,该接入网设备接收该终端设备发送的第四指示信息,该第四指示信息指示第二相位信息,该第二相位信息为该终端设备分别测量所述R个端口的该第二参考信号资源得到的相位信息;该接入网设备根据该第四指示信息指示的第二相位信息生成第二发送波束,该第二发送波束用于该接入网设备与该终端设备之间进行通信。
上述方案中,接入网设备通过该接入网设备的R个端口并在R个发送波束上向终端设备发送第二参考信号资源;然后,接入网设备接收该终端设备发送的第四指示信息,该第四指示信息指示第二相位信息,该第二相位信息为该终端设备分别测量该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源得到的相位信息。在终端设备的移动过程中,接入网设备与终端设备之间的信道条件是不停变化的,而R个端口分别对应接入网设备的R个发送波束。因此,第二参考信号资源的第二相位信息可以体征该接入网设备与终端设备的信道变化情况,这样接入网设备可以结合第二相位信息生成匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的新的发送波束,或者,从该接入网设备的R个发送波束中选择匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的发送波束,以提升接入网设备与终端设备之间的通信性能。
一种可能的实现方式中,该第二参考信号资源用于波束合成。
在该可能的实现方式中,本申请新增波束合成过程,并在该波束合成过程中该终端设备分别测量接入网设备的R个端口的该第二参考信号资源的第二相位信息。也就是定义用于波束合成的第二参考信号资源,以便于获取第二相位信息。这样,接入网设备可以结合第二相位信息生成匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的第二发送波束。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二发送波束不属于发送波束集合,该发送波束集合包括该接入网设备生成的与M个参考信号资源对应的发送波束,该M个参考信号资源用于波束管理,该M个参考信号资源包括该R个参考信号资源,M为大于或等于2的整数,该M大于或等于该R。
在该可能的实现方式中,该第二发送波束不属于该接入网设备生成的M个发送波束中的发送波束,该M个发送波束为该接入网设备生成的固定权值的发送波束。第二发送波束的主瓣方向对准该终端设备,那么接入网设备与该终端设备通过第一发送波束进行通信传输,第二发送波束的波束增益能够大大得到提升,从而提高终端设备与接入网设备之间的通信 性能。其次,相比于接入网设备从M个发送波束中选择一个发送波束与终端设备进行通信传输的方式来说,第二发送波束对应的信道容量最大化,提升了第二发送波束对应的信道的容量。该M个发送波束为该接入网设备生成的与M个参考信号资源对应的M个发送波束,该M个发送波束为固定权值的发送波束。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二相位信息包括该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;或者,该R个端口上该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位分别与第二基准相位之间的相位差,该第二基准相位为所述R个端口中端口号最小的端口的该第二参考信号资源对应的相位。
在该可能的实现方式中,提供了第二相位信息携带的内容的两种形式,即第二相位信息包括该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差,或者,该R个端口上该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位分别与第二基准相位之间的相位差,而该方式能够与已有波束管理过程中RSRP的上报方式适配,对终端设备和接入网设备两侧改动较小,实用性较强。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该接入网设备接收终端设备发送的第十一指示信息,该第十一指示信息用于指示该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP;该第二相位信息包括R*(R-1)个相位差,或者,R-1个相位差;该R*(R-1)个相位差为该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;该R-1个相位差为该R个端口上该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位分别与第二基准相位之间的相位差。
在该可能的实现方式中,提供了该第二相位信息的具体包含的信息,以及该终端设备进一步发送给接入网设备的该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP。这样接入网设备可以根据该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP和该第二相位信息生成第二发送波束。也就是该波束合成过程也用于获取该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP,可以不需要通过波束管理过程来获取R个发送波束对应的RSRP。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该接入网设备向该终端设备发送第七指示信息,该第七指示信息用于指示该终端设备对该R个端口的第二参考信号资源的相位信息进行测量,该R个端口为该接入网设备中已被配置的用于发送第二参考信号资源的P个端口中的前R个端口,P为大于R的整数。
在该可能的实现方式中,若接入网设备配置该终端设备在该接入网设备的P个端口接收该第二参考信号资源,但是接入网设备通过波束管理流程确定终端设备上报的P个发送波束中的R个发送波束适合新的发送波束。那么接入网设备可以通过第七指示信息指示终端设备该接入网设备的R个端口的第二参考信号资源的相位进行测量并上报,从而便于接入网设备生成第二发送波束,提高方案的可行性和实用性。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该接入网设备通过该接入网设备的R个端口并在R个发送波束上向终端设备发送第二参考信号资源之前,该方法还包括:该接入网设备接收该终端设备发送的该终端设备的第二能力信息,该第二能力信息携带第八指示信息;然后,该接入网设备根据该第八指示信息确定该终端设备是否支持参考信号发送模式;该参考信号发送模式为:该接入网设备通过该R个发送波束并通过该接入网设备的R个端口在时域上连 续的R个符号发送该第二参考信号资源对应的第二参考信号;该R个发送波束与该R个端口一一对应,该R个端口与该R个符号一一对应。
在该可能的实现方式中,该接入网设备接收该终端设备上报该终端设备的第二能力信息,并根据该第二能力信息中携带的第八指示信息确定该终端设备是否支持参考信号发送模式。这样,接入网设备能够根据该第二能力信息为终端设备配置合适的资源配置和上报方式,以便于接入网设备正确解析终端设备的上报量,提高方案的可实现性。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二能力信息还携带该终端设备支持的最大符号个数,该最大符号数为该终端设备支持的连续测量参考信号的最大符号个数。
在该可能的实现方式中,该第二能力信息还可以携带该终端设备支持连续测量参考信号的最大符号个数,这样接入网设备可以根据该最大符号个数为终端设备配置合适的资源配置和上报方式,以适配终端设备的上报能力,从而为方案的实施提供基础,保障方案的可实施性和完整性。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该接入网设备通过该接入网设备的R个端口并在R个发送波束上向终端设备发送第二参考信号资源之前,该方法还包括:该接入网设备向该终端设备发送第二配置信息,该第二配置信息用于配置该第二参考信号资源用于波束合成,以及配置该终端设备上报该R个端口的第二参考信号资源的第二相位信息。
在该可能的实现方式中,该接入网设备为该终端设备配置合适的资源配置和上报方式,具体可以通过该第二配置信息发送给终端设备,这样终端设备可以根据该第二配置信息确定上报方式等相关信息,以便于方案的实施。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该接入网设备向该终端设备发送M个参考信号资源,该M个参考信号资源用于波束管理;该接入网设备接收该终端设备发送的第三消息,该第三消息携带第五指示信息和第六指示信息,该第五指示信息用于指示R个参考信号资源分别对应的CRI,该第六指示信息用于指示该R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP,该R个参考信号资源与该R个发送波束一一对应;该接入网设备根据该第三消息确定该R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP;该接入网设备根据该第四指示信息指示的第二相位信息生成第二发送波束,包括:该接入网设备根据该第二相位信息和该R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP生成该第二发送波束。
在该可能的实现方式中,在波束管理过程的基础上新增波束合成过程,这样接入网设备可以结合波束合成过程中获取到的第二相位信息和在波束管理过程中获取到的该R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP生成该第二发送波束,并通过该第二发送波束与该终端设备进行通信,以提升接入网设备与终端设备之间的通信性能。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该接入网设备根据该第二相位信息和该R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP生成该第二发送波束,包括:该接入网设备根据该第二相位信息和该R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP生成第二合成权;该接入网设备根据该第二合成权和第三权值集合生成该第二发送波束,该第三权值集合包括该R个参考信号资源对应的R个发送波束的权值。
在该可能的实现方式中,提供了一种接入网设备具体生成第二发送波束的过程,提升 了方案的可实现性和完整性。
本申请第五方面提供一种通信方法,该通信方法包括:
终端设备接收接入网设备发送的M个参考信号资源;然后,该终端设备测量该M个参考信号资源中的N个参考信号资源,得到第一相位信息,N和M均为大于或等于1的整数,M大于或等于N;然后,该终端设备向接入网设备发送第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示该第一相位信息。
上述方案中,终端设备测量该N个参考信号资源的第一相位信息,并向接入网设备发送第一指示信息,以指示该第一相位信息。在终端设备的移动过程中,接入网设备与终端设备之间的信道条件是不停变化的,而N个参考信号资源分别对应的N个发送波束。因此,N个参考信号资源的第一相位信息可以体征该接入网设备与终端设备的信道变化情况,这样接入网设备可以结合第一相位信息生成匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的新的发送波束,或者,从该接入网设备的N个发送波束中选择匹配匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的发送波束,以提升接入网设备与终端设备之间的通信性能。
一种可能的实现方式中,该M个参考信号资源用于波束管理,该第一相位信息用于该接入网设备生成第一发送波束,该第一发送波束用于该接入网设备与该终端设备之间进行通信。
在该可能的实现方式中,在波束管理过程中,终端设备新增上报第一相位信息,这样接入网设备可以结合该第一相位信息生成符合终端设备与接入网设备的信道条件的第一发送波束;然后,该接入网设备通过该第一发送波束与该终端设备进行通信,从而提高终端设备与接入网设备之间的传输性能。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一相位信息包括该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;或者,
该第一相位信息包括该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位与第一基准相位之间的相位差,该第一基准相位为第一参考信号资源对应的相位,该第一参考信号资源为该N个参考信号资源中RSRP最大或RSRQ最大的参考信号资源。
在该可能的实现方式中,示出了第一相位信息的两种可能的携带内容的形式,即第一相位信息包括该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位两两之间的相位差;或者,该第一相位信息包括该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位与第一基准相位之间的相位差,而该方式能够与已有波束管理过程中RSRP的上报方式适配,对终端设备和接入网设备两侧改动较小,实用性较强。
另一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:该终端设备测量所述N个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP。
在该可能的实现方式中,示出了在波束管理过程中,终端设备测量得到N个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一相位信息包括N*(N-1)个相位差,或者,N-1个相位差;该N个CRI为该N个参考信号资源分别对应的CRI,该N个RSRP为该N个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP;该N*(N-1)个相位差为该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间 的相位差,该N-1个相位差为该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位与该第一基准相位之间的相位差。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该M个参考信号资源中的该N个参考信号资源是由该终端设备通过同一接收波束接收的。
在该可能的实现方式中,由于接入网设备基于终端设备使用同一接收波束测量得到该N个参考信号资源对应的N个参考信号的幅度信息(即该N个参考信号的RSRP)和该N个参考信号的第一相位信息计算生成的第一发送波束。因此,在终端设备侧应当对终端设备的接收波束进行限定,以便于接入网设备生成匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的第一发送波束,从而提高终端设备与接入网设备之间进行通信的通信性能。
另一种可能的实现方式中,在该终端设备接收接入网设备发送的M个参考信号资源之前,该方法还包括:
该终端设备向该接入网设备发送该终端设备的第一能力信息,该第一能力信息携带第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示该终端设备是否具备对用于该接入网设备生成该第一发送波束所需的第一相位信息进行测量的测量能力。
在该可能的实现方式中,该终端设备向该接入网设备发送该终端设备的第一能力信息,这样接入网设备能够根据第一能力信息为终端设备配置合适的资源配置和上报方式,以便于正确解析终端设备的上报量。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二指示信息为用于指示该终端设备是否支持对用于波束管理的参考信号资源对应的相位信息的测量。
在该可能的实现方式中,该终端设备通过第二指示信息指示该终端设备是否支持对用于波束管理的参考信号资源对应的相位信息的测量,这样接入网设备能够为该终端设备配置合适的资源配置和上报方式,以便于接入网设备正确解析终端设备的上报量,提高解析效率。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一能力信息还携带以下信息中的一个或多个:该终端设备支持合并用于波束管理的参考信号资源对应的发送波束的最大个数;该终端设备对该第一相位信息进行量化的量化能力信息。
在该可能的实现方式中,该终端设备还可以在第一能力信息携带该终端设备支持合并的发送波束的最大个数和量化能力信息,以便于接入网设备为终端设备配置合适的资源配置和上报方式。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该终端设备接收接入网设备发送的M个参考信号资源之前,该方法还包括:该终端设备接收该接入网设备发送的第一配置信息;然后,该终端设备根据该第一配置信息确定上报该N个参考信号资源的第一相位信息。
在该可能的实现方式中,该接入网设备向终端设备发送该第一配置信息,以便于通知终端设备测量该N个参考信号资源的第一相位信息,并按照该第一配置信息指示的配置方式上报该第一相位信息。这样接入网设备能够正确解析该终端设备上报的第一相位信息。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一配置信息包括第一资源集合的第二配置信息,该第二配置信息包括repetition字段,该repetition字段为OFF,该第一资源集合包括该M 个参考信号资源。
在该可能的实现方式中,示出了该第二配置信息用于配置该终端设备不期待接入网设备使用相同的发送空域滤波器(即发送波束)发送该M个参考信号资源的一种可能的实现方式,提升了方案的可实现性。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一配置信息还包括以下信息中的一个或多个:
第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于指示该第一资源集合用于该接入网设备生成该第一发送波束;
该第一相位信息的上报粒度信息;
当该第一相位信息的上报粒度为子带上报粒度时,每个子带的大小信息。
在该可能的实现方式中,提供了该第一配置信息中携带的一些其他内容。需要说明的是,上述第三指示信息、该第一相位信息的上报粒度信息和该每个子带的大小信息也可以通过其他消息或信息上报,具体本申请不做限定。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:
该终端设备向该接入网设备发送第十二指示信息和第十三指示信息,该第十二指示信息用于指示该N个参考信号资源对应的N个CRI,该第十三指示信息用于指示该N个参考信号资源对应的RSRP。
本申请第六方面提供一种通信方法,该通信方法包括:
终端设备接收接入网设备发送的第二参考信号资源,该第二参考信号资源是该接入网设备通过该接入网设备的R个端口并在R个发送波束上发送的参考信号资源,该R个端口与该R个发送波束一一对应,该R个发送波束为该接入网设备生成的与R个参考信号资源对应的发送波束,R为大于或等于2的整数;然后,该终端设备测量分别测量所述R个端口的第二参考信号资源,得到第二相位信息;该终端设备向该接入网设备发送第二消息,该第二消息携带该第四指示信息,该第四指示信息用于指示该第二相位信息。
上述方案中,终端设备测量该N个端口的第二参考信号资源的第二相位信息,并向接入网设备发送第四指示信息,以指示该第二相位信息。在终端设备的移动过程中,接入网设备与终端设备之间的信道条件是不停变化的,而R个端口分别对应接入网设备的R个发送波束。因此,第二参考信号资源的第二相位信息可以体征该接入网设备与终端设备的信道变化情况,这样接入网设备可以结合第二相位信息生成匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的新的发送波束,或者,从该接入网设备的R个发送波束中选择匹配匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的发送波束,以提升接入网设备与终端设备之间的通信性能。
一种可能的实现方式中,该第二参考信号资源用于波束合成,该第二相位信息用于所述接入网设备生成第二发送波束,该第二发送波束用于该接入网设备与该终端设备之间进行通信。
在该可能的实现方式中,在已有的波束管理过程的基础上新增波束合成的过程,终端设备测量得到第二相位信息,这样接入网设备可以结合第二相位信息生成匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的第二发送波束,以提升接入网设备与终端设备之间的通信性能。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二发送波束不属于发送波束集合,该发送波束集合包括该接入网设备生成的与M个参考信号资源对应的发送波束,该M个参考信号资源用于波束管理,该M个参考信号资源包括该R个参考信号资源,M为大于或等于2的整数,该M大于或等于该R。
在该可能的实现方式中,该第二发送波束不属于该接入网设备生成的M个发送波束中的发送波束,该M个发送波束为该接入网设备生成的固定权值的发送波束。第二发送波束的主瓣方向对准该终端设备,那么接入网设备与该终端设备通过第一发送波束进行通信传输,第二发送波束的波束增益能够大大得到提升,从而提高终端设备与接入网设备之间的通信性能。其次,相比于接入网设备从M个发送波束中选择一个发送波束与终端设备进行通信传输的方式来说,第二发送波束对应的信道容量最大化,提升了第二发送波束对应的信道的容量。该M个发送波束为该接入网设备生成的与M个参考信号资源对应的M个发送波束,该M个发送波束为固定权值的发送波束。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二相位信息包括该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;或者,
该R个端口上该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位分别与第二基准相位之间的相位差,该第二基准相位为所述R个端口中端口号最小的端口的该第二参考信号资源对应的相位。
在该可能的实现方式中,提供了第二相位信息携带的内容的两种形式,即第二相位信息包括该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差,或者,该R个端口上该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位分别与第二基准相位之间的相位差,而该方式能够与已有波束管理过程中RSRP的上报方式适配,对终端设备和接入网设备两侧改动较小,实用性较强。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二相位信息包括R*(R-1)个相位差,或者,R-1个相位差;该R*(R-1)个相位差为该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;该R-1个相位差为该R个端口上该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位分别与第二基准相位之间的相位差。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该终端设备测量该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP;该终端设备向接入网设备发送第十一指示信息,该第十一指示信息用于指示该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP。
在该可能的实现方式中,该终端设备进一步发送给接入网设备的该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP。这样接入网设备可以根据该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP和该第二相位信息生成第二发送波束。也就是该波束合成过程也用于获取该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP,可以不需要通过波束管理过程来获取R个发送波束对应的RSRP。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该终端设备接收接入网设备发送的第二参考信号资源,包括:该终端设备使用同一接收波束接收该接入网设备发送的该第二参考信号资源。
在该可能的实现方式中,由于接入网设备基于终端设备使用同一接收波束测量得到第二相位信息计算生成的第二发送波束,因此,在终端设备侧应当对终端设备的接收波束进 行限定,以便于接入网设备生成匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的第二发送波束,从而提高终端设备与接入网设备之间进行通信的通信性能。
另一种可能的实现方式中,在该终端设备接收接入网设备发送的第二参考信号资源之前,该方法还包括:该终端设备接收该接入网设备发送的M个参考信号资源,该M个参考信号资源用于波束管理;该终端设备分别测量该M个参考信号资源,得到该M个参考信号资源中的R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP,且该终端设备通过第一接收波束接收该R个参考信号资,R和M均为大于或等于2的整数,M大于或等于R;该终端设备向该接入网设备发送第五指示信息和第六指示信息,该第五指示信息用于指示该R个参考信号资源分别对应的CRI,该第六指示信息用于指示R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP;该终端设备接收接入网设备发送的第二参考信号资源,包括:该终端设备通过该第一接收波束接收该接入网设备发送的该第二参考信号资源。
在该可能的实现方式中,该终端设备可以在波束管理过程上报该R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP;而在波束合成过程中,终端设备上报第二相位信息。这样接入网设备可以根据该R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP和第二相位信息生成第二发送波束,并通过该第二发送波束与终端设备进行通信,从而提高终端设备与接入网设备之间进行通信的通信性能。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该终端设备测量该第二参考信号资源,得到第二相位信息之前,该方法还包括:该终端设备接收该接入网设备发送的第七指示信息;该终端设备根据该第七指示信息确定对该接入网设备的R个端口的第二参考信号资源的相位进行测量,该R个端口为该接入网设备中已被配置的用于发送第二参考信号资源的P个端口中的前R个端口,P为大于R的整数。
在该可能的实现方式中,若接入网设备配置该终端设备在该接入网设备的P个端口接收该第二参考信号资源,但是接入网设备通过波束管理流程确定终端设备上报的P个发送波束中的R个发送波束适合新的发送波束。那么接入网设备可以通过第七指示信息指示终端设备该接入网设备的R个端口的第二参考信号资源的相位进行测量并上报,从而便于接入网设备生成第二发送波束,提高方案的可行性和实用性。
另一种可能的实现方式中,在该终端设备接收接入网设备发送的第二参考信号资源之前,该方法还包括:该终端设备向该接入网设备发送该终端设备的第二能力信息;其中,该第二能力信息携带第八指示信息,该第八指示信息用于指示该终端设备是否支持参考信号发送模式;该参考信号发送模式为:该接入网设备通过该R个发送波束并通过该接入网设备的R个端口在时域上连续的R个符号发送该第二参考信号资源对应的第二参考信号;该R个发送波束与该R个端口一一对应,该R个端口与该R个符号一一对应。
在该可能的实现方式中,终端设备先向该接入网设备上报该终端设备的第二能力信息,并通过该第二能力信息中携带的第八指示信息指示该终端设备是否支持参考信号发送模式。这样,接入网设备能够根据该第二能力信息为终端设备配置合适的资源配置和上报方式,以便于接入网设备正确解析终端设备的上报量,提高方案的可实现性。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二能力信息还携带该终端设备支持的最大符号个数,该最大符号数为该终端设备支持的连续测量参考信号的最大符号个数。
在该可能的实现方式中,该第二能力信息还可以携带该终端设备支持连续测量参考信号的最大符号个数,这样接入网设备可以根据该最大符号个数为终端设备配置合适的资源配置和上报方式,以适配终端设备的上报能力,从而为方案的实施提供基础,保障方案的可实施性和完整性。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该终端设备接收接入网设备发送的第二参考信号资源之前,该方法还包括:该终端设备接收该接入网设备发送的第二配置信息;该终端设备根据该第二配置信息确定:该第二参考信号资源用于波束合成以及上报该R个端口的第二参考信号资源的第二相位信息。
在该可能的实现方式中,该接入网设备为该终端设备配置合适的资源配置和上报方式,具体可以通过该第二配置信息发送给终端设备,这样终端设备可以根据该第二配置信息确定上报方式等相关信息,以便于方案的实施。
本申请第七方面提供一种通信装置,该通信装置包括:
收发模块,用于接收接入网设备发送的M个参考信号资源;
处理模块,用于分别测量该M个参考信号资源,得到第一测量信息,该第一测量信息包括第一相位信息,该第一相位信息为该通信装置分别测量该M个参考信号资源中的N个参考信号资源得到的相位信息,N和M均为大于或等于1的整数,M大于或等于N;
该收发模块,还用于向该接入网设备发送第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示该第一相位信息。
一种可能的实现方式中,该M个参考信号资源用于波束管理,该第一相位信息用于该接入网设备生成第一发送波束,该第一发送波束用于该接入网设备与该通信装置之间进行通信。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一发送波束不属于发送波束集合,该发送波束集合包括该接入网设备生成的与该M个参考信号资源分别对应的发送波束。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一相位信息包括该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;或者,
该第一相位信息包括该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位与第一基准相位之间的相位差,该第一基准相位为第一参考信号资源对应的相位,该第一参考信号资源为该N个参考信号资源中RSRP最大或RSRQ最大的参考信号资源。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一测量信息包括N个CRI、N个RSRP和该第一相位信息,该第一相位信息包括N*(N-1)个相位差,或者,N-1个相位差;该N个CRI为该N个参考信号资源分别对应的CRI,该N个RSRP为该N个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP;该N*(N-1)个相位差为该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差,该N-1个相位差为该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位与该第一基准相位之间的相位差。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该M个参考信号资源中的该N个参考信号资源是由该通信装置通过同一接收波束接收的。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块还用于:
向该接入网设备发送该通信装置的第一能力信息,该第一能力信息携带第二指示信息, 该第二指示信息用于指示该通信装置是否具备对用于该接入网设备生成该第一发送波束所需的第一相位信息进行测量的测量能力。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二指示信息为用于指示该通信装置是否支持对用于波束管理的参考信号资源对应的相位信息的测量。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一能力信息还携带以下信息中的一个或多个:该通信装置支持合并用于波束管理的参考信号资源对应的发送波束的最大个数;该通信装置对该第一相位信息进行量化的量化能力信息。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块还用于:
接收该接入网设备发送的第一配置信息;
该处理模块还用于:
根据该第一配置信息确定上报该N个参考信号资源的第一相位信息。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一配置信息包括第一资源集合的第二配置信息,该第二配置信息包括repetition字段,该repetition字段为OFF,该第一资源集合包括该M个参考信号资源。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一配置信息还包括以下信息中的一个或多个:
第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于指示该第一资源集合用于该接入网设备生成该第一发送波束;
该第一相位信息的上报粒度信息;
当该第一相位信息的上报粒度为子带上报粒度时,每个子带的大小信息。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块还用于:
向该接入网设备发送第十二指示信息和第十三指示信息,该第十二指示信息用于指示该N个参考信号资源对应的N个CRI,该第十三指示信息用于指示该N个参考信号资源对应的RSRP。
本申请第八方面提供一种通信装置,该通信装置包括:
收发模块,用于向终端设备发送M个参考信号资源;接收该终端设备发送的第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示第一相位信息,该第一相位信息为该终端设备测量N个参考信号资源得到的相位信息,该M个参考信号资源包括该N个参考信号资源,N和M均为大于或等于1的整数,M大于或等于N;
处理模块,用于根据该第一指示信息指示的第一相位信息生成第一发送波束,该第一发送波束用于该通信装置与该终端设备之间进行通信。
一种可能的实现方式中,该M个参考信号资源用于波束管理。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一发送波束不属于发送波束集合,该发送波束集合包括该通信装置生成的与该M个参考信号资源分别对应的发送波束。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一相位信息包括该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;或者,该第一相位信息包括该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位与第一基准相位之间的相位差,该第一基准相位为第一参考信号资源对应的相位,该第一参考信号资源为该N个参考信号资源中RSRP最大或RSRQ最大的参考信号资源。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一相位信息包括N*(N-1)个相位差,或者,N-1个相位差;该N*(N-1)个相位差为该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差,该N-1个相位差为该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位与该第一基准相位之间的相位差。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该M个参考信号资源中的该N个参考信号资源是由该终端设备通过同一接收波束接收的。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块还用于:
接收该终端设备发送的该终端设备的第一能力信息,该第一能力信息携带第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示该终端设备是否具备对用于通信装置生成第一发送波束所需的第一相位信息进行测量的测量能力;
该处理模块还用于:
根据该第一能力信息确定该终端设备具备对第一相位信息进行测量的测量能力。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二指示信息为用于指示该终端设备是否支持对用于波束管理的参考信号资源对应的相位信息的测量。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一能力信息还携带以下信息中的一个或多个:该终端设备支持合并用于波束管理的参考信号资源对应的发送波束的最大个数;该终端设备对该第一相位信息进行量化的量化能力信息。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块还用于:
向该终端设备发送第一配置信息,该第一配置信息用于配置该终端设备上报该N个参考信号资源的第一相位信息。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一配置信息包括第一资源集合的第二配置信息,该第二配置信息包括repetition字段,该repetition字段为OFF,该第一资源集合包括该M个参考信号资源。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一配置信息还包括以下信息中的一个或多个:
第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于指示该第一资源集合用于该通信装置生成该第一发送波束;
该第一相位信息的上报粒度信息;
当该第一相位信息的上报粒度为子带上报粒度时,每个子带的大小信息。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块还用于:
接收该终端设备发送的第十二指示信息和第十三指示信息,该第十二指示信息用于指示该N个参考信号资源对应的N个CRI,该第十三指示信息用于指示该N个参考信号资源对应的RSRP;
该处理模块还用于:
根据该第十二指示信息和该第十三指示信息确定该N个参考信号资源对应的RSRP;
该处理模块具体用于:
根据该第一相位信息和该N个参考信号资源对应的RSRP生成第一发送波束。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该处理模块具体用于:
根据该第一相位信息和该N个参考信号资源的RSRP确定第一合成权;
根据该第一合成权和第二权值集合生成该第一发送波束,该第二权值集合包括该N个参考信号资源对应的N个发送波束的权值。
本申请第九方面提供一种通信装置,该通信装置包括:
收发模块,用于接收接入网设备发送的第二参考信号资源,该第二参考信号资源是该接入网设备通过该接入网设备的R个端口并在R个发送波束上发送的参考信号资源,该R个端口与该R个发送波束一一对应,该R个发送波束为该接入网设备生成的与R个参考信号资源对应的发送波束,R为大于或等于2的整数;
处理模块,用于测量该第二参考信号资源,得到第二测量信息,该第二测量信息包括第二相位信息,该第二相位信息为该通信装置分别测量所述R个端口的该第二参考信号资源得到的相位信息;
该收发模块,还用于向该接入网设备发送第四指示信息,该第四指示信息用于指示该第二相位信息。
一种可能的实现方式中,该第二参考信号资源用于波束合成,该第二相位信息用于所述接入网设备生成第二发送波束,该第二发送波束用于该接入网设备与该通信装置之间进行通信。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二发送波束不属于发送波束集合,该发送波束集合包括该接入网设备生成的与M个参考信号资源对应的发送波束,该M个参考信号资源用于波束管理,该M个参考信号资源包括该R个参考信号资源,M为大于或等于2的整数,该M大于或等于该R。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二相位信息包括该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;或者,
该R个端口上该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位分别与第二基准相位之间的相位差,该第二基准相位为所述R个端口中端口号最小的端口的该第二参考信号资源对应的相位。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二测量信息包括该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP;该第二相位信息包括R*(R-1)个相位差,或者,R-1个相位差;该R*(R-1)个相位差为该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;该R-1个相位差为该R个端口上该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位分别与第二基准相位之间的相位差。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块还用于:
向该接入网设备发送第十一指示信息,该第十一指示信息用于指示该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块具体用于:
使用同一接收波束接收该接入网设备发送的该第二参考信号资源。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块具体用于:
接收该接入网设备发送的M个参考信号资源,该M个参考信号资源用于波束管理;
该处理模块还用于:
分别测量该M个参考信号资源,得到该M个参考信号资源中的R个参考信号资源分别 对应的RSRP,且该通信装置通过第一接收波束接收该R个参考信号资,R和M均为大于或等于2的整数,M大于或等于R;
该收发模块还用于:
向该接入网设备发送第五指示信息和第六指示信息,该第五指示信息用于指示该R个参考信号资源分别对应的CRI,该第六指示信息用于指示R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP;
该收发模块具体用于:
通过该第一接收波束接收该接入网设备发送的该第二参考信号资源。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块还用于:
接收该接入网设备发送的第七指示信息;
该处理模块还用于:
根据该第七指示信息确定对该接入网设备的R个端口的第二参考信号资源的相位进行测量,该R个端口为该接入网设备中已被配置的用于发送第二参考信号资源的P个端口中的前R个端口,P为大于R的整数。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块还用于:
向该接入网设备发送该通信装置的第二能力信息;其中,该第二能力信息携带第八指示信息,该第八指示信息用于指示该通信装置是否支持参考信号发送模式;该参考信号发送模式为:该接入网设备通过该R个发送波束并通过该接入网设备的R个端口在时域上连续的R个符号发送该第二参考信号资源对应的第二参考信号;该R个发送波束与该R个端口一一对应,该R个端口与该R个符号一一对应。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二能力信息还携带该通信装置支持的最大符号个数,该最大符号数为该通信装置支持的连续测量参考信号的最大符号个数。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块还用于:
接收该接入网设备发送的第二配置信息;
该处理模块还用于:
根据该第二配置信息确定:该第二参考信号资源用于波束合成以及上报该R个端口的第二参考信号资源的第二相位信息。
本申请第十方面提供一种通信装置,该通信装置包括:
收发模块,用于通过该通信装置的R个端口并在R个发送波束上向终端设备发送第二参考信号资源,该R个端口与该R个发送波束一一对应,该R个发送波束为该通信装置生成的与R个参考信号资源对应的发送波束,R为大于或等于2的整数;接收该终端设备发送的第四指示信息,该第四指示信息指示第二相位信息,该第二相位信息为该终端设备分别测量所述R个端口的该第二参考信号资源得到的相位信息;
处理模块,用于根据该第四指示信息指示的第二相位信息生成第二发送波束,该第二发送波束用于该通信装置与该终端设备之间进行通信。
一种可能的实现方式中,该第二参考信号资源用于波束合成。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二发送波束不属于发送波束集合,该发送波束集合包括该通信装置生成的与M个参考信号资源对应的发送波束,该M个参考信号资源用于波束 管理,该M个参考信号资源包括该R个参考信号资源,M为大于或等于2的整数,该M大于或等于该R。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二相位信息包括该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;或者,该R个端口上该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位分别与第二基准相位之间的相位差,该第二基准相位为所述R个端口中端口号最小的端口的该第二参考信号资源对应的相位。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块还用于:
接收终端设备发送的第十一指示信息,该第十一指示信息用于指示该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP;该第二相位信息包括R*(R-1)个相位差,或者,R-1个相位差;该R*(R-1)个相位差为该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;该R-1个相位差为该R个端口上该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位分别与第二基准相位之间的相位差。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块还用于:
向该终端设备发送第七指示信息,该第七指示信息用于指示该终端设备对该R个端口的第二参考信号资源的相位信息进行测量,该R个端口为该通信装置中已被配置的用于发送第二参考信号资源的P个端口中的前R个端口,P为大于R的整数。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块还用于:
接收该终端设备发送的该终端设备的第二能力信息,该第二能力信息携带第八指示信息;
该处理模块还用于:
根据该第八指示信息确定该终端设备是否支持参考信号发送模式;该参考信号发送模式为:该通信装置通过该R个发送波束并通过该通信装置的R个端口在时域上连续的R个符号发送该第二参考信号资源对应的第二参考信号;该R个发送波束与该R个端口一一对应,该R个端口与该R个符号一一对应。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二能力信息还携带该终端设备支持的最大符号个数,该最大符号数为该终端设备支持的连续测量参考信号的最大符号个数。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块还用于:
向该终端设备发送第二配置信息,该第二配置信息用于配置该第二参考信号资源用于波束合成,以及配置该终端设备上报该R个端口的第二参考信号资源的第二相位信息。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块还用于:
向该终端设备发送M个参考信号资源,该M个参考信号资源用于波束管理;
接收该终端设备发送的第三消息,该第三消息携带第五指示信息和第六指示信息,该第五指示信息用于指示R个参考信号资源分别对应的CRI,该第六指示信息用于指示该R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP,该R个参考信号资源与该R个发送波束一一对应;
该处理模块还用于:
根据该第三消息确定该R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP;
该处理模块具体用于:
根据该第二相位信息和该R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP生成该第二发送波束。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该处理模块具体用于:
根据该第二相位信息和该R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP生成第二合成权;
根据该第二合成权和第三权值集合生成该第二发送波束,该第三权值集合包括该R个参考信号资源对应的R个发送波束的权值。
本申请第十一方面提供一种通信装置,该通信装置包括:
收发模块,用于接收接入网设备发送的M个参考信号资源;
处理模块,用于测量该M个参考信号资源中的N个参考信号资源,得到第一相位信息,N和M均为大于或等于1的整数,M大于或等于N;
该收发模块,还用于向接入网设备发送第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示该第一相位信息。
一种可能的实现方式中,该M个参考信号资源用于波束管理,该第一相位信息用于该接入网设备生成第一发送波束,该第一发送波束用于该接入网设备与该通信装置之间进行通信。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一相位信息包括该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;或者,
该第一相位信息包括该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位与第一基准相位之间的相位差,该第一基准相位为第一参考信号资源对应的相位,该第一参考信号资源为该N个参考信号资源中RSRP最大或RSRQ最大的参考信号资源。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该处理模块还用于:
测量所述N个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一相位信息包括N*(N-1)个相位差,或者,N-1个相位差;该N个CRI为该N个参考信号资源分别对应的CRI,该N个RSRP为该N个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP;该N*(N-1)个相位差为该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差,该N-1个相位差为该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位与该第一基准相位之间的相位差。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该M个参考信号资源中的该N个参考信号资源是由该通信装置通过同一接收波束接收的。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块还用于:
向该接入网设备发送该通信装置的第一能力信息,该第一能力信息携带第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示该通信装置是否具备对用于该接入网设备生成该第一发送波束所需的第一相位信息进行测量的测量能力。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二指示信息为用于指示该通信装置是否支持对用于波束管理的参考信号资源对应的相位信息的测量。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一能力信息还携带以下信息中的一个或多个:该通信装置支持合并用于波束管理的参考信号资源对应的发送波束的最大个数;该通信装置对该第一相位信息进行量化的量化能力信息。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块还用于:
接收该接入网设备发送的第一配置信息;
该处理模块还用于:
根据该第一配置信息确定上报该N个参考信号资源的第一相位信息。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一配置信息包括第一资源集合的第二配置信息,该第二配置信息包括repetition字段,该repetition字段为OFF,该第一资源集合包括该M个参考信号资源。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一配置信息还包括以下信息中的一个或多个:
第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于指示该第一资源集合用于该接入网设备生成该第一发送波束;
该第一相位信息的上报粒度信息;
当该第一相位信息的上报粒度为子带上报粒度时,每个子带的大小信息。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块还用于:
向该接入网设备发送第十二指示信息和第十三指示信息,该第十二指示信息用于指示该N个参考信号资源对应的N个CRI,该第十三指示信息用于指示该N个参考信号资源对应的RSRP。
本申请第十二方面提供一种通信装置,该通信装置包括:
收发模块,用于接收接入网设备发送的第二参考信号资源,该第二参考信号资源是该接入网设备通过该接入网设备的R个端口并在R个发送波束上发送的参考信号资源,该R个端口与该R个发送波束一一对应,该R个发送波束为该接入网设备生成的与R个参考信号资源对应的发送波束,R为大于或等于2的整数;
处理模块,用于测量分别测量所述R个端口的第二参考信号资源,得到第二相位信息;
该收发模块,还用于向该接入网设备发送第二消息,该第二消息携带该第四指示信息,该第四指示信息用于指示该第二相位信息。
一种可能的实现方式中,该第二参考信号资源用于波束合成,该第二相位信息用于所述接入网设备生成第二发送波束,该第二发送波束用于该接入网设备与该通信装置之间进行通信。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二发送波束不属于发送波束集合,该发送波束集合包括该接入网设备生成的与M个参考信号资源对应的发送波束,该M个参考信号资源用于波束管理,该M个参考信号资源包括该R个参考信号资源,M为大于或等于2的整数,该M大于或等于该R。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二相位信息包括该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;或者,
该R个端口上该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位分别与第二基准相位之间的相位差,该第二基准相位为所述R个端口中端口号最小的端口的该第二参考信号资源对应的相位。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二相位信息包括R*(R-1)个相位差,或者,R-1个相位差;该R*(R-1)个相位差为该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的 相位差;该R-1个相位差为该R个端口上该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位分别与第二基准相位之间的相位差。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该处理模块还用于:
测量该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP;
该收发模块还用于:
向接入网设备发送第十一指示信息,该第十一指示信息用于指示该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块具体用于:
使用同一接收波束接收该接入网设备发送的该第二参考信号资源。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块还用于:
接收该接入网设备发送的M个参考信号资源,该M个参考信号资源用于波束管理;
该处理模块还用于:
分别测量该M个参考信号资源,得到该M个参考信号资源中的R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP,且该通信装置通过第一接收波束接收该R个参考信号资,R和M均为大于或等于2的整数,M大于或等于R;
该收发模块还用于:
向该接入网设备发送第五指示信息和第六指示信息,该第五指示信息用于指示该R个参考信号资源分别对应的CRI,该第六指示信息用于指示R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP;
该收发模块具体用于:
通过该第一接收波束接收该接入网设备发送的该第二参考信号资源。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块还用于:
接收该接入网设备发送的第七指示信息;
该处理模块还用于:
根据该第七指示信息确定对该接入网设备的R个端口的第二参考信号资源的相位进行测量,该R个端口为该接入网设备中已被配置的用于发送第二参考信号资源的P个端口中的前R个端口,P为大于R的整数。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块还用于:
向该接入网设备发送该通信装置的第二能力信息;其中,该第二能力信息携带第八指示信息,该第八指示信息用于指示该通信装置是否支持参考信号发送模式;该参考信号发送模式为:该接入网设备通过该R个发送波束并通过该接入网设备的R个端口在时域上连续的R个符号发送该第二参考信号资源对应的第二参考信号;该R个发送波束与该R个端口一一对应,该R个端口与该R个符号一一对应。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二能力信息还携带该通信装置支持的最大符号个数,该最大符号数为该通信装置支持的连续测量参考信号的最大符号个数。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块还用于:
接收该接入网设备发送的第二配置信息;
该处理模块还用于:
根据该第二配置信息确定:该第二参考信号资源用于波束合成以及上报该R个端口的第二参考信号资源的第二相位信息。
本申请第十三方面提供一种通信装置,该通信装置包括:处理器和存储器。该存储器中存储有计算机程序或计算机指令,该处理器还用于调用并运行该存储器中存储的计算机程序或计算机指令,使得处理器实现如第一方面中的任意一种实现方式。
可选的,该通信装置还包括收发器,该处理器用于控制该收发器收发信号。
本申请第十四方面提供一种通信装置,该通信装置包括:处理器和存储器。该存储器中存储有计算机程序或计算机指令,该处理器用于调用并运行该存储器中存储的计算机程序或计算机指令,使得处理器实现如第二方面中的任意一种实现方式。
可选的,该通信装置还包括收发器,该处理器用于控制该收发器收发信号。
本申请第十五方面提供一种通信装置,该通信装置包括:处理器和存储器。该存储器中存储有计算机程序或计算机指令,该处理器还用于调用并运行该存储器中存储的计算机程序或计算机指令,使得处理器实现如第三方面中的任意一种实现方式。
可选的,该通信装置还包括收发器,该处理器用于控制该收发器收发信号。
本申请第十六方面提供一种通信装置,该通信装置包括:处理器和存储器。该存储器中存储有计算机程序或计算机指令,该处理器还用于调用并运行该存储器中存储的计算机程序或计算机指令,使得处理器实现如第四方面中的任意一种实现方式。
可选的,该通信装置还包括收发器,该处理器用于控制该收发器收发信号。
本申请第十七方面提供一种通信装置,该通信装置包括:处理器和存储器。该存储器存储有计算机程序或计算机指令,该处理器用于调用并运行该存储器中存储的计算机程序或计算机指令,使得处理器实现如第五方面中的任意一种实现方式。
可选的,该通信装置还包括收发器,该处理器用于控制该收发器收发信号。
本申请第十八方面提供一种通信装置,该通信装置包括:处理器和存储器;该存储器中存储有计算机程序或计算机指令,该处理器还用于调用并运行该存储器中存储的计算机程序或计算机指令,使得处理器实现如第六方面中的任意一种实现方式。
可选的,该通信装置还包括收发器,该处理器用于控制该收发器收发信号。
本申请第十九方面提供一种包括指令的计算机程序产品,其特征在于,当其在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行如第一方面、第二方面、第三方面、第四方面、第五方面和第六方面中任一种的实现方式。
本申请第二十方面提供一种计算机可读存储介质,包括计算机指令,当该指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如第一方面、第二方面、第三方面第四方面、第五方面和第六方面任一方面中的任一种实现方式。
本申请第二十一方面提供一种芯片装置,包括处理器,用于调用该存储器中的计算机程序或计算机指令,以使得该处理器执行上述第一方面、第二方面、第三方面、第四方面、第五方面和第六方面中的任一方面中的任一种实现方式。
可选的,该处理器通过接口与该存储器耦合。
本申请第二十二方面提供一种通信系统,该通信系统包括如第七方面的通信装置和如 第八方面的通信装置。
本申请第二十三方面提供一种通信系统,该通信系统包括如第九方面的通信装置和如第十方面的通信装置。
经由上述技术方案可知,终端设备接收接入网设备发送的M个参考信号资源;然后,终端设备分别测量该M个参考信号资源,得到第一测量信息,该第一测量信息包括第一相位信息,该第一相位信息为该终端设备分别测量N个参考信号资源得到的相位信息,该M个参考信号资源包括N个参考信号资源,N和M均为大于或等于1的整数,M大于或等于N;然后,终端设备向接入网设备发送第一消息,该第一消息携带第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示第一相位信息。由此可知,本申请实施例的技术方案中,终端设备测量该N个参考信号资源的第一相位信息,并向接入网设备发送第一指示信息,以指示该第一相位信息。在终端设备的移动过程中,接入网设备与终端设备之间的信道条件是不停变化的,而N个参考信号资源分别对应接入网设备的N个发送波束。因此,N个参考信号资源的第一相位信息可以体征该接入网设备与终端设备的信道变化情况,这样接入网设备可以结合第一相位信息生成匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的新的发送波束,或者,从该接入网设备的N个发送波束中选择匹配匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的发送波束,以提升接入网设备与终端设备之间的通信性能。
附图说明
图1为本申请实施例通信系统的一个示意图;
图2A为本申请实施例通信处理方法的一个实施例示意图;
图2B为本申请实施例信道状态信息参考信号(channel status information reference signal,CSI-RS)资源的一个示意图;
图2C为本申请实施例CSI-RS资源的另一个示意图;
图2D为本申请实施例第一参考信号的相位与第二参考信号的相位的一个示意图;
图2E为本申请实施例第一配置信息的一个示意图;
图3A为本申请实施例通信处理方法的另一个实施例示意图;
图3B为本申请实施例第二参考信号资源的一个示意图;
图3C为本申请实施例第二参考信号资源的另一个示意图;
图3D为本申请实施例第二配置信息的一个示意图;
图4为本申请实施例通信装置的一个结构示意图;
图5为本申请实施例通信装置的另一个结构示意图;
图6为本申请实施例通信装置的另一个结构示意图;
图7为本申请实施例通信装置的另一个结构示意图;
图8为本申请实施例终端设备的一个结构示意图;
图9为本申请实施例通信装置的另一个结构示意图;
图10为本申请实施例通信装置的另一个结构示意图;
图11为本申请实施例通信系统的一个示意图。
具体实施方式
为了使本申请的目的、技术方案和优点更加清楚,下面将结合附图对本申请作进一步地描述。在本文中提及的“实施例”意味着,结合实施例描述的特定特征、结构或特性可以包含在本申请的至少一个实施例中。在说明书中的各个位置出现该短语并不一定均是指相同的实施例,也不是与其它实施例互斥的独立的或备选的实施例。本领域技术人员可以显式地和隐式地理解的是,本文所描述的实施例可以与其它实施例相结合。
本申请实施例中出现的术语“和/或”,可以是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。
下面对本申请涉及的一些术语作介绍。
波束(beam):波束是一种通信资源。波束可以是宽波束,或者窄波束,或者其他类型波束。形成波束的技术可以是波束成形技术或者其他技术手段。波束成形技术可以具体为数字波束成形技术、模拟波束成形技术和混合数字/模拟波束成形技术。不同的波束可以认为是不同的资源。通过不同波束可以发送相同的信息或不同的信息。可选的,可以将具有相同或者类似的通信特征的多个波束视为是一个波束。一个波束内可以包括一个或多个天线端口,用于传输数据信道、控制信道和探测信号等。例如,发射波束可以是指信号经过天线发射出去后在空间不同方向上形成的信号强度的分布。接收波束可以是指从天线上接收到的无线信号在空间不同方向上的信号强度分布。可以理解的是,形成一个波束的一个或多个天线端口也可以看作是一个天线端口集。波束在协议中的体现还可以是空域滤波器(spatial filter)。
传输配置编号状态(transmission configuration index state,TCI state):3GPP Release 15(R15)中,对于每一个物理信道或者物理信号,网络都可以通过不同的信令对终端设备进行波束指示,指导终端设备如何接收下行物理信道或者物理信号,以及指导终端设备如何发送上行物理信道或者物理信号。R15下行波束指示是通过TCI实现的。
图1为本申请实施例通信系统的一个示意图。该通信系统包括一个或多个接入网设备100(图1中仅示出一个)和一个或多个终端设备(图1示出的两个终端设备,分别为终端设备101和终端设备102)。该与接入网设备100分别与该一个或多个终端设备连接。
接入网设备100为具有无线收发功能的设备,用于与终端设备101进行通信。该接入网设备100包括但不限于基站,而基站包括各种形式的宏基站、微基站、中继站、接入网点。示例性的,本申请实施例中基站可以是新空口(new radio,NR)中的基站、发送接收点(transmission reception point,TRP)、传输点(transmission point,TP)、小站、下一代节点B(next generation Node B,ngNB)、wifi系统中的接入节点、无线中继节点、或者无线回传节点,也可以是长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统中的演进型节点B(evolutional Node B,eNB或eNodeB)、或者云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network,CRAN)场景下的无线控制器。接入网设备100还可以是可穿戴设备、车载设备等。
终端设备可以称为用户设备(user equipment,UE)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、 移动站(Mobile Station,MS)、移动台、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户装置等。终端设备可以是蜂窝电话(cellular phone)、智能电话(smart phone)、无线数据卡、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,简称:PDA)电脑、平板型电脑、无线调制解调器(modem)、膝上型电脑(laptop computer)、机器类型通信(machine type communication,MTC)、各种具有无线通信功能的手持设备(handset)、计算机设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备、计算设备、连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备,或者,5G通信系统中的终端设备,或者,NR系统中的终端设备,或者,5G网络之后的通信系统中的终端设备。例如,未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中的终端设备等。
为了提高接入网设备与终端设备之间的通信性能,终端设备可以向接入网设备上报信道信息,该信道信息用于表征该终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件。这样,接入网设备可以根据该信道信息生成匹配该信道条件的发送波束,从而提高该接入网设备与终端设备之间的通信性能。
因此,本申请实施例中,接入网设备生成匹配该信道条件的发送波束可以从波束管理演进到波束计算。本申请实施例中,通过参考信号的幅度信息(例如,参考信号的信号质量)和参考信号的相位信息反映该信道条件为例进行介绍。在实际应用中,还可以通过其他参数表征该信道条件。例如,还可以包括以下参数中的一项或多项:时延扩展(delay spread),多普勒扩展(doppler spread),多普勒频移(doppler shift),平均时延(average delay),平均增益,空间接收参数(spatial Rx parameters)。其中,空间接收参数包括以下的一项或多项:到达角(angle of arrival,AOA)、平均AOA、AOA扩展、离开角(angle of departure,AOD)、平均离开角AOD、AOD扩展、接收天线空间相关性参数、发送天线空间相关性参数。
下面示出本申请实施例中提供的两种可能的实现方式。
一、在波束管理流程中,终端设备向该接入网设备上报N个参考信号的幅度信息时,也向接入网设备上报该终端设备测量N个参考信号得到的第一相位信息;然后,接入网设备根据该第一相位信息和该N个参考信号的幅度信息生成第一发送波束。具体请参阅图2A所示的实施例的相关介绍。
二、本申请实施例新增波束合成流程,该波束合成流程可以在波束管理流程之后执行。终端设备在波束合成流程中测量接入网设备通过接入网设备的R个端口发送的第二参考信号资源的第二相位信息,并向接入网设备上报该第二相位信息;然后,接入网设备根据该第二相位信息和参考信号的幅度信息生成第二发送波束,其中,该参考信号的幅度信息可以为该R个端口的第二参考信号资源的参考信号的幅度信息,或者是,在波束管理过程中,终端设备测量并上报的N个参考信号的幅度信息。具体请参阅图3A所示的实施例的相关介绍。
本申请实施例中,参考信号的信号质量包括多种类型。例如,RSRP、RSRQ)和信干噪比(signal to interference and noise ratio,SINR)。即参考信号的信号质量可以通过该RSRP、RSRQ和SINR中的至少一项参数表征。在后文的实施例中,通过参考信号的RSRP表征参考信号的信号质量为例进行说明,对于其他参数同样适用。
下面结合实施例介绍本申请实施例的通信处理方法。
请参阅图2A,图2A为本申请实施例通信处理方法的一个实施例示意图。在图2A中,该方法包括:
201、接入网设备向终端设备发送M个参考信号资源。相应的,终端设备接收接入网设备发送的M个参考信号资源。
步骤201具体为:接入网设备按照M个参考信号资源的配置向终端设备分别发送的M个参考信号,相应的,终端设备按照该M个参考信号资源的配置接收该接入网设备分别发送的M个参考信号。
可以理解的是,本申请实施例中,下面描述方式1和描述方式2是等效的。
描述方式1:接入网设备向终端设备发送M个参考信号资源。
描述方式2:接入网设备按照该M个参考信号资源的配置向终端设备分别发送该M个参考信号。
同理,以下描述方式3和描述方式4是等效的。
描述方式3:终端设备接收接入网设备发送的M个参考信号资源等效于。
描述方式4:终端设备按照该M个参考信号资源的配置接收该接入网设备分别发送的M个参考信号。
本实施例中,该M个参考信号资源中的每个参考信号资源对应一个发送波束,且不同的参考信号资源对应的发送波束相同或不同。需要说明的是,该M个参考信号资源分别对应的发送波束中应当包括至少两个不同的发送波束。
可选的,该M个参考信号资源与M个发送波束一一对应,即每个参考信号资源都有对应发送波束,且不同参考信号资源对应不同的发送波束。
该M个发送波束为该接入网设备生成的分别与该M个参考信号资源对应的发送波束,该M个发送波束为固定权值的发送波束。其中,固定权值的发送波束也称为固定(fixed,或者static)模拟发送波束,或固定图样(pattern)模拟发送波束,或固定码本(codebook)模拟发送波束,或者基础基础(basic)模拟发送波束。码本也可以称为权(weight vector或者weight matrix),因此后文称该M个发送波束为固定权值的发送波束。
其中,固定图样(pattern)是指设备所能产生的模拟发送波束的数目、每个模拟发送波束的主瓣的指向、波束宽度、波束增益等特征参数是固定的,该特征参数并不随着时间的变化而变化。
具体的,接入网设备通过M个参考信号资源并通过M个发送波束分别发送M个参考信号,该M个参考信号资源与该M个参考信号之间一一对应,该M个参考信号资源与M个发送波束一一对应。然后,终端设备通过该M个参考信号资源分别接收该M个参考信号。
可选的,该M个参考信号为M个CSI-RS,该M个参考信号资源为CSI-RS资源。
本实施例中,一种可能的实现方式中,该M个参考信号资源用于波束管理。
根据通信标准TS 38.214规定,单端口(port)或两端口的单符号(symbol)并且频域密度(density)为1或3的CSI-RS资源才能用于波束管理。下面以单端口的单符号且频域密度为3的CSI-RS资源为例介绍接入网设备发送该CSI-RS资源对应的CSI-RS的过程。
例如,如图2B所示,横坐标为正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing,OFDM)符号,纵坐标为频率,以资源单元(resource element,RE)为粒度。如图2B中,一个时隙(slot)中的一个资源块(resource block,RB)包括的三个RE被一个CSI-RS资源占据,即可以理解为该CSI-RS资源在RB中的位置为图2B所示的阴影部分(该RB中的三个RE)的位置,而该CSI-RS资源占用RB的个数具体由接入网设备配置。并且,每个CSI-RS资源都有对应的发送波束,不同的CSI-RS资源对应的发送波束不同。
若接入网设备生成16个发送波束,该16个发送波束为固定权值的发送波束,那么接入网设备可以通过16个slot并通过16个发送波束分别发送16个CSI-RS。16个CSI-RS资源分别位于16个slot上,16个CSI-RS资源与16个发送波束一一对应,16个CSI-RS与16个CSI-RS资源一一对应,从而实现终端设备对该16个CSI-RS的测量。
例如,如图2C所述,横坐标为OFDM符号,纵坐标为频率,以RE为粒度。如图2C所示,一个slot中可以发送四个CSI-RS资源。每个CSI-RS资源占据一个slot中的一个RB包括的三个RE,具体如图2C所示,不同类型的阴影部分表示不同的CSI-RS资源分别占用不同RB的三个RE的位置,而每个CSI-RS资源占用RB的个数具体由接入网设备配置。并且,每个CSI-RS资源都有对应的发送波束,不同的CSI-RS资源对应的发送波束不同。
若接入网设备生成16个发送波束,该16个发送波束为固定权值的发送波束。那么,接入网设备可以分别通过4个slot发送16个CSI-RS。16个CSI-RS资源对应位于4个slot上,,16个CSI-RS资源与16个发送波束一一对应,16个CSI-RS与16个CSI-RS资源一一对应,从而实现终端设备对该16个CSI-RS的测量。
本实施例中,接入网设备可以周期性的,或半持续的,或非周期性的发送该16个CSI-RS。例如,每隔一个周期(例如,20ms),接入网设备按照该16个CSI-RS的资源配置发送一遍该16个CSI-RS。
202、终端设备测量M个参考信号资源,得到第一测量信息。
该第一测量信息包括第一相位信息。该第一相位信息为该终端设备分别测量N个参考信号得到的相位信息。该M个参考信号资源包括该N个参考信号资源,N和M均为大于或等于1的整数,M大于或等于N。
步骤202具体为:终端设备测量该M个参考信号资源对应的M个参考信号,得到该第一测量信息。即可以理解的是,终端设备测量M个参考资源,得到第一测量信息等效于终端设备测量该M个参考信号资源对应的M个参考信号,得到该第一测量信息。
一种可能的实现方式中,该终端设备测量该M个参考信号资源对应的M个参考信号,得到该M个参考信号的RSRP;然后,该终端设备从该M个参考信号选择该N个参考信号。终端设备测量该N个参考信号,得到该N个参考信号的第一相位信息。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该终端设备测量该M个参考信号资源对应的M个参考信号,得到该M个参考信号的RSRP和该M个参考信号的相位信息;然后,该终端设备从该M个参考信号的RSRP和该M个参考信号的相位信息选择N个参考信号的RSRP和该N个参考信号的第一相位信息。
由上述两种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备可以得到该第一测量信息,该第一测量信息包括该N个参考信号的RSRP、该N个参考信号的CRI以及该第一相位信息。
本实施例中,为了接入网设备能够生成匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的第一发送波束且该第一发送波束所对应的信道容量最大化,终端设备从M个参考信号中选择N个参考信号时,应当使得选择得到的N个参考信号对应的N个发送波束构成的信道容量最大或者该N个发送波束构成的信道的秩(rank)最高。
具体的,接入网设备在M个参考信号资源通过M个发送波束分别发送M个参考信号,该M个参考信号资源分别与接入网设备生成的M个发送波束一一对应,且该M个发送波束是固定权值的发送波束。由于M个参考信号的RSRP可以反映M个发送波束的波束质量,终端设备可以按照RSRP的大小顺序从大到小从该M个参考信号中选择N个参考信号,从而使得该N个参考信号对应的N个发送波束构成的信道容量最大化。
需要说明的是,接入网设备可以配置终端设备上报N个参考信号对应的RSRP和第一相位信息,也可以是通信协议规定终端设备上报N个参考信号对应的RSRP和第一相位信息,具体本申请不做限定。
本实施例中,第一相位信息包括的内容形式为参考信号的相位,或者不同参考信号之间的相位差。
一、针对第一相位信息包括参考信号的相位的方式,则第一相位信息包括该N个参考信号资源对应的N个参考信号的相位。
终端设备测量该N个参考信号的相位;然后,终端设备通过指示信息向接入网设备上报该N个参考信号的相位,或者,终端设备直接向该接入网设备上报该N个参考信号的相位。
由于后续步骤204中接入网设备生成第一发送波束所需的参数包括N个参考信号之间的相位差,因此接入网设备根据该N个参考信号的相位计算得到该N个参考信号之间的相位差。
如图2D所示,该N个参考信号包括第一参考信号和第二参考信号。图2D示出了随着频率的变化,第一参考信号的相位和第二参考信号的相位的变化情况。由此可知,参考信号的相位与发送该参考信号所使用的频率相关。因此,若终端设备要正确反映该N个参考信号的相位信息,则针对该N个参考信号资源的不同频率,终端设备需要反馈在不同频率上该N个参考信号分别对应的相位。可选的,终端设备可以通过反馈该N个参考信号的初始频率和该N个参考信号在初始频率上分别对应的初始相位,以及随着频率变化该N个参考信号分别对应的相位变化(也即参考信号的相位与频率之间的线性关系所对应的斜率),以反馈在不同频率上该N个参考信号分别对应的相位。
二、针对第一相位信息包括不同参考信号之间的相位差的方式,那么第一相位信息具体包括以下任一种:
1、该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差。
具体的,该第一相位信息包括该N个参考信号资源对应的N个参考信号分别对应的相位之间的相位差。在该实现方式中,该第一相位信息具体包括N*(N-1)个相位差。
例如,N个参考信号资源包括参考信号资源1、参考信号资源2和参考信号资源3,该参 考信号资源1对应相位1,该参考信号资源2对应相位2,参考信号资源3对应相位3。那么可知,第一相位信息包括相位1与相位2之间的相位差,相位2与相位3之间的相位差,以及相位1与相位3之间的相位差。
2、该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位与第一基准相位之间的相位差。
具体的,该第一相位信息包括该N个参考信号资源对应的N个参考信号分别对应的相位与第一基准相位之间的相位差。在该实现方式中,该第一相位信息具体包括N-1个相位差。
本实施例中,终端设备是在波束管理流程中测量得到的第一相位信息(具体为该终端设备测量该N个参考信号中除该第一基准相位对应参考信号之外的其他参考信号,得到该其他参考信号的相位与第一基准相位的相位差),因此上述第一测量信息包括第一相位信息之外,该第一测量信息还包括该N个参考信号资源对应的N个CRI、该N个参考信号资源的RSRP(即该N个参考信号资源对应的N个参考信号的RSRP)。
可选的,该第一基准相位包括以下任一种可能的形式:
1、该第一基准相位为该N个参考信号资源中RSRP最大的参考信号资源对应的相位。
具体的,该第一基准相位为该N个参考信号资源对应的N个参考信号中RSRP最大的参考信号的相位。
由于在波束管理流程中,终端设备上报RSRP时,是以上报的RSRP中最大的RSRP为基准RSRP。因此,终端设备可以以该RSRP最大的参考信号的相位为第一基准相位,以适应波束管理流程中RSRP上报机制。
2、该第一基准相位为该N个参考信号资源中RSRP最小的参考信号资源对应的相位。
具体的,该第一基准相位为该N个参考信号资源对应的N个参考信号中RSRP最小的参考信号的相位。
3、该第一基准相位为该N个参考信号资源中RSRP大于或等于第一预设阈值的参考信号资源。
具体的,该第一基准相位为该N个参考信号资源对应的N个参考信号中RSRP大于或等于第一预设阈值的参考信号的相位。
可选的,第一预设阈值的取值为-140dBm(分贝毫瓦)、-116dBm、或、-108dBm等。
第一预设阈值的取值设定因素包括:终端设备的接收机灵敏度、支持最低调制编码方式所需的信号强度、支持最低传输速率所需的信号强度、终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道状态,当前的网络传输条件等。
4、该第一基准相位为该N个参考信号资源中接入网设备最先发送的参考信号资源。
具体的,该第一基准相位为该N个参考信号资源对应的N个参考信号中该接入网设备最先发送的参考信号。
如图2C所示,若N个参考信号资源中包括四个CSI-RS资源,四个CSI-RS资源分别对应图2C的四种类型的阴影部分的时频资源。接入网设备将在图2C上的阴影部分的时频资源分别发送四个CSI-RS。如图2C所示,接入网设备最先发送的是承载于第11个OFDM符号上的CSI-RS,那么接入网设备以该CSI-RS的相位为第一基准相位。
5、该第一基准相位为该N个参考信号资源中接入网设备最后发送的参考信号资源。
具体的,该第一基准相位为该N个参考信号资源对应的N个参考信号中该接入网设备最后发送的参考信号。
如图2C所示,若N个参考信号资源中包括四个CSI-RS资源,四个CSI-RS资源分别对应图2C的四种类型的阴影部分的时频资源。接入网设备将在图2C上的阴影部分的时频资源分别发送四个CSI-RS。如图2C所示,接入网设备最后发送的是承载于第14个OFDM符号上的CSI-RS,那么接入网设备以该CSI-RS的相位为第一基准相位。
6、该第一基准相位为该N个参考信号资源中参考信号资源标识最大的参考信号资源。
7、该第一基准相位为该N个参考信号资源中参考信号资源标识最小的参考信号资源。
其中,参考信号资源标识为CSI-RS resource ID。
上述示出了第一基准相位的一些可能的实现方式,在实际应用中,还可以有其他实现方式,具体本申请对第一基准相位的选取不做限定。
针对第一相位信息包括的是参考信号之间的相位差的方式,终端设备无需上报每个参考信号对应的相位,从而节省信令开销。其次,如图2D所示,在不同的频率下,第一参考信号与第二参考信号之间的相位差的差异较小,即第一参考信号与第二参考信号之间的相位差在不同频率下较为平稳,终端设备无需上报两个参考信号在不同的频率下的相位差,进一步地减少信令开销。
本实施例中,该N个参考信号资源是由该终端设备通过同一接收波束接收的。
具体的,该终端设备通过同一接收波束接收该接入网设备发送的该N个参考信号资源对应的N个参考信号。
由于在步骤204中,接入网设备基于终端设备使用同一接收波束测量得到该N个参考信号资源对应的N个参考信号的幅度信息(即该N个参考信号的RSRP)和该N个参考信号的第一相位信息计算生成的第一发送波束。因此,在终端设备侧应当对终端设备的接收波束进行限定,以便于接入网设备生成匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的第一发送波束,从而提高终端设备与接入网设备之间进行通信的通信性能。
上述步骤202中示出了终端设备测量M个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP和N个参考信号资源对应的第一相位信息的过程。在实际应用中,终端设备测量M个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP的过程与终端设备测量N个参考信号资源对应的第一相位信息的过程可以是独立的两个测量过程。并且,该终端设备测量M个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP和N个参考信号资源对应的第一相位信息的测量顺序不做限定。
203、终端设备向接入网设备发送第一消息。
其中,该第一消息携带第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示该第一相位信息。
本实施例中,终端设备是在波束管理流程中测量该第一相位信息并上报该第一相位信息。因此,该第一消息还携带第十二指示信息和第十三指示信息,该第十二指示信息用于指示该N个参考信号资源分别对应的CRI。该第十三指示信息用于指示该N个参考信号资源的RSRP。
由于已有波束管理流程中终端设备上报的N个CRI对应的RSRP的方式为:终端设备使用七比特的绝对值量化方法上报该N个CRI对应的RSRP中最大的RSRP,该N个CRI对应的RSRP中 除最大的RSRP之外,都使用四比特的相对差量化方法进行上报。因此,为了匹配已有波束管理流程终端设备上报RSRP的方式,下面以该第一相位信息包括该N个参考信号资源对应的N个参考信号的相位与第一基准相位之间的相位差,且将该N个参考信号资源对应的N个参考信号中RSRP最大的参考信号作为基准相位为例介绍该第一消息携带的内容。
首先,先示出第一消息用于指示不同上报量分别所占用的比特位宽。上报量包括CRI、RSRP最大的参考信号的RSRP、RSRP差(Differential RSRP)、相位差(Differential Phase)。具体请参阅表1。
表1
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000001
其中,
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000002
指对x向上取整,log 2(s)指以2为底对s求对数,
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000003
指CSI-RS资源集合中的CSI-RS资源数目。本实施例中,该CSI-RS资源集合包括即上述步骤201中的M个参考信号资源。
在本实施例中,在已有的表格中新增上报量Differential Phase得到该表1。该Differential Phase使用四个比特上报给接入网设备。即每个相位差占用第一消息中的四个比特。
需要说明的是,上述表1仅仅是示例,本实施例对该Differential Phase占用的比特位宽不做限定。例如,Differential Phase可以占用八个比特位宽。
下面示出第一消息中各个上报量上报的字段顺序,请参阅表2:
表2
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000004
本实施例中,在已有的表格中新增该Differential Phase #2-#1、Differential Phase #3-#1和Differential Phase #4-#1这三行得到该表2。其中,Differential Phase #2-#1表示CRI#1与CRI#2分别对应的CRS-RS之间的相位差。Differential Phase #3-#1表示CRI#3与CRI#1分别对应的CRS-RS之间的相位差。Differential Phase #4-#1表示CRI#4与CRI#1分别对应的CRS-RS之间的相位差。
例如,结合上述表1,即上述Differential Phase #2-#1、Differential Phase #3-#1和Differential Phase #4-#1分别是占用四个比特。由于每个相位差的状态可以使用4个比特进行表示,因此相位差的状态共16种。由于量化范围为2*pi,因此量化精度为pi/8,下面结合表3,示出不同取值范围的相位差所对应的上报值。
表3
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000006
由表3可知,落入不同取值范围的相位差都有对应的值。例如,CRI#1对应的参考信号的相位为6/8*pi,而CRI#2对应的参考信号的相位为7/8*pi,那么该Differential Phase#2-#1落入1/8*pi≥ΔPhase>0,而1/8*pi≥ΔPhase>0对应的值为DIFFRSRP_7,那么使用四个比特表示DIFFRSRP_7,则为“0111”。对于Differential Phase #3-#1和Differential Phase #4-#1类似,具体此处不再一一说明。
上述表1和表2是一种示例,并不属于对本申请实施例的一种限定。对于表3,也可以采用其他量化精度,或者根据终端设备能够支持的其他量化精度来表示该相位差。例如,采用终端设备支持的量化精度1/4*pi,由于量化范围为2*pi,则可知相位差的状态一共有8种。下面结合表4,示出不同取值范围的相位差所对应的值:
表4
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000007
由表3和表4可知,相位差的状态表示的总数由量化范围的大小和量化精度确定的。并且,前述表1中每个相位差占用的比特位宽与相位差的状态的总数相关。例如,表3中的相位差的状态表示一共有16种,因此每个相位差占用的比特位宽至少为4比特。
上述表1和表2仅仅是为了介绍第一消息携带的第一指示信息的具体形式。在实际应用中,终端设备上报第一指示信息也可以通过其他形式上报,并不依赖波束管理流程中RSRP的上报方式,只要接入网设备与终端设备双方预先约定好上报方式,接入网设备能够正确解析终端设备的上报信息即可。
本实施例示出了终端设备通过指示信息上报该第一相位信息和N个参考信号资源对应 的N个参考信号的幅度信息(例如,N个参考信号的RSRP)的方式,避免了信令开销过大的问题,从而减少资源开销。在实际应用中,该终端设备也可以直接向接入网设备上报该第一相位信息和N个参考信号资源对应的N个参考信号的幅度信息,具体本申请不做限定。
上述步骤203示出了终端设备通过同一消息(第一消息)向接入网设备上报第一指示信息、第十二指示信息和第十三指示信息的方式。在实际应用中,该第一指示信息、第十二指示信息和第十三指示信息可以分别通过不同的消息发送给接入网设备,或者,也可以是第十二指示信息和第十三指示信息通过一个消息发送给接入网设备,而第一指示信息通过另一个消息发送给接入网设备,具体本申请不做限定。后文以终端设备通过同一消息(第一消息)向接入网设备上报第一指示信息、第十二指示信息和第十三指示信息的方式为例介绍本申请实施例的技术方案。
204、接入网设备根据第一指示信息指示的第一相位信息生成第一发送波束。
其中,该第一发送波束用于该接入网设备与该终端设备之间进行通信。
具体的,第一消息还携带第十二指示信息和第十三指示信息,该第十二指示信息用于指示N个参考信号资源对应的N个CRI,该第十三指示信息用于指示该N个CRI对应的N个参考信号的RSRP。接入网设备根据该第十二指示信息和该第十三指示信息确定该N个参考信号的RSRP,该接入网设备根据该第一指示信息确定该N个参考信号的第一相位信息。然后,接入网设备根据该N个参考信号的第一相位信息和该N个参考信号的RSRP生成第一发送波束。
本实施例中,在上述步骤201之前,接入网设备确定第一权值集合。
其中,该第一权值集合包括该M个参考信号资源对应的M个发送波束分别对应的权值。具体表示为
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000008
其中,M个发送波束中的第b i个发送波束的权值表示为
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000009
i为大于或等于0且小于或等于M-1的整数。
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000010
是一个维度为N t-ans×1的向量,N t-ans为接入网设备中用于发送第b i个发送波束对应的参考信号的天线阵子数目。
本实施例中,接入网设备用于发送该M个发送波束中每个发送波束对应的参考信号的天线阵子数目相同或不同,终端设备用于接收该M个发送波束中每个发送波束对应的参考信号的射频通道数目相同或不同。
为了描述方便,在后文步骤204a至步骤204b中,以接入网设备中用于发送该M个发送波束中每个发送波束对应的参考信号的天线阵子数目都为N t-ans为例进行介绍,以终端设备中用于接收该M个发送波束中每个发送波束对应的参考信号的射频通道数目都为N r为例进行介绍。
由于测量和计算的复杂度,接入网设备配置终端设备上报N个参考信号资源对应的N个参考信号的幅度信息(即N个参考信号分别对应的RSRP)和N个参考信号对应的第一相位信息。在高频通信中,由于高频信道具有稀疏性,也就是说绝大部分能量分布在少数的几个 发送波束的覆盖范围。示例性的,M个发送波束中对应RSRP强度最大的N个发送波束为该终端设备测量上报的该N个参考信号的第一相位信息对应的N个发送波束。
因此,将上述W替换成第二权值集合W N,W N是该N个发送波束的权值的集合。W N是W一个子集。例如,第二权值集合
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000011
为了描述方便,后文以W N包括该M个发送波束中的前N个发送波束的权值为例进行说明。在实际应用中,W N包括的是该终端设备测量并上报的N个RSRP对应的N个发送波束的权值,具体该N个发送波束可以为M个发送波束对应的M个参考信号中RSRP排在前N的N个RSRP分别对应的N个发送波束。
本实施例中,为了生成与终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件匹配的第一发送波束,扩展了终端设备上报的内容(在已有波束管理流程中终端设备上报N个参考信号的RSRP基础上,新增上报N个参考信号的第一相位信息),通过该N个参考信号的RSRP和该第一相位信息体征该终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件。
下面以终端设备上报N个参考信号的第一相位信息和该N个参考信号的幅度信息为例介绍步骤204。步骤204具体包括步骤204a和步骤204b。该N个参考信号的幅度信息也称为N个发送波束的幅度信息(即N个参考信号的RSRP,后文步骤204a和步骤204b中统称该N个参考信号的幅度信息)。
步骤204a:接入网设备根据该第一相位信息和该N个参考信号的幅度信息确定第一合成权α opt1
其中,该N个参考信号的幅度信息包括该N个参考信号的RSRP。该第一合成权α opt1用于接入网设备生成匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的第一发送波束。
下面介绍接入网设备计算第一合成权α opt1的过程:
1、接入网设备确定该N个发送波束中的每个发送波束的信道。
为了计算第一合成权α opt1,接入网设备需要获得该N个发送波束中的每个发送波束的信道。以固定权值为w b0的发送波束为例,终端设备测量得到:针对子载波k来说,该固定权值为w b0的第b 0个发送波束的信道为
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000012
其中,
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000013
为子载波k上信道H k的转置。H k是一个N t-ans×N r的矩阵。
因此,在子载波k上,该N个发送波束的信道表示为
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000014
为了使得该N个发送波束构成的信道容量最大化,接入网设备计算满足该信道容量最大 化要求的第一合成权α opt1。因此,具体可以将问题定位为解如下式(1)的最优化问题:
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000015
argmax为极大值自变量(arguments of the maxima)的操作符,k为子载波的编号。上述式(1)描述的最优化问题指:在所有的α找到第一合成权α opt1,使得上述式(1)中的
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000016
的值最大。
需要说明的是,基于不同的准则,需要求解答的优化问题可能不同。上述示出的最优化问题是基于信道容量最大化的基则确定的最优化问题。
可选的,式(1)的最优化问题的解受限于α恒模(subject to(s.t.)||α|| 2=1)。
那么可知将问题定位为解下述式(1)和式(2)的最优化问题:
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000017
s.t.||α|| 2=1     (2)
式(2)为一种高频器件的恒模限制的数学表达式。
那么,解上述式(1)和式(2),得到上述最优化问题的一个近似解如下:
α opt1=v 1     (3)
其中,v 1为信道协方差矩阵R最大特征值对应的右奇异向量或特征向量。信道协方差矩阵R为:
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000018
其中,(·) *是为复数共轭操作符,(·)′是为共轭转置操作符,k为子载波的编号,k的取值与参考信号的传输带宽相关。那么可知,对于子载波k来说,信道协方差矩阵R k如下:
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000019
其中,式(5)的信道协方差矩阵的主对角线的元素(这里将主对角线的元素称为对角线元素)为同一发送波束的幅度的平方,而式(5)中的信道协议方差矩阵中除上述对角线元素之外的其他元素(这里称为非对角线元素)为不同发送波束的幅度的相关。
例如,式(5)中信道协方差矩阵的第一行第一列的元素(即对角线元素)对应的第一个发送波束w b0,终端设备测量得到该第一个发送波束,得到该第一个发送波束的信道
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000020
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000021
是一个由复数构成的向量,该第一个发送波束对应的参考信号的幅度表示为
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000022
该第一个发送波束对应的参考信号的相位表示为
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000023
第一行第一列的元素(即对角线元素)实际上是第一个发送波束对应的参考信号的幅度的平方,即该第一个发送波束对应的参考信号的接收能量。具体表示为:
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000024
而非对角线元素则可以通过不同发送波束的幅度和相位计算得到。以式(5)中的第一行第二列的元素为例,
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000025
是对发送波束w b0和发送波束w b1的相关。为了描述方便,将N r设为1,则
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000026
可以表示为:
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000027
其中,
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000028
可以理解为终端设备分别测量得到的发送波束w b0和发送波束w b1分别对应的参考信号之间的相位差。
因此,接入网设备根据第一相位信息得到该N个发送波束对应的N个参考信号之间的相位差;然后,接入网设备根据该N个参考信号之间的相位差确定该N个参考信号的相位,并根据该N个参考信号的相位和该N个参考信号的RSRP(也称为该N个发送波束的幅度信息)生成第一合成权α opt1
需要说明的是,上述式(4)和式(5)是以该N个发送波束对应的N个参考信号的传输带宽范围相同为例进行介绍接入网设备计算第一合成权α opt1的过程。在实际应用中,该N个参考信号的传输带宽范围也可以不同。对于N个参考信号的传输带宽范围不同的情况,下面以发送波束w b0对应的参考信号和发送波束w b1对应的参考信号之间的相位差的确定过程为例介绍N个发送波束分别对应的N个参考信号之间的相位差的确定过程。对于其他参考信 号之间的相位差的获取同样适用。
若选定发送波束w b0为基准,对于发送波束w b0的信道表示为
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000029
对于发送波束w b1的信道表示为
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000030
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000031
其中,
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000032
为发送波束w b0对应的参考信号的传输带宽范围,
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000033
为发送波束w b1对应的参考信号的传输带宽范围。
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000034
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000035
之间有重叠部分,由图2D可知,随着频率的变化,不同频率下两个参考信号之间的相位差的差异较小。因此,采用使用重叠部分范围内的子载波的参考信号的相位差以及幅度构成上述信道协方差矩阵。
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000036
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000037
之间没有重叠,则对
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000038
范围内的发送波束w b1对应的参考信号的相位进行调整,得到
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000039
范围内的发送波束w b1对应的参考信号的相位,再计算该发送波束w b1对应的参考信号与发送波束w b0对应的参考信号之间的相位差。具体的调整方式为:接入网设备根据发送波束w b1对应的参考信号的相位和频率之间的线性关系进行调整。例如,子载波1的发送波束w b1对应的参考信号的相位等于子载波2的发送波束w b1对应的参考信号的相位加上斜率*(子载波1的频率-子载波2的频率),斜率为发送波束w b1对应的参考信号相位与频率之间的线性关系所对应的斜率。
这样,接入网设备可以获得在同一带宽范围内N个发送波束对应的参考信号的相位差,再构成类似上述式(4)的信道协方差矩阵,从而实现对第一合成权α opt1的确定。
上述式(4)和式(5)是以子载波的粒度介绍接入网设备计算得到第一合成权α opt1的过程。在实际应用中,还可以以其他带宽作为粒度计算该第一合成权α opt1。例如,RE粒度、RB粒度、资源块组(resource block group,RBG)粒度、或全带粒度等。
步骤204b:接入网设备根据该第一合成权α opt1和第二权值集合W N生成该第一发送波束W opt,即W opt=W Nopt1
其中,该第一发送波束匹配该终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件,且第一发送波束对应的信道容量最大化。
由此可知,第一发送波束的主瓣方向对准该终端设备,那么接入网设备与该终端设备通过第一发送波束进行通信传输,第一发送波束的波束增益能够大大得到提升,从而提高 终端设备与接入网设备之间的通信性能。其次,相比于接入网设备从M个发送波束中选择一个发送波束与终端设备进行通信传输的方式来说,第一发送波束对应的信道容量最大化,提升了第一发送波束对应的信道的容量。该M个发送波束为该接入网设备生成的与M个参考信号资源对应的M个发送波束,该M个发送波束为固定权值的发送波束。
可选的,第一发送波束不属于发送波束集合,该发送波束集合包括M个发送波束,该M个发送波束分别对应的权值由前述第一权值集合表示,该M个发送波束为固定权值的发送波束。
205、接入网设备通过该第一发送波束与该终端设备通信。
具体的,步骤205包括以下至少一项操作:
1、接入网设备通过第一发送波束向该终端设备发送第一参考信号资源对应的参考信号;然后,终端设备测量第一参考信号资源对应的参考信号,从而得到该第一发送波束对应的信道信息。
本实施例中,接入网设备在发送第一参考信号资源对应的参考信号之前,该接入网设备向终端设备发送第九指示信息。
该第九指示信息用于指示该终端设备通过第一接收波束接收该第一参考信号资源,该第一接收波束为该终端设备接收该N个参考信号资源所对应的N个参考信号所采用的接收波束。
具体的,该接入网设备通过第一RRC信令中的准共址信息周期性信道状态信息参考信号(qcl-InfoPeriodicCSI-RS)字段配置该第一参考信号资源的TCI状态。具体的配置过程为接入网设备将该第一参考信号资源的TCI中的referencesignal值配置为该N个参考信号资源中的任一个参考信号资源的ID。然后,接入网设备向该终端设备发送该第一RRC信令。这样,终端设备根据该第一RRC信令确定通过该第一接收波束接收该第一参考信号资源对应的参考信号。
2、接入网设备通过该第一发送波束向该终端设备发送第十指示信息。该第十指示信息用于指示对终端设备通过第一接收波束进行上行传输、下行传输和控制信道传输。
该第十指示信息包括前述表2中的任一CRI所对应的CRS-RS resource ID,或者,包括该第一参考信号资源对应的CRS-RS resource ID。
具体的,该接入网设备通过第二RRC信令中的TCIstate或者空间关系信息(spatialRelationInfo)来配置该终端设备的用于上行传输资源、下行传输资源和控制信道传输资源的波束。
具体的配置过程为接入网设备将该终端设备的用于上行传输资源、下行传输资源和/或控制信道传输资源的TCIstate或者spatialRelationInfo中的参考信号(referencesignal)值配置为该N个参考信号资源中的任一个参考信号资源的ID;或者,接入网设备为将该终端设备的用于上行传输资源、下行传输资源和/或控制信道传输资源的TCIstate或者spatialRelationInfo中的referencesignal值配置为第一参考信号资源对应的CRS-RS resource ID;然后,接入网设备向该终端设备发送第二RRC信令。这样,终端设备根据该第二RRC信令确定通过该第一接收波束进行上行传输、下行传输和/或控制信道传 输。
3、接入网设备通过该第一发送波束与终端设备进行下行传输,以及通过第一发送波束与终端设备进行上行传输。
在下行传输过程中,终端设备对该第一发送波束进行时频偏跟踪。具体终端设备可以通过测量第一参考信号资源得到时频偏;或者,终端设备测量接入网设备发送的与第一参考信号资源的跟踪参考信号得到该时频偏;或者,终端设备测量用于合成该第一发送波束的N个参考信号资源得到该时频偏。
在上行传输过程中,终端设备对第一发送波束进行路径损耗测量。具体终端设备可以测量该第一参考信号资源得到路径损耗;或者,终端设备可以测量接入网设备发送的与第一参考信号资源关联的路损参考信号得到路径损耗;或者,终端设备测量该N个参考信号资源对应的参考信号得到路径损耗。
本申请实施例中,终端设备测量该N个参考信号资源,得到该N个参考信号资源的幅度信息和第一相位信息,并向接入网设备上报该N个参考信号资源的幅度信息和第一相位信息。在终端设备的移动过程中,接入网设备与终端设备之间的信道条件是不停变化的,而N个参考信号资源分别对应接入网设备的N个发送波束。因此,N个参考信号资源的幅度信息和第一相位信息可以体征该接入网设备与终端设备的信道变化情况,这样接入网设备可以N个参考信号资源的幅度信息和第一相位信息生成匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的第一发送波束,或者,从该接入网设备的N个发送波束中选择匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的第一发送波束,以提升接入网设备与终端设备之间的通信性能。
为了接入网设备为终端设备配置合适的资源配置和上报方式,以便于接入网设备正确解析终端设备的上报量。可选的,上述图2A所示的实施例还包括步骤206和步骤207,且步骤206和步骤207在步骤201之前执行。
206、终端设备向接入网设备发送该终端设备的第一能力信息。
第一能力信息携带第二指示信息,该第二指示信息的指示形式包括以下任一种:
1、第二指示信息用于指示该终端设备是否支持动态发送波束所需的测量和上报;
2、第二指示信息用于指示该终端设备是否具备对第一相位信息进行测量的测量能力;
3、第二指示信息用于指示该终端设备是否支持用于波束管理的参考信号资源对应的相位信息的测量。
本实施例中,为了接入网设备能够确定终端设备是否具备测量参考信号的相位信息的测量能力,终端设备可以向接入网设备上报该终端设备的第一能力信息。这样接入网设备能够正确对终端设备进行资源配置和上报方式的配置,以避免出现接入网设备无法解析正确该终端设备的上报量。
需要说明的是,上述步骤206中示出了终端设备通过第一能力信息上报第二指示信息的方式,在实际应用中,该终端设备也可以单独向接入网设备发送该第二指示信息,或者,终端设备也可以通过其他信息或消息携带该第二指示信息并上报给接入网设备,具体本申请不做限定。
可选的,终端设备在终端设备接入网络时或者在网络请求时执行上述步骤206。
具体的,在波束管理流程中,终端设备向接入网设备上报该第一能力信息,该第一能力信息承载在RRC消息中,那么终端设备通过在该RRC消息新增信元并通过该新增信元指示该终端设备对参考信号的相位信息的测量能力。
下面示出第一能力信息携带的第二指示信息的具体形式:
1、第二指示信息包括动态发送动态波束测量能力字段和第一取值字段。
该第一取值字段的取值用于指示该终端设备是否支持动态发送波束所需的测量和上报;或者,用于指示该终端设备是否具备对第一相位信息的测量,或者,用于指示该终端设备是否支持对用于波束管理的参考信号资源对应的相位信息的测量。后续以指示该终端设备支持对第一相位信息的测量为例进行举例说明。
示例1:该第一取值字段为true时,表示该终端设备支持对第一相位信息的测量;当该第一取值字段为false时,表示该终端设备不支持对该第一相位信息的测量。反之,该第一取值字段为true时,表示该终端设备不支持对该第一相位信息的测量;当该第一取值字段为false时,表示该终端设备支持对第一相位信息的测量。
基于示例1,下面采用标准中ASN.1伪代码形式表示该动态波束测量能力字段和第一取值字段。
DynamicBeam ENUMERATED{true,false}
示例2:当第一取值字段为0时,表示该终端设备支持对第一相位信息的测量;当该第一取值字段为1时,表示该终端设备不支持对该第一相位信息的测量。反之,当第一取值字段为0时,表示该终端设备不支持对该第一相位信息的测量;当该第一取值字段为1时,表示该终端设备支持对第一相位信息的测量。
基于示例2,下面采用标准中ASN.1伪代码形式表示该动态波束测量能力字段和第一取值字段。
DynamicBeam ENUMERATED{0,1}
可选的,还可以以下ACN.1伪代码形式表示该动态波束测量能力字段和第一取值字段。
可选的,还可以以下ACN.1伪代码形式表示该动态波束测量能力字段和第一取值字段。
DynamicBeam ENUMERATED{support}
其中,DynamicBeam为动态波束测量能力字段,ENUMERATED{support}为第一取值字段,support表示该终端设备支持动态波束测量能力。
2、第二指示信息包括相位差测量能力字段和第二取值字段。
该第二取值字段的取值用于指示该终端设备支持相位差的测量。
示例1:当第二取值字段为true时,表示该终端设备支持相位差的测量;当该第二取值字段为false时,表示该终端设备不支持相位差的测量。反之,该第二取值字段为true时,表示该终端设备不支持相位差的测量;当该第二取值字段为false时,表示该终端设备支持相位差的测量。
基于示例1,下面采用标准中ASN.1伪代码形式表示该相位差测量能力字段和第一取值字段。
DifferentialPhaseReport ENUMERATED{true,false}
示例2:当第二取值字段为0时,表示该终端设备支持相位差的测量;当第二取值字段为1时,表示该终端设备不支持相位差的测量。反之,当第二取值字段为0时,表示该终端设备不支持相位差的测量;当第二取值字段为1时,表示该终端设备支持相位差的测量。
基于示例2,下面采用标准中ACN.1伪代码形式表示该相位差测量能力字段和第一取值字段。
DifferentialPhaseReport ENUMERATED{0,1}
可选的,还可以以下ASN.1伪代码形式表示该相位差测量能力字段和第二取值字段。
DifferentialPhaseReport ENUMERATED{support}
其中,DifferentialPhaseReport为相位差测量能力字段,ENUMERATED{support}为第二取值字段,support表示该终端设备支持相位差的测量。
可选的,该第一能力信息还包括以下信息中的一个或多个:
1、该终端设备支持合并的用于波束管理的参考信号资源对应的发送波束的最大个数。
具体的,该终端设备通过该终端设备支持合并的发送波束的最大个数来表征该终端设备支持测量多少个发送波束所对应的参考信号的相位。
2、该终端设备对该第一相位信息进行量化的量化能力信息。
该量化能力信息用于表示该终端设备对参考信号的相位信息进行量化的能力。该量化能力信息包括该终端设备支持的量化精度。
接入网设备可以根据该终端设备的量化能力信息配置该终端设备对第一相位信息的上报方式。例如,第一相位信息包括N个参考信号资源对应的N个参考信号与第一基准相位之间的相位差,该第一基准相位为该N个参考信号中RSRP最大的参考信号的相位。终端设备支持pi/8的量化精度,由于相位的最大范围为2pi,因此接入网设备可以配置能支持16个状态(具体如表3所示的16种状态表示)的相位差上报,也就是接入网设备为每个相位差的上报配置4比特,具体如表1所示,Differential Phase占用4比特。
该量化能力信息包括相位差步长上报字段和支持的量化精度字段。下面采用标准中ASN.1伪代码形式表示相位差步长上报字段和支持的量化精度字段:
DifferentialPhaseReport-stepsize ENUMERATED{pi/8,pi/4,pi/2}
207、接入网设备向终端设备发送第一配置信息。
该第一配置信息用于配置该终端设备上报N个参考信号资源对应的第一相位信息。
该第一配置信息包括第一资源集合的第二配置信息,该第二配置信息用于配置该终端设备不期待接入网设备使用相同的发送空域滤波器(即发送波束)发送该第一资源集合中的所有参考信号资源。该第一资源集合包括该M个参考信号资源。
具体的,该第二配置信息包括repetition字段。本实施例中,该repetition字段为OFF,表示该终端设备不期待接入网设备使用相同的发送空域滤波器发送该第一资源集合的所有参考信号资源。
需要说明的是,若repetition字段为ON,则表示终端设备期待接入网设备使用相同的发送空域滤波器发送该第一资源集合的所有参考信号资源,而针对repetition字段为ON的情况,显然不适合本实施例中接入网设备进行多发送波束合成的场景。总体来说,若上报 量包含相位信息时,则关联的信道测量ResourceConfig#1中repetition字段不能被配置为ON。
下面结合图2E示出第一配置信息的具体形式。
如图2E所示,第一配置信息包括上报量cri-RSRP-Phase、上报数目nrofReportedRS和信道测量ResourceConfig#1(信道测量ResourceConfig#1可以理解为上述的第二配置信息。当上报量配置为cri-RSRP-Phase时,则ResourceConfig#1中的repetition字段为OFF。
可选的,第一相位信息的上报与CRS-RSRP解耦。因此,图2E所示的上报量配置也可以有其他表述形式。例如,第一相位信息的上报配置为CRI-Phase或者Phase。那么在该实现方式中,在波束管理流程中完成对RSRP上报,并且CRI-Phase或者Phase关联上报量CRS-RSRP,具体可以在第一配置信息中通过指示信息指示该CRI-Phase或者Phase关联上报量CRS-RSRP。
另外,在波束管理流程中,RSRP的上报粒度为全带上报粒度,即意味着终端设备在不同频率资源上测量得到的RSRP进行线性平均之后再上报。本实施例中,RSRP和第一相位信息的上报方式,可以采用全带上报方式,也可以采用子带上报方式,具体本申请不做限定。
其中,子带的粒度可以由接入网设备配置,或者由终端设备决定,或者由通信协议预先配置。
子带的粒度与接入网设备的调度带宽、CSI-RS资源的带宽、CSI-RS资源的数目等因素相关。例如,当CSI-RS资源的带宽较大时,考虑到频率选择性,在不同的频率资源上测量参考信号得到的RSRP和相位信息的差异较大,那么终端设备使用子带上报方式上报该第一相位信息和该N个参考信号的RSRP。
可选的,本实施例中,上报量CRI、RSRP和Phase的上报周期相同或者不同。如果CRI-RSRP为上报量,那么每次上报都包括CRI和RSRP。下面示出一种可能的Phase的上报周期:
T_Phase=接收波束数目*T_RSRP
其中,Phase的上报周期为T_Phase,CRI-RSRP的上报周期为T_RSRP。该T_Phase与T_RSRP成正比例关系。该接收波束数目为终端设备用于接收参考信号资源对应的参考信号的接收波束数目,是终端设备的一种固有能力。
可选的,该接收波束数目为预先配置在接入网设备上的,或者是,由该终端设备向该接入网设备上报的。例如,该终端设备可以在步骤206中的第一能力信息携带该终端设备支持的最大接收波束数目(maxNumberRxBeam)。
最大接收波束数目用于定义该终端设备是否支持利用CSI-RS资源进行接收波束切换。具体的,终端设备应当指示一个数值,用于表明其偏好的一个CSI-RS资源集中的CSI-RS资源重复次数。对于高频终端设备必须支持接收波束的切换。关于最大接收波束数目的相关介绍可以参阅通信标准TS.38.306。
因此,综上所述,可选的,该第一配置信息还包括以下至少一项信息:
1、第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于指示该第一资源集合用于接入网设备生成第一发送波束,该第一资源集合包括M个参考信号资源;
2、第一相位信息的上报粒度信息;
该上报粒度信息包括全带上报粒度或子带上报粒度。
3、当第一相位信息的上报粒度为子带上报粒度时,每个子带的大小。例如,每个子带的大小为4RB,8RB或者16RB。可选的,也可以是其它粒度,例如10M(兆)。
208、终端设备根据该第一配置信息确定上报该N个参考信号资源的第一相位信息。
可选的,该终端设备根据该第一配置信息确定:该M个参考信号资源用于生成第一发送波束,和确定该第一相位信息的上报粒度。
本申请实施例还提供一种实施例,该实施例与图2A所示的实施例类似,不同的地方在于步骤203至步骤204。并且,该实施例新增步骤203a,且步骤203a在步骤203之前执行。
步骤203a:终端设备计算该第一合成权α opt1
具体的计算过程与前述步骤204a至步骤204b类似,具体请参阅前述步骤204a和步骤204b的相关介绍,这里不再赘述。
步骤203替换为:终端设备向接入网设备发送第一消息,该第一消息携带基于该第一合成权α opt1
步骤204替换为:接入网设备根据该第一合成权α opt1和第二权值集合W N生成该第一发送波束W opt,即W opt=W Nopt
替换后的步骤204请参阅前述图2A所示的实施例中的步骤204b的相关介绍,这里不再赘述。
请参阅图3A,图3A为本申请实施例通信处理方法的另一个实施例示意图。在图3A中,该通信处理方法包括:
301、接入网设备通过接入网设备的R个端口在R个发送波束上向终端设备第二参考信号资源。相对应地,终端设备接收该接入网设备发送的第二参考信号资源。
具体的,接入网设备通过R个发送波束并通过接入网设备的R个端口在时域上连续的R个符号发送第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号,终端设备通过第二参考信号资源接收该第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号。
其中,该R个端口与R个符号一一对应,该R个端口与该R个发送波束一一对应。
即可以理解的是,接入网设备通过接入网设备的R个端口在R个发送波束上向终端设备第二参考信号资源等效于接入网设备通过R个发送波束并通过接入网设备的R个端口在时域上连续的R个符号发送第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号。
终端设备接收该接入网设备发送的第二参考信号资源等效于:终端设备通过第二参考信号资源接收该第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号,或者终端设备按照第二参考信号资源的配置接收该第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号。
该R个发送波束为该接入网设备生成的与R个参考信号资源对应的发送波束,该R个发送波束分别为固定权值的发送波束,R为大于或等于2的整数。该固定权值的发送波束的相关介绍请参阅前述图2A所示的实施例中步骤201的相关介绍,这里不再赘述。
该R个发送波束为终端设备在波束管理流程中上报的R个CRI对应的R个发送波束;或者是,接入网设备从该终端设备在波束管理流程中上报的CRI中选择的R个CRI所对应的R个发 送波束;或者是,接入网设备根据预设规则从M个发送波束选择的R个发送波束,该M个发送波束为该接入网设备生成的固定权值的发送波束,具体本申请不做限定。
可选的,该R个参考信号资源用于波束管理,该第二参考信号资源用于波束合成。该接入网设备的R个端口的端口编号与波束管理流程中终端设备上报的R个CRI分别对应的R个发送波束一一对应。
具体的,第二参考信号资源是用于波束合成,即用于接入网设备生成新的发送波束,以匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件。
可选的,该第二参考信号资源为R个端口的R个符号且频域密度(density)为1或3的CSI-RS资源。
例如,如图3B所示,第二参考信号资源为四端口的四符号且频域密度为3的CSI-RS资源。port0对应发送波束1,port1对应发送波束2,port3对应发送波束3,port4对应发送波束4。接入网设备通过接入网设备的port0、port1、port2和port3并在发送波束1、发送波束2、发送波束3和发送波束4发送第二参考信号资源。即该port0至port4都用于发送第二参考信号资源,且接入网设备在时域上跨四个连续OFDM符号发送第二参考信号资源(具体为图3B中的阴影部分的时频资源),每个符号对应一个端口。即接入网设备通过R个端口发送同一参考信号。
在图3B所示的示例的基础上,下面通过表5表示第二参考信号资源在一个slot内的位置,请参阅表5:
表5
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000040
其中,(k 0,l 0)为slot的第l 0个OFDM符号和在第l 0个OFDM符号上对应第k 0个RE。例如,k 0为0,l 0为0。
Row X是新引入的一列。后续终端设备上报终端设备的第二能力信息时,可以通过第二能力息指示该终端设备是否支持Row X所示的CSI-RS资源的测量。
上述表5中的变量(包括k 0、l 0等)与通信标准TS 38.211 v16.2.0第7.4.1.5.3节的notation保持一致,具体可以参阅通信标准TS 38.211 v16.2.0第7.4.1.5.3节的notation的相关介绍。
再例如,如图3C所示,第二参考信号资源为四端口的四符号且频域密度为1的CSI-RS资源。接入网设备通过接入网设备的port0、port1、port2和port3并在发送波束1、发送波束2、发送波束3和发送波束4发送第二参考信号资源。即该port0至port4都用于发送第二参考信号资源,且接入网设备在时域上连续跨四个OFDM符号发送第二参考信号资源(具体为图3C中带有阴影部分的时频资源),每个符号对应一个端口。即接入网设备通过R个端口发送同一参考信号。
在图3C所示的示例的基础上,下面通过表6表示第二参考信号资源在一个slot内的位置,请参阅表6:
表6
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000041
其中,(k 0,l 0)为slot的第l 0个OFDM符号和在第l 0个OFDM符号上对应第k 0个RE。例如,k 0为0,l 0为0。上述表6中的变量(包括k 0、l 0等)与通信标准TS 38.211 v16.2.0第7.4.1.5.3节的notation保持一致,具体可以参阅通信标准TS 38.211 v16.2.0第7.4.1.5.3节的notation的相关介绍。
Row Y是新引入的一列。后续终端设备上报终端设备的第二能力信息时,可以通过第二能力息指示该终端设备是否支持Row Y所示的CSI-RS资源的测量。
上述表5和表6仅仅是一种示例,本实施例中,对于接入网设备和终端设备是否支持码分多址(code-division multiple,CDM)不做限定。并且,当R为2时,则无需引入上述表5和表6。
需要说明的是,上述图3B和图3C示出的port0至port3的端口号(port0至port3分别对应的端口号为0、1、2和3)是一种相对的端口号。在实际应用中,该port0至port3的端口号可以为3000、3001、3002和3003等,具体本申请不做限定。上述图3B和图3C仅仅是为了说明第一接入网设备在不同的R个端口上发送该第二参考信号资源。
本实施例中,第二参考信号资源对应的CSI-RS有两种可能的形式,下面分别介绍:
实现方式1:步骤301中第二参考信号资源对应的CSI-RS属于已有的CSI-RS种类,该CSI-RS属于用于信道测量的CSI-RS,即(CSI-RS for channel acquisition)。也可以称该第二参考信号资源用于信道测量。
在通信协议中,若CSI-RS用于信道测量,则该CSI-RS属于一个CSI-RS resource set,且该CSI-RS resource set配置中没有repetition字段也没有trs-info字段。并且,该CSI-RS关联的上报量中包含有信道质量指示(channelquality indicator,CQI),预编码矩阵指 示符(precoding matrix indicator,PMI),CRI,层指示(layer indicator,LI),秩指示(rank indicator,RI)中的一个或多个;或者说,该CSI-RS关联的上报量中不包含RSRP或SINR。
在该实现方式1中,由于第二参考信号资源关联的上报量不包含RSRP,因此应当结合波束管流程获取该R个发送波束对应的参考信号的RSRP,具体后续结合步骤301a至步骤301c作介绍。
实现方式2:步骤301中的第二参考信号资源对应的CSI-RS是一种新的CSI-RS种类。例如,该CSI-RS用于动态发送波束合成,或者,用于发送波束合成。也可以称该第二参考信号资源用于波束合成。
具体的,该CSI-RS种类通常是通过为该CSI-RS资源或该CSI-RS所属的CSI-RS resource set新增一个字段,以标记该CSI-RS用于动态发送波束合成。例如,采用标准中ACN.1伪代码形式表示为:
DynamicBeam ENUMERATED{support}
在该实现方式2中,该第二参考信号资源关联的上报量不限定是否能够包含RSRP。因此,在该实现方式中,接入网设备可以在波束合成流程中获取该R个发送波束上的第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号的RSRP,也可以结合波束管理流程获取该R个发送波束对应的R个参考信号的RSRP,具体本申请不做限定。
本实施例中,该R个端口为接入网设备的虚拟天线端口或物理天线端口。
需要说明的是,终端设备通过同一接收波束接收该接入网设备发送的第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号。由于在步骤304中,接入网设备是基于终端设备使用同一接收波束测量得到的该R个端口的第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号的第二相位信息生成第二发送波束。因此,在终端设备侧应当对终端设备的接收波束进行限定,以便于接入网设备生成匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的第二发送波束,从而提高终端设备与接入网设备之间进行通信的通信性能。
302、终端设备测量该第二参考信号资源,得到第二测量信息。
该第二测量信息包括第二相位信息,该第二相位信息为该终端设备分别测量在该R个端口的第二参考信号资源得到的相位信息。
具体的,该终端设备分别测量该R个端口上第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号的第二相位信息。例如,如图3B所示,终端设备在不同类型的阴影部分的时频资源上测量该第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号,这样能够得到port0至port3分别对应第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号的相位信息。
可以理解的是,终端设备测量该第二参考信号资源,得到第二测量信息等效于终端设备测量该第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号,得到第二测量信息。
本实施例中,第二相位信息包括的内容形式为参考信号的相位,或者,不同端口之间的第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号的相位差。
一、针对第二相位信息包括参考信号的相位的方式,则第二相位信息包括R个端口的第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位。
具体的,该第二相位信息包括第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号在该R个端口上分别对应的相位。
终端设备分别测量在R个端口上的第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号的相位。然后,终端设备可以通过指示信息向接入网设备上报该在R个端口上的第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号的相位;或者,终端设备直接向接入网设备上报该在R个端口上的第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号的相位。
针对第二相位信息包括参考信号的相位的方式,终端设备需要考虑频率对第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号的相位的影响,具体上报需求请参阅前述图2A所示的实施例中步骤202的相关介绍,这里不再赘述。
二、针对第二相位信息包括不同端口之间的第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号的相位差的方式,那么第二相位信息具体包括以下任一种:
1、该R个端口的第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差。
具体的,该第二相位信息包括该第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号在R个端口上分别对应的相位之间的相位差。
终端设备分别测量在该R个端口上的第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号的相位;然后,终端设备计算在该R个端口上的第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号的相位之间的相位差。在该实现方式中,该第二相位信息具体包括R*(R-1)个相位差。
2、在该R个端口上的第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位分别与第二基准相位之间的相位差。
具体的,该第二相位信息包括在该R个端口上的该第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号分别对应的相位与第二基准相位之间的相位差。在该实现方式中,该第二相位信息包括R-1个相位差。
本实施例中,第二基准相位包括以下任一种可能的实现方式:
1、第二基准相位为该R个端口中端口号最小的端口的第二参考信号资源对应的相位。
具体的,该第二基准相位为在该R个端口中端口号最小的端口上的第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号的相位。例如,以该R个端口中相对端口号为0的端口上的第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号的相位为该第二基准相位。
2、第二基准相位为该R个端口中端口号最大的端口的第二参考信号资源对应的相位。
具体的,该第二基准相位为在该R个端口中端口号最大的端口上的第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号的相位。
3、第二基准相位为该R个端口中接入网设备最先发送第二参考信号资源的端口的第二参考信号资源对应的相位。
具体的,第二基准相位为在该R个端口中接入网设备最先发送第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号的端口上,该第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号的相位。
例如,如图3B所示,第二参考信号资源包括图3B所示的阴影部分的时频资源,每个端口占用的第二参考信号资源分别对应图3B所示的一种类型阴影部分的时频资源。接入网设备将在图3B上的阴影部分发送该第二参考信号资源。如图3B所示,接入网设备最先发送的 是通过port0发送承载于第11个OFDM符号的该第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号,那么接入网设备将该port0上的第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号的相位作为该第二基准相位。
4、第二基准相位为该R个端口中接入网设备最后发送第二参考信号资源的端口的第二参考信号资源对应的相位。
具体的,第二基准相位为在该R个端口中接入网设备最后发送第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号的端口上,该第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号的相位。
例如,如图3B所示,第二参考信号资源包括图3B所示的阴影部分的时频资源,每个端口占用的第二参考信号资源分别对应图3B所示的一种类型阴影部分的时频资源。接入网设备将在图3B上的阴影部分发送该第二参考信号资源。如图3B所示,接入网设备最后发送的是通过port3发送承载于第14个OFDM符号的该第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号,那么接入网设备将该port3上的第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号的相位作为该第二基准相位。
5、第二基准相位为该R个发送波束中的任一发送波束对应的端口的第二参考信号资源对应的相位。
具体的,第二基准相位为该R个发送波束中的任一发送波束对应的端口的第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号的相位。
例如,该R个发送波束中的任一发送波束可以为在波束管理过程中终端设备测量得到RSRP最大的发送波束;或者是,在步骤302的过程中,终端设备测量R个端口的第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号中RSRP最大的端口对应的发送波束。
上述示出了第二基准相位的一些可能的实现方式。在实际应用中,还可以有其他实现方式,具体本申请不做限定。
结合上述步骤301中第二参考信号资源对应的CSI-RS的实现方式2,该第二测量信息还包括该R个端口的第二参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP,即该R个发送波束对应的RSRP是终端设备按照R个端口的第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号进行测量的。
例如,如图3B所示,终端设备在不同类型的阴影部分的时频资源上测量该第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号,这样能够得到port0至port3分别对应第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号的RSRP,即该第二测量信息还包括在该R个端口的第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号的RSRP。
上述步骤302示出了终端设备测量在该R个端口的第二参考信号资源得到的第二相位信息,以及基于上述步骤301中第二参考信号资源对应的CSI-RS的实现方式2,终端设备还测量了该R个端口的第二参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP的技术方案。在实际应用中,过程1:该终端设备测量在该R个端口的第二参考信号资源得到的第二相位信息。过程2:基于上述步骤301中第二参考信号资源对应的CSI-RS的实现方式2,终端设备测量该R个端口的第二参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP。过程1和过程2可以是独立的两个测量过程;并且,终端设备测量在该R个端口的第二参考信号资源得到的第二相位信息与终端设备测量该R个端口的第二参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP的测量顺序并不做限定。
303、终端设备向接入网设备发送第二消息。
该第二消息携带第四指示信息,该第四指示信息用于指示第二相位信息。
由于已有波束管理流程中终端设备上报的N个CRI对应的RSRP的方式为:终端设备使用七比特的绝对值量化方法上报该N个CRI对应的RSRP中最大的RSRP,该N个CRI对应的RSRP中除最大的RSRP之外,都使用四比特的相对差量化方法进行上报。因此,为了匹配已有波束管理流程终端设备上报RSRP的方式,下面以该第二相位信息包括该R个端口的第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号的相位与第二基准相位之间的相位差为例介绍该第二消息携带的内容。该第二基准相位差为RSRP最大的发送波束对应的端口的第二参考信号资源对应的相位。该RSRP最大的发送波束为在波束管理流程中,该终端设备测量上报的R个RSRP中最大的RSRP对应的发送波束。
首先,先示出第二消息中用于指示每个相位差的比特位宽。具体请参阅表7:
表7
字段Field 位宽Bitwidth
Differential Phase 4
终端设备通过四个比特向接入网设备上报该相位差Differential Phase。即每个相位差占用第二消息中的四个比特。
需要说明的是,上述表7仅仅是示例,本实施例对该Differential Phase占用的比特位宽不做限定。例如,Differential Phase占用八个比特位宽。
下面示出第二消息中上报相位差的字段顺序,请参阅表8:
表8
Figure PCTCN2020117517-appb-000042
表7中,Differential Phase #2-#1表示CRI#1与CRI#2分别对应的CRS-RS之间的相位差,Differential Phase #3-#1表示CRI#3与CRI#1分别对应的CRS-RS之间的相位差,Differential Phase #4-#1表示CRI#4与CRI#1分别对应的CRS-RS之间的相位差。
CRI#1、CRI#2和CRI#3分别为终端设备在波束管理流程中上报的R个RSRP对应的R个参考信号资源的CRI。
对于即上述Differential Phase #2-#1、Differential Phase #3-#1和Differential Phase #4-#1分别是占用四个比特。关于相位差的量化精度,具体请参阅前述图2A所示的实施例中关于表3和表4的相关描述,这里不再赘述。
上述表7和表8仅仅是为了介绍第二消息携带的第四指示信息的具体形式,在实际应用中,终端设备上报第四指示信息也可以通过其他形式上报,并不依赖波束管理流程中RSRP的上报方式,只要接入网设备与终端设备双方预先约定好上报方式,接入网设备能够正确解析该终端设备的上报信息即可。
可选的,基于步骤301中第二参考信号资源对应的CSI-RS的实现方式2中,第二消息还携带第十一指示信息,第十一指示信息用于指示R个端口的第二参考信号资源对应的参考信 号的RSRP。
该R个端口的第二参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP可以按照端口号从大到小的顺序上报,或者,按照端口号从小到大的顺序上报。
若该R个端口的第二参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP没有全部上报或者不按照端口号顺序上报,则上述步骤302中的第二测量信息还包括该终端设备上报的RSRP分别对应的端口号。即该第二消息还携带第十四指示信息,该第十四指示信息用于指示终端设备上报的RSRP分别对应的端口号。
本实施例示出了终端设备通过指示信息的方式上报该第二相位信息的方式,从而避免信令开销过大的问题,减少资源开销。在实际应用中,该终端设备也可以直接向接入网设备上报该第二相位信息,具体本申请不做限定。
上述步骤303示出了终端设备通过同一消息(第二消息)向接入网设备发送第四指示信息、第十一指示信息和第十四指示信息的方式。在实际应用中,该第四指示信息、第十一指示信息和第十四指示信息可以分别通过不同的消息发送给接入网设备,或者,也可以是第四指示信息通过一个消息发送给接入网设备,而第十一指示信息和第十四指示信息通过另一个消息发送给接入网设备,具体本申请不做限定。后文以终端设备通过同一消息(第二消息)向接入网设备发送第四指示信息、第十一指示信息和第十四指示信息的方式为例介绍本申请实施例的技术方案。
304、接入网设备根据该第四指示信息指示的第二相位信息生成第二发送波束。
其中,第二发送波束用于该接入网设备与该终端设备之间进行通信。
本实施例中,接入网设备获取该R个发送波束分别对应的RSRP的方式包括以下两种可能的实现方式。
实现方式1、第二消息还携带第十一指示信息,该第十一指示信息用于指示该R个端口的第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号的RSRP。该接入网设备通过该第十一指示信息确定该R个端口的第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号的RSRP,并且接入网设备根据该第四指示信息确定该R个端口的第二参考信号对应的参考信号的第二相位信息。然后,接入网设备根据该R个端口的第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号的RSRP和第二相位信息生成第二发送波束。
实现方式2、接入网设备在波束管理流程中接收终端设备上报的R个参考信号资源分别对应的CRI和该R个参考信号资源对应的RSRP,该R个CRI分别与该R个发送波束一一对应。接入网设备根据该第四指示信息确定该R个端口的第二参考信号对应的参考信号的第二相位信息。然后,接入网设备根据该R个参考信号资源对应的RSRP和第二相位信息生成第二发送波束。
上述实现方式1和实现方式2中,接入网设备结合RSRP和相位信息生成第二发送波束的具体过程与前述图2A所示的实施例中的步骤204a至步骤204b类似,具体请参阅前述图2A所示的实施例中的步骤204a至步骤204b的相关介绍,这里不再赘述。
由此可知,第二发送波束的主瓣方向对准该终端设备,那么接入网设备与接入网设备通过第二发送波束进行通信传输,第二发送波束的波束增益能够大大得到提升,从而提高终端设备与接入网设备之间的通信性能。其次,相比于接入网设备从M个发送波束中选择一 个发送波束与终端设备进行通信传输的方式来说,第二发送波束对应的信道容量最大化,提升了第二发送波束对应的信道的容量。该M个发送波束为该接入网设备生成的与M个参考信号资源对应的M个发送波束,该M个发送波束为固定权值的发送波束。
可选的,第二发送波束不属于发送波束集合,该发送波束集合包括该M个发送波束。
305、接入网设备通过第二发送波束与终端设备通信。
步骤305与前述图2A所示的实施例中的步骤205类似,具体请参阅前述图2A所示的实施例中的步骤205的相关介绍,这里不再赘述。
不同的地方在于,若第二参考信号资源对应的CSI-RS为步骤301的实现方式1所示的CSI-RS,第二相位信息的上报可以与其他相关信道信息(具体包括CQI,PMI,CRI,LI,RI中的一个或多个)一起上报。第二相位信息是按照每个端口进行测量的,而其他相关信道信息可以是按照CSI-RS资源进行测量的。也就是说第二相位信息的测量作为信道测量的一部分,这样在步骤305中则无需对第二发送波束对应的信道进行测量。
本申请实施例中,终端设备测量该N个端口的第二参考信号资源的第二相位信息,并向接入网设备发送第四指示信息,以指示该第二相位信息。在终端设备的移动过程中,接入网设备与终端设备之间的信道条件是不停变化的,而R个端口分别对应接入网设备的R个发送波束。因此,第二参考信号资源的第二相位信息可以体征该接入网设备与终端设备的信道变化情况,这样接入网设备可以结合第二相位信息生成匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的新的发送波束,或者,从该接入网设备的R个发送波束中选择匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的发送波束,以提升接入网设备与终端设备之间的通信性能。
上述图3A所示的实施例中,该R个发送波束可以为在波束管理流程中,该终端设备上报的R个CRI对应的R个发送波束。那么,在该实现方式中,上述图3A所示的实施还包括步骤301a至步骤301c,且步骤301a至步骤301c在步骤301之前执行。
301a、接入网设备向终端设备发送M个参考信号资源。
步骤301a与前述图2A所示的实施例中步骤201类似,具体请参阅前述图2A所示的实施例中步骤201的相关介绍,这里不再赘述。
301b:终端设备测量M个参考信号资源,得到第三测量信息。
第三测量信息包括R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP和该R个参考信号资源对应的R个CRI,该R个CRI分别对应上述步骤301中的R个发送波束。
需要说明的是,终端设备接收该接入网设备发送的该R个参考信号资源对应的R个参考信号时,终端设备通过同一接收波束接收该R个参考信号,这里以终端设备通过第一接收波束接收该R个参考信号。那么可知,上述步骤301中,终端设备通过该第一接收波束接收该第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号。
可以理解的是,终端设备测量M个参考信号资源,得到第三测量信息等效于该终端设备测量该M个参考信号资源分别对应的参考信号,得到第三测量信息。
本实施例中,该M个参考信号资源中的每个参考信号资源对应一个发送波束,且不同的参考信号资源对应的发送波束相同或不同。需要说明的是,该M个参考信号资源分别对应的发送波束中应当包括至少两个不同的发送波束。
可选的,该M个参考信号资源与M个发送波束一一对应,即每个参考信号资源都有对应发送波束,且不同参考信号资源对应不同的发送波束。在步骤301b中以该R个参考信号资源对应的R个发送波束不相同。
301c:终端设备向接入网设备发送第三消息,该第三消息携带第五指示信息和第六指示信息。
该第五指示信息用于指示R个参考信号资源分别对应的CRI,该第六指示信息用于指示该R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP。
具体的,接入网设备根据该第五指示信息和该第六指示信息确定该R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP。
需要说明的是,上述步骤301c以终端设备通过指示信息向接入网设备上报R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP的方式为例进行说明。在实际应用中,该终端设备可以直接向该接入网设备上报该R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP,具体本申请不做限定。
步骤301c以终端设备通过同一消息(第三消息)向接入网设备发送给第五指示信息和第六指示信息的方式为例介绍本申请实施例的技术方案。在实际应用中,该终端设备也可以通过不同的消息分别发送第五指示信息和第六指示信息,具体本申请不做限定。
上述步骤301a至步骤301c可以是周期性执行的,也可以是非周期性执行,具体本申请不做限定。针对终端设备每次上报的R个CRI,终端设备使用相同的接收波束接收该R个CRI分别对应的参考信号。
可选的,步骤301至步骤303周期性执行、非周期执行或者半持续执行。因此,接入网设备在选择该R个发送波束时,接入网设备可以先选择在波束管理流程中终端设备最近一次上报的R个CRI对应的R个发送波束,接入网设备再执行步骤301至步骤303。
本申请实施例中,若接入网设备配置该终端设备在该接入网设备的P个端口接收该第二参考信号资源,但是接入网设备通过波束管理流程确定终端设备上报的P个发送波束中只有R个发送波束适合新的发送波束。则在该可能的情况下,上述图3A所示的实施例还包括步骤301d和步骤301e,且步骤301d和步骤301e在步骤301之前执行。
步骤301d:接入网设备向终端设备发送第七指示信息。
该第七指示信息用于指示该终端设备对该接入网设备的R个端口的第二参考信号资源的第二相位信息进行测量。
该R个端口为该接入网设备中的P个端口中的前R个端口、或后R个端口、或任R个端口,具体本申请不做限定。该P个端口为该接入网设备中已被配置的用于发送第二参考信号资源的端口。P为大于2的整数,P大于R。即接入网设备通过第七指示信息指示:终端设备在指定的端口(该R个端口)进行第二参考信号资源的测量。例如,如图3B所示,接入网设备指示终端设备在port0和port2接收第二参考信号资源。
具体的,该接入网设备可以通过媒体接入控制(media access control element,MAC CE)或下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI)向终端设备发送该第七指示信息。
步骤301e:终端设备根据该第七指示信息确定对该接入网设备的R个端口的第二参考信号资源进行测量。
为了接入网设备为终端设备配置合适的资源配置和上报方式,以便于接入网设备正确解析终端设备的上报量。可选的,上述图3A所示的实施例还包括步骤306和步骤307,且步骤306和步骤307在步骤301之前执行。
306、终端设备向接入网设备发送该终端设备的第二能力信息。
该第二能力信息携带第八指示信息,该第八指示信息的指示形式包括以下任一种:
1、该第八指示信息用于指示该终端设备是否支持参考信号发送模式;
该参考信号发送模式为:接入网设备通过R个发送波束并通过接入网设备的R个端口在时域上连续的R个符号发送第二参考信号资源对应的参考信号。该R个发送波束与该R个端口一一对应,该R个端口与该R个符号一一对应。
例如,如图3A所示,接入网设备包括port0至port3。port0对应发送波束1,port1对应发送波束2,port3对应发送波束3,port4对应发送波束4。接入网设备通过port0、port1、port2和port3和通过发送波束1、发送波束2、发送波束3和发送波束4发送第二参考信号资源。即该port0至port4都用于发送第二参考信号资源,且在时域上连续跨四个OFDM符号发送第二参考信号资源(具体为图3A中阴影的部分时频资源),每个符号对应一个端口。即接入网设备通过R个端口发送同一参考信号。
2、该第八指示信息用于指示该终端设备是否支持Row X所示的参考信号资源的测量。Row X的相关介绍请参阅前述步骤301中的表4或表5。
3、该第八指示信息用于指示该终端设备支持连续测量参考信号的最大符号数。
可选的,第二能力信息还携带终端设备支持连续测量参考信号的最大符号数。
具体的,终端设备可以通过以下标准中ACN.1伪代码形式通知该接入网设备终端设备支持测量跨3个连续符号的CSI-RS。
MaxNrOfSymbols-CSI-RS ENUMERATED{3}
上述步骤306示出了终端设备通过第二能力信息上报第八指示信息的方式,在实际应用中,该终端设备也可以单独向该接入网设备发送该第八指示信息,或者,该终端设备也可以通过其他信息或消息携带该第八指示信息并上报给接入网设备,具体本申请不做限定。
307、接入网设备向终端设备发送第二配置信息。
该第二配置信息用于配置该第二参考信号资源用于波束合成和配置终端设备上报R个端口的第二参考信号资源的第二相位信息。
一种可能的实现方式中,基于步骤301中的实现方式1所示的第二参考信号资源对应的CSI-RS中,在步骤307的配置过程之前,接入网设备为该终端设备配置的用于波束管理的配置。例如,该用于波束管理的配置为ResourceConfig#1。用于波束管理的第一资源集合包括16个CSI-RS,接入网设备要求终端设备上报的上报量为CRI-RSRP,上报数目(nrofReportedRs)为4。
下面基于上述用于波束管理的配置的基础上,结合图3D示出第二配置信息的一种可能的实现方式。该第二配置信息包括上报量Differential Phase和信道测量ResourceConfig#2。其中,ResourceConfig#2包括的resource#20中配置有用于波束合成的端口数、各个端口对应的时频资源位置等信息。该接入网设备上配置的用于波束合成的端 口的数目小于波束管理上报的发送波束数目nrofReportedRs。
具体的,接入网设备可以结合图3B和表4配置该resource#20,或者结合图3C和表5配置该resource#20,主要是配置用于波束合成的端口数,各个端口对应的时频位置。
在图3D所示的第二配置信息中,第二相位信息是通过波束合成过程上报的,而R个发送波束对应的R个参考信号的RSRP可以是在波束管理流程中上报的。那么,在该可能的实现方式中,第二配置信息中的resource#20与ResourceConfig#1关联。即在上述步骤301中,终端设备应当使用波束管理过程中用于接收该R个发送波束对应的R个参考信号的接收波束来接收该第二参考信号资源。
另一种可能的实现方式中,基于步骤301的实现方式2所示的第二参考信号资源对应的CSI-RS中,第二相位信息可以结合CRS-RSRP一起上报,即第二相位信息和CRI-RSRP都是按照port进行测量的。则第二配置信息与图3C类似,不同的地方在于,在该实现方式中,该第二配置信息包括的上报量为CRI-RSRP-DifferentialPhase和信道测量ResourceConfig#2。
上述步骤301至步骤304可以周期性重复执行,也可以是非周期执行,或者还可以半持续执行,具体本申请不做限定。
若步骤301至步骤304周期性重复执行,则接入网设备通过第二配置信息将步骤301至步骤304配置为周期性重复执行。若步骤301至步骤304为非周期执行,则接入网设备在前述步骤301c之后,步骤301之前,按照需求触发步骤301至步骤304的执行。若步骤301至步骤304为半持续执行,接入网设备在前述步骤301c之后,步骤301之前,先执行激活、去激活和触发等操作,然后再执行步骤301至步骤304。接入网设备配置用于步骤301至步骤304的非周期执行的资源或用于步骤301至步骤304的半持续执行的资源,以及对应的上报方式可以参阅现有配置方式,具体本申请不做限定。
308、终端设备根据第二配置信息确定:该第二参考信号资源用于波束合成以及上报该接入网设备的R个端口的第二参考信号资源的第二相位信息。
基于步骤301中的实现方式1所示的第二参考信号资源对应的CSI-RS中,可选的,终端设备根据第二配置信息确定第二配置信息的resource#20与用于波束管理的配置ResourceConfig#1关联。然后,终端设备确定在波束管理流程中用于接收终端设备上报的R个参考信号的接收波束,并通过该接收波束接收第二参考信号资源。
本申请实施例中,终端设备测量该N个端口的第二参考信号资源的第二相位信息,并向接入网设备发送第四指示信息,以指示该第二相位信息。在终端设备的移动过程中,接入网设备与终端设备之间的信道条件是不停变化的,而R个端口分别对应接入网设备的R个发送波束。因此,第二参考信号资源的第二相位信息可以体征该接入网设备与终端设备的信道变化情况,这样接入网设备可以结合第二相位信息生成匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的新的发送波束,或者,从该接入网设备的R个发送波束中选择匹配匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的发送波束,以提升接入网设备与终端设备之间的通信性能。
需要说明的是,上述图2A所示的实施例和图3A所示的实施例中,接入网设备通过终端 设备与接入网设备之间的下行测量获取参考信号的相位信息和幅度信息,从而生成匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的发送波束。
在实际应用中,接入网设备也可以通过终端设备与接入网设备之间的上行测量获取参考信号的相位信息和幅度信息,从而生成匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的发送波束。例如,终端设备向接入网设备发送探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS);然后,接入网设备测量该SRS,得到该SRS的相位信息和幅度信息。具体包括以下两种可能的实现方式:
1、终端设备向接入网设备发送SRS,由接入网设备对该SRS进行测量,即上行测量。接入网设备再根据测量结果生成匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的发送波束,具体的生成方式请参阅前述图2A所示的实施例中的步骤204a至步骤204b。在该实现方式中,由接入网设备为该SRS配置合适的资源,无需额外增加接入网设备与终端设备之间的信息交互。
2、终端设备向接入网设备发送SRS,由接入网设备对该SRS测量,即上行测量。接入网设备向终端设备发送测量结果,再由终端设备计算合成权。然后,终端设备向接入网设备反馈合成权,再由接入网设备根据合成权生成匹配终端设备与接入网设备之间的信道条件的发送波束,具体的生成方式请参阅前述图2A所示的实施例中的步骤204a至步骤204b。
下面对本申请实施例中提供的一种通信装置进行描述。请参阅图4,本申请实施例中通信装置的一个结构示意图,该通信装置可以用于执行图2A所示实施例中终端设备执行的步骤,可以参考上述方法实施例中的相关描述。
该通信装置包括收发模块401和处理模块402。
收发模块401,用于接收接入网设备发送的M个参考信号资源;
处理模块402,用于分别测量该M个参考信号资源,得到第一测量信息,该第一测量信息包括第一相位信息,该第一相位信息为该通信装置分别测量该M个参考信号资源中的N个参考信号资源得到的相位信息,N和M均为大于或等于1的整数,M大于或等于N;
该收发模块401,还用于向该接入网设备发送第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示该第一相位信息。
一种可能的实现方式中,该M个参考信号资源用于波束管理,该第一相位信息用于该接入网设备生成第一发送波束,该第一发送波束用于该接入网设备与该通信装置之间进行通信。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一发送波束不属于发送波束集合,该发送波束集合包括该接入网设备生成的与该M个参考信号资源分别对应的发送波束。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一相位信息包括该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;或者,
该第一相位信息包括该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位与第一基准相位之间的相位差,该第一基准相位为第一参考信号资源对应的相位,该第一参考信号资源为该N个参考信号资源中RSRP最大或RSRQ最大的参考信号资源。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一测量信息包括N个参考信号资源指示CRI、N个RSRP 和该第一相位信息,该第一相位信息包括N*(N-1)个相位差,或者,N-1个相位差;该N个CRI为该N个参考信号资源分别对应的CRI,该N个RSRP为该N个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP;该N*(N-1)个相位差为该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差,该N-1个相位差为该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位与该第一基准相位之间的相位差。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该M个参考信号资源中的该N个参考信号资源是由该通信装置通过同一接收波束接收的。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块401还用于:
向该接入网设备发送该通信装置的第一能力信息,该第一能力信息携带第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示该通信装置是否具备对用于该接入网设备生成该第一发送波束所需的第一相位信息进行测量的测量能力。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二指示信息为用于指示该通信装置是否支持对用于波束管理的参考信号资源对应的相位信息的测量。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一能力信息还携带以下信息中的一个或多个:该通信装置支持合并用于波束管理的参考信号资源对应的发送波束的最大个数;该通信装置对该第一相位信息进行量化的量化能力信息。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块401还用于:
接收该接入网设备发送的第一配置信息;
该处理模块402还用于:
根据该第一配置信息确定上报该N个参考信号资源的第一相位信息。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一配置信息包括第一资源集合的第二配置信息,该第二配置信息包括repetition字段,该repetition字段为OFF,该第一资源集合包括该M个参考信号资源。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一配置信息还包括以下信息中的一个或多个:
第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于指示该第一资源集合用于该接入网设备生成该第一发送波束;
该第一相位信息的上报粒度信息;
当该第一相位信息的上报粒度为子带上报粒度时,每个子带的大小信息。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块401还用于:
向该接入网设备发送第十二指示信息和第十三指示信息,该第十二指示信息用于指示该N个参考信号资源对应的N个CRI,该第十三指示信息用于指示该N个参考信号资源对应的RSRP。
本申请实施例中,收发模块401,用于接收接入网设备发送的M个参考信号资源;处理模块402,用于分别测量该M个参考信号资源,得到第一测量信息,该第一测量信息包括第一相位信息,该第一相位信息为该通信装置分别测量该M个参考信号资源中的N个参考信号资源得到的相位信息,N和M均为大于或等于1的整数,M大于或等于N;该收发模块401,还用于向该接入网设备发送第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示该第一相位信息。在该通信装置的移动过程中,接入网设备与该通信装置之间的信道条件是不停变化的,而N个参 考信号资源分别对应的N个发送波束。因此,N个参考信号资源的第一相位信息可以体征该接入网设备与该通信装置的信道变化情况,这样接入网设备可以结合第一相位信息生成匹配该通信装置与接入网设备之间的信道条件的新的发送波束,或者,从该接入网设备的N个发送波束中选择匹配匹配该通信装置与接入网设备之间的信道条件的发送波束,以提升接入网设备与该通信装置之间的通信性能。
可选的,上述图4还用于执行以下方案:
收发模块401,用于接收接入网设备发送的M个参考信号资源;
处理模块402,用于测量该M个参考信号资源中的N个参考信号资源,得到第一相位信息,N和M均为大于或等于1的整数,M大于或等于N;
该收发模块401,还用于向接入网设备发送第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示该第一相位信息。
下面对本申请实施例中提供的一种通信装置进行描述。请参阅图5,本申请实施例中通信装置的一个结构示意图,该通信装置可以用于执行图2A所示实施例中接入网设备执行的步骤,可以参考上述方法实施例中的相关描述。
该通信装置包括收发模块501和处理模块502。
收发模块501,用于向终端设备发送M个参考信号资源;接收该终端设备发送的第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示第一相位信息,该第一相位信息为该终端设备测量N个参考信号资源得到的相位信息,该M个参考信号资源包括该N个参考信号资源,N和M均为大于或等于1的整数,M大于或等于N;
处理模块502,用于根据该第一指示信息指示的第一相位信息生成第一发送波束,该第一发送波束用于该通信装置与该终端设备之间进行通信。
一种可能的实现方式中,该M个参考信号资源用于波束管理。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一发送波束不属于发送波束集合,该发送波束集合包括该通信装置生成的与该M个参考信号资源分别对应的发送波束。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一相位信息包括该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;或者,该第一相位信息包括该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位与第一基准相位之间的相位差,该第一基准相位为第一参考信号资源对应的相位,该第一参考信号资源为该N个参考信号资源中RSRP最大或RSRQ最大的参考信号资源。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一相位信息包括N*(N-1)个相位差,或者,N-1个相位差;该N*(N-1)个相位差为该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差,该N-1个相位差为该N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位与该第一基准相位之间的相位差。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该M个参考信号资源中的该N个参考信号资源是由该终端设备通过同一接收波束接收的。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块501还用于:
接收该终端设备发送的该终端设备的第一能力信息,该第一能力信息携带第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示该终端设备是否具备对用于该通信装置生成第一发送波束所需的第一相位信息进行测量的测量能力;
该处理模块502还用于:
根据该第一能力信息确定该终端设备具备对第一相位信息进行测量的测量能力。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二指示信息为用于指示该终端设备是否支持对用于波束管理的参考信号资源对应的相位信息的测量。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一能力信息还携带以下信息中的一个或多个:该终端设备支持合并用于波束管理的参考信号资源对应的发送波束的最大个数;该终端设备对该第一相位信息进行量化的量化能力信息。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块501还用于:
向该终端设备发送第一配置信息,该第一配置信息用于配置该终端设备上报该N个参考信号资源的第一相位信息。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一配置信息包括第一资源集合的第二配置信息,该第二配置信息包括repetition字段,该repetition字段为OFF,该第一资源集合包括该M个参考信号资源。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第一配置信息还包括以下信息中的一个或多个:
第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于指示该第一资源集合用于该通信装置生成该第一发送波束;
该第一相位信息的上报粒度信息;
当该第一相位信息的上报粒度为子带上报粒度时,每个子带的大小信息。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块501还用于:
接收该终端设备发送的第十二指示信息和第十三指示信息,该第十二指示信息用于指示该N个参考信号资源对应的N个CRI,该第十三指示信息用于指示该N个参考信号资源对应的RSRP;
该处理模块502还用于:
根据该第十二指示信息和该第十三指示信息确定该N个参考信号资源对应的RSRP;
该处理模块502具体用于:
根据该第一相位信息和该N个参考信号资源对应的RSRP生成第一发送波束。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该处理模块502具体用于:
根据该第一相位信息和该N个参考信号资源的RSRP确定第一合成权;
根据该第一合成权和第二权值集合生成该第一发送波束,该第二权值集合包括该N个参考信号资源对应的N个发送波束的权值。
本申请实施例中,收发模块501,用于向终端设备发送M个参考信号资源;接收该终端设备发送的第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示第一相位信息,该第一相位信息为该终端设备测量N个参考信号资源得到的相位信息,该M个参考信号资源包括该N个参考信号资源,N和M均为大于或等于1的整数,M大于或等于N;处理模块502,用于根据该第一指示信息指示的第一相位信息生成第一发送波束,该第一发送波束用于该通信装置与该终端设备之间进行通信。在终端设备的移动过程中,该通信装置与终端设备之间的信道条件是不停变化的,而N个参考信号资源分别对应的N个发送波束。因此,N个参考信号资源的第一相位 信息可以体征该通信装置与终端设备的信道变化情况,这样该通信装置可以结合第一相位信息生成匹配终端设备与该通信装置之间的信道条件的第一发送波束,以提升该通信装置与终端设备之间的通信性能。
下面对本申请实施例中提供的一种通信装置进行描述。请参阅图6,本申请实施例中通信装置的一个结构示意图,该通信装置可以用于执行图3A所示实施例中终端设备执行的步骤,可以参考上述方法实施例中的相关描述。
该通信装置包括收发模块601和处理模块602。
收发模块601,用于接收接入网设备发送的第二参考信号资源,该第二参考信号资源是该接入网设备通过该接入网设备的R个端口并在R个发送波束上发送的参考信号资源,该R个端口与该R个发送波束一一对应,该R个发送波束为该接入网设备生成的与R个参考信号资源对应的发送波束,R为大于或等于2的整数;
处理模块602,用于测量该第二参考信号资源,得到第二测量信息,该第二测量信息包括第二相位信息,该第二相位信息为该通信装置分别测量所述R个端口的该第二参考信号资源得到的相位信息;
该收发模块601,还用于向该接入网设备发送第四指示信息,该第四指示信息用于指示该第二相位信息。
一种可能的实现方式中,该第二参考信号资源用于波束合成,该第二相位信息用于所述接入网设备生成第二发送波束,该第二发送波束用于该接入网设备与该通信装置之间进行通信。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二发送波束不属于发送波束集合,该发送波束集合包括该接入网设备生成的与M个参考信号资源对应的发送波束,该M个参考信号资源用于波束管理,该M个参考信号资源包括该R个参考信号资源,M为大于或等于2的整数,该M大于或等于该R。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二相位信息包括该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;或者,
该R个端口上该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位分别与第二基准相位之间的相位差,该第二基准相位为所述R个端口中端口号最小的端口的该第二参考信号资源对应的相位。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二测量信息包括该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP;该第二相位信息包括R*(R-1)个相位差,或者,R-1个相位差;该R*(R-1)个相位差为该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;该R-1个相位差为该R个端口上该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位分别与第二基准相位之间的相位差。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块601还用于:
向该接入网设备发送第十一指示信息,该第十一指示信息用于指示该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块601具体用于:
使用同一接收波束接收该接入网设备发送的该第二参考信号资源。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块601具体用于:
接收该接入网设备发送的M个参考信号资源,该M个参考信号资源用于波束管理;
该处理模块602还用于:
分别测量该M个参考信号资源,得到该M个参考信号资源中的R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP,且该通信装置通过第一接收波束接收该R个参考信号资,R和M均为大于或等于2的整数,M大于或等于R;
该收发模块601还用于:
向该接入网设备发送第五指示信息和第六指示信息,该第五指示信息用于指示该R个参考信号资源分别对应的参考信号资源指示CRI,该第六指示信息用于指示R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP;
该收发模块601具体用于:
通过该第一接收波束接收该接入网设备发送的该第二参考信号资源。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块601还用于:
接收该接入网设备发送的第七指示信息;
该处理模块602还用于:
根据该第七指示信息确定对该接入网设备的R个端口的第二参考信号资源的相位进行测量,该R个端口为该接入网设备中已被配置的用于发送第二参考信号资源的P个端口中的前R个端口,P为大于R的整数。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块601还用于:
向该接入网设备发送该通信装置的第二能力信息;其中,该第二能力信息携带第八指示信息,该第八指示信息用于指示该通信装置是否支持参考信号发送模式;该参考信号发送模式为:该接入网设备通过该R个发送波束并通过该接入网设备的R个端口在时域上连续的R个符号发送该第二参考信号资源对应的第二参考信号;该R个发送波束与该R个端口一一对应,该R个端口与该R个符号一一对应。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二能力信息还携带该通信装置支持的最大符号个数,该最大符号数为该通信装置支持的连续测量参考信号的最大符号个数。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块601还用于:
接收该接入网设备发送的第二配置信息;
该处理模块602还用于:
根据该第二配置信息确定:该第二参考信号资源用于波束合成以及上报该R个端口的第二参考信号资源的第二相位信息。
本申请实施例中,收发模块601,用于接收接入网设备发送的第二参考信号资源,该第二参考信号资源是该接入网设备通过该接入网设备的R个端口并在R个发送波束上发送的参考信号资源,该R个端口与该R个发送波束一一对应,该R个发送波束为该接入网设备生成的与R个参考信号资源对应的发送波束,R为大于或等于2的整数;处理模块602,用于测量该第二参考信号资源,得到第二测量信息,该第二测量信息包括第二相位信息,该第二相位信息为该通信装置分别测量所述R个端口的该第二参考信号资源得到的相位信息;该收发模 块601,还用于向该接入网设备发送第四指示信息,该第四指示信息用于指示该第二相位信息。在该通信装置的移动过程中,接入网设备与该通信装置之间的信道条件是不停变化的,而R个端口分别对应接入网设备的R个发送波束。因此,第二参考信号资源的第二相位信息可以体征该接入网设备与该通信装置的信道变化情况,这样接入网设备可以结合第二相位信息生成匹配该通信装置与接入网设备之间的信道条件的新的发送波束,或者,从该接入网设备的R个发送波束中选择匹配匹配该通信装置与接入网设备之间的信道条件的发送波束,以提升接入网设备与该通信装置之间的通信性能。
可选的,上述图6还用于执行以下技术方案:
收发模块601,用于接收接入网设备发送的第二参考信号资源,该第二参考信号资源是该接入网设备通过该接入网设备的R个端口并在R个发送波束上发送的参考信号资源,该R个端口与该R个发送波束一一对应,该R个发送波束为该接入网设备生成的与R个参考信号资源对应的发送波束,R为大于或等于2的整数;
处理模块602,用于测量分别测量所述R个端口的第二参考信号资源,得到第二相位信息;
该收发模块601,还用于向该接入网设备发送第二消息,该第二消息携带该第四指示信息,该第四指示信息用于指示该第二相位信息。
下面对本申请实施例中提供的一种通信装置进行描述。请参阅图7,本申请实施例中通信装置的一个结构示意图,该通信装置可以用于执行图3A所示实施例中接入网设备执行的步骤,可以参考上述方法实施例中的相关描述。
该通信装置包括收发模块701和处理模块702。
收发模块701,用于通过该通信装置的R个端口并在R个发送波束上向终端设备发送第二参考信号资源,该R个端口与该R个发送波束一一对应,该R个发送波束为该通信装置生成的与R个参考信号资源对应的发送波束,R为大于或等于2的整数;接收该终端设备发送的第四指示信息,该第四指示信息指示第二相位信息,该第二相位信息为该终端设备分别测量所述R个端口的该第二参考信号资源得到的相位信息;
处理模块702,用于根据该第四指示信息指示的第二相位信息生成第二发送波束,该第二发送波束用于该通信装置与该终端设备之间进行通信。
一种可能的实现方式中,该第二参考信号资源用于波束合成。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二发送波束不属于发送波束集合,该发送波束集合包括该通信装置生成的与M个参考信号资源对应的发送波束,该M个参考信号资源用于波束管理,该M个参考信号资源包括该R个参考信号资源,M为大于或等于2的整数,该M大于或等于该R。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二相位信息包括该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;或者,该R个端口上该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位分别与第二基准相位之间的相位差,该第二基准相位为所述R个端口中端口号最小的端口的该第二参考信号资源对应的相位。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块701还用于:
接收终端设备发送的第十一指示信息,该第十一指示信息用于指示该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP;该第二相位信息包括R*(R-1)个相位差,或者,R-1个相位差;该R*(R-1)个相位差为该R个端口的该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;该R-1个相位差为该R个端口上该第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位分别与第二基准相位之间的相位差。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块701还用于:
向该终端设备发送第七指示信息,该第七指示信息用于指示该终端设备对该R个端口的第二参考信号资源的相位信息进行测量,该R个端口为该通信装置中已被配置的用于发送第二参考信号资源的P个端口中的前R个端口,P为大于R的整数。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块701还用于:
接收该终端设备发送的该终端设备的第二能力信息,该第二能力信息携带第八指示信息;
该处理模块702还用于:
根据该第八指示信息确定该终端设备是否支持参考信号发送模式;该参考信号发送模式为:该通信装置通过该R个发送波束并通过该通信装置的R个端口在时域上连续的R个符号发送该第二参考信号资源对应的第二参考信号;该R个发送波束与该R个端口一一对应,该R个端口与该R个符号一一对应。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该第二能力信息还携带该终端设备支持的最大符号个数,该最大符号数为该终端设备支持的连续测量参考信号的最大符号个数。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块701还用于:
向该终端设备发送第二配置信息,该第二配置信息用于配置该第二参考信号资源用于波束合成,以及配置该终端设备上报该R个端口的第二参考信号资源的第二相位信息。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该收发模块701还用于:
向该终端设备发送M个参考信号资源,该M个参考信号资源用于波束管理;
接收该终端设备发送的第三消息,该第三消息携带第五指示信息和第六指示信息,该第五指示信息用于指示R个参考信号资源分别对应的参考信号资源指示CRI,该第六指示信息用于指示该R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP,该R个参考信号资源与该R个发送波束一一对应;
该处理模块702还用于:
根据该第三消息确定该R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP;
该处理模块702具体用于:
根据该第二相位信息和该R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP生成该第二发送波束。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该处理模块702具体用于:
根据该第二相位信息和该R个参考信号资源分别对应的RSRP生成第二合成权;
根据该第二合成权和第三权值集合生成该第二发送波束,该第三权值集合包括该R个参考信号资源对应的R个发送波束的权值。
本申请实施例中,收发模块701,用于通过该通信装置的R个端口并在R个发送波束上向 终端设备发送第二参考信号资源,该R个端口与该R个发送波束一一对应,该R个发送波束为该通信装置生成的与R个参考信号资源对应的发送波束,R为大于或等于2的整数;接收该终端设备发送的第四指示信息,该第四指示信息指示第二相位信息,该第二相位信息为该终端设备分别测量所述R个端口的该第二参考信号资源得到的相位信息;处理模块702,用于根据该第四指示信息指示的第二相位信息生成第二发送波束,该第二发送波束用于该通信装置与该终端设备之间进行通信。在终端设备的移动过程中,该通信装置与终端设备之间的信道条件是不停变化的,而R个端口分别对应该通信装置的R个发送波束。因此,第二参考信号资源的第二相位信息可以体征该通信装置与终端设备的信道变化情况,这样该通信装置可以结合第二相位信息生成匹配终端设备与该通信装置之间的信道条件的新的发送波束,或者,从该通信装置的R个发送波束中选择匹配终端设备与该通信装置之间的信道条件的发送波束,以提升该通信装置与终端设备之间的通信性能。
下面通过图8示出终端设备的一种可能的结构示意图。
图8示出了一种简化的终端设备的结构示意图。为了便于理解和图示方式,图8中,终端设备以手机作为例子。如图8所示,终端设备包括处理器、存储器、射频电路、天线及输入输出装置。处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,以及对终端设备进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据等。存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据。射频电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。天线主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置,例如触摸屏、显示屏,键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。需要说明的是,有些种类的终端设备可以不具有输入输出装置。
当需要发送数据时,处理器对待发送的数据进行基带处理后,输出基带信号至射频电路,射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到终端设备时,射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号,将射频信号转换为基带信号,并将基带信号输出至处理器,处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。为便于说明,图8中仅示出了一个存储器和处理器。在实际的终端设备产品中,可以存在一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等。存储器可以是独立于处理器设置,也可以是与处理器集成在一起,本申请实施例对此不做限制。
在本申请实施例中,可以将具有收发功能的天线和射频电路视为终端设备的收发单元,将具有处理功能的处理器视为终端设备的处理单元。如图8所示,终端设备包括收发单元810和处理单元820。收发单元也可以称为收发器、收发机、收发装置等。处理单元也可以称为处理器,处理单板,处理模块、处理装置等。可选的,可以将收发单元810中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元,将收发单元810中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元,即收发单元810包括接收单元和发送单元。收发单元有时也可以称为收发机、收发器、或收发电路等。接收单元有时也可以称为接收机、接收器、或接收电路等。发送单元有时也可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。
应理解,收发单元810用于执行上述方法实施例中终端设备的发送操作和接收操作, 处理单元820用于执行上述方法实施例中终端设备上除了收发操作之外的其他操作。
例如,一种可能的实现方式中,该收发单元810用于执行上述图2A中的步骤201、步骤203、步骤206和步骤207的终端设备的收发操作,和/或收发单元810还用于执行本申请实施例中终端设备的其他收发步骤。该处理单元820用于上述图2A中的步骤202、步骤208,和/或处理单元820还用于执行本申请实施例中终端设备的其他处理步骤。
或者是,该收发单元810用于执行上述图3A中的步骤301、步骤303、步骤306和步骤307的终端设备的收发操作,和/或收发单元810还用于执行本申请实施例中终端设备的其他收发步骤。该处理单元820用于上述图3A中的步骤302和步骤308,和/或处理单元820还用于执行本申请实施例中终端设备的其他处理步骤。
当该终端设备为芯片时,该芯片包括收发单元和处理单元。其中,该收发单元可以是输入输出电路或通信接口;处理单元为该芯片上集成的处理器或者微处理器或者集成电路或者逻辑电路。上述方法实施例中,发送操作对应该输入输出电路的输出,接收操作对应该输入输出电路的输入。
本申请还提供一种通信装置,请参阅图9,本申请实施例中通信装置的另一个结构示意图,该报文处理装置可以用于执行图2A所示实施例中接入网设备执行的步骤,可以参考上述方法实施例中的相关描述。
该报文处理装置包括:处理器901、存储器902和收发器903。
该处理器901、存储器902和收发器903分别通过总线相连,该存储器中存储有计算机指令。
前述实施例中的处理模块502具体可以是本实施例中的处理器901,因此该处理器901的具体实现不再赘述。前述实施例中的收发模块501则具体可以是本实施例中的收发器903,因此收发器903的具体实现不再赘述。
本申请还提供一种通信装置,请参阅图10,本申请实施例中通信装置的另一个结构示意图,该报文处理装置可以用于执行图3A所示实施例中接入网设备执行的步骤,可以参考上述方法实施例中的相关描述。
该报文处理装置包括:处理器1001、存储器1002和收发器1003。
该处理器1001、存储器1002和收发器1003分别通过总线相连,该存储器中存储有计算机指令。
前述实施例中的处理模块702具体可以是本实施例中的处理器1001,因此该处理器1001的具体实现不再赘述。前述实施例中的收发模块701则具体可以是本实施例中的收发器1003,因此收发器1003的具体实现不再赘述。
请参阅图11,本申请实施例还提供了一种通信系统,该通信系统包括如图4所示的通信装置和图5所示的通信装置;或者,该通信系统包括如图6所示的通信装置和图7所示的通信装置。
其中,图4所示的通信装置用于执行上述图2A所示的终端设备执行的全部或部分步骤,图5所示的通信装置用于执行上述图2A所示的接入网设备执行的全部或部分步骤。
其中,图6所示的通信装置用于执行上述图3A所示的终端设备执行的全部或部分步骤, 图7所示的通信装置用于执行上述图3A所示的接入网设备执行的全部或部分步骤。
本申请实施例还提供一种包括指令的计算机程序产品,当其在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行如上述图2A和图3A所示的实施例的通信方法。
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,包括计算机指令,当该计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如上述图2A和图3A所示的实施例的通信方法。
本申请实施例还提供一种芯片装置,包括处理器,用于调用该存储器中存储的计算机程度或计算机指令,以使得该处理器执行上述图2A和图3A所示的实施例的通信方法。
可选的,该处理器通过接口与存储器耦合。
可选的,该芯片装置还包括存储器,该存储器中存储有计算机程度或计算机指令。
其中,上述任一处提到的处理器,可以是一个通用中央处理器,微处理器,特定应用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),或一个或多个用于控制上述图2A和图3A所示的实施例的通信方法的程序执行的集成电路。上述任一处提到的存储器可以为只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备,随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)等。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统,装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统,装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。
所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器、随机存取存储器、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
以上所述,以上实施例仅用以说明本申请的技术方案,而非对其限制;尽管参照前述实施例对本申请进行了详细的说明,本领域的普通技术人员应当理解:其依然可以对前述 各实施例所记载的技术方案进行修改,或者对其中部分技术特征进行等同替换;而这些修改或者替换,并不使相应技术方案的本质脱离本申请各实施例技术方案范围。

Claims (102)

  1. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:
    终端设备接收接入网设备发送的M个参考信号资源;
    所述终端设备分别测量所述M个参考信号资源,得到第一测量信息,所述第一测量信息包括第一相位信息,所述第一相位信息为所述终端设备分别测量所述M个参考信号资源中的N个参考信号资源得到的相位信息,所述N和所述M均为大于或等于1的整数,所述M大于或等于所述N;
    所述终端设备向所述接入网设备发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一相位信息。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述M个参考信号资源用于波束管理,所述第一相位信息用于所述接入网设备生成第一发送波束,所述第一发送波束用于所述接入网设备与所述终端设备之间进行通信。
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一发送波束不属于发送波束集合,所述发送波束集合包括所述接入网设备生成的与所述M个参考信号资源分别对应的发送波束。
  4. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一相位信息包括所述N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;或者,
    所述第一相位信息包括所述N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位与第一基准相位之间的相位差,所述第一基准相位为第一参考信号资源对应的相位,所述第一参考信号资源为所述N个参考信号资源中参考信号接收功率最大或参考信号接收质量最大的参考信号资源。
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一测量信息包括N个参考信号资源指示CRI、N个参考信号接收功率和所述第一相位信息,所述第一相位信息包括N*(N-1)个相位差,或者,N-1个相位差;
    所述N个CRI为所述N个参考信号资源分别对应的CRI,所述N个参考信号接收功率为所述N个参考信号资源分别对应的参考信号接收功率;
    所述N*(N-1)个相位差为所述N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差,所述N-1个相位差为所述N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位与所述第一基准相位之间的相位差。
  6. 根据权利要求1至5中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述M个参考信号资源中的所述N个参考信号资源是由所述终端设备通过同一接收波束接收的。
  7. 根据权利要求2至5中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备接收接入网设备发送的M个参考信号资源之前,所述方法还包括:
    所述终端设备向所述接入网设备发送所述终端设备的第一能力信息,所述第一能力信息携带第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述终端设备是否具备对用于所述接入网设备生成所述第一发送波束所需的第一相位信息进行测量的测量能力。
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二指示信息为用于指示所述终端设备是否支持对用于波束管理的参考信号资源对应的相位信息的测量。
  9. 根据权利要求7或8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一能力信息还携带以下信息中的一个或多个:
    所述终端设备支持合并用于波束管理的参考信号资源对应的发送波束的最大个数;
    所述终端设备对所述第一相位信息进行量化的量化能力信息。
  10. 根据权利要求1至9中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备接收接入网设备发送的M个参考信号资源之前,所述方法还包括:
    所述终端设备接收所述接入网设备发送的第一配置信息;
    所述终端设备根据所述第一配置信息确定上报所述N个参考信号资源的第一相位信息。
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一配置信息包括第一资源集合的第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息包括重复repetition字段,所述repetition字段为OFF,所述第一资源集合包括所述M个参考信号资源。
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一配置信息还包括以下信息中的一个或多个:
    第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一资源集合用于所述接入网设备生成所述第一发送波束;
    所述第一相位信息的上报粒度信息;
    当所述第一相位信息的上报粒度为子带上报粒度时,每个子带的大小信息。
  13. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:
    接入网设备向终端设备发送M个参考信号资源;
    所述接入网设备接收所述终端设备发送的第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第一相位信息,所述第一相位信息为所述终端设备测量N个参考信号资源得到的相位信息,所述M个参考信号资源包括所述N个参考信号资源,所述N和所述M均为大于或等于1的整数,所述M大于或等于所述N;
    所述接入网设备根据所述第一指示信息指示的第一相位信息生成第一发送波束,所述第一发送波束用于所述接入网设备与所述终端设备之间进行通信。
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述M个参考信号资源用于波束管理。
  15. 根据权利要求13或14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一发送波束不属于发送波束集合,所述发送波束集合包括所述接入网设备生成的与所述M个参考信号资源分别对应的发送波束。
  16. 根据权利要求13至15中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一相位信息包括所述N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;或者,
    所述第一相位信息包括所述N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位与第一基准相位之间的相位差,所述第一基准相位为第一参考信号资源对应的相位,所述第一参考信号资源为所述N个参考信号资源中参考信号接收功率最大或参考信号接收质量最大的参考信号资源。
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一相位信息包括N*(N-1)个相位差,或者,N-1个相位差;
    所述N*(N-1)个相位差为所述N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差,所 述N-1个相位差为所述N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位与所述第一基准相位之间的相位差。
  18. 根据权利要求13至17中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述M个参考信号资源中的所述N个参考信号资源是由所述终端设备通过同一接收波束接收的。
  19. 根据权利要求13至18中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述接入网设备向终端设备发送M个参考信号资源之前,所述方法还包括:
    所述接入网设备接收所述终端设备发送的所述终端设备的第一能力信息,所述第一能力信息携带第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述终端设备是否具备对用于接入网设备生成第一发送波束所需的第一相位信息进行测量的测量能力;
    所述接入网设备根据所述第一能力信息确定所述终端设备具备对第一相位信息进行测量的测量能力。
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二指示信息为用于指示所述终端设备是否支持对用于波束管理的参考信号资源对应的相位信息的测量。
  21. 根据权利要求19或20所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一能力信息还携带以下信息中的一个或多个:
    所述终端设备支持合并用于波束管理的参考信号资源对应的发送波束的最大个数;
    所述终端设备对所述第一相位信息进行量化的量化能力信息。
  22. 根据权利要求13至21中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述接入网设备向终端设备发送M个参考信号资源之前,所述方法还包括:
    所述接入网设备向所述终端设备发送第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息用于配置所述终端设备上报所述N个参考信号资源的第一相位信息。
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一配置信息包括第一资源集合的第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息包括重复repetition字段,所述repetition字段为OFF,所述第一资源集合包括所述M个参考信号资源。
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一配置信息还包括以下信息中的一个或多个:
    第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一资源集合用于所述接入网设备生成所述第一发送波束;
    所述第一相位信息的上报粒度信息;
    当所述第一相位信息的上报粒度为子带上报粒度时,每个子带的大小信息。
  25. 根据权利要求13至24中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    所述接入网设备接收所述终端设备发送的第十二指示信息和第十三指示信息,所述第十二指示信息用于指示所述N个参考信号资源分别对应的N个参考信号资源指示CRI,所述第十三指示信息用于指示所述N个参考信号资源分别对应的参考信号接收功率;
    所述接入网设备根据所述第十二指示信息和所述第十三指示信息确定所述N个参考信号资源分别对应的参考信号接收功率;
    所述接入网设备根据所述第一指示信息指示的第一相位信息生成第一发送波束,包括:
    所述接入网设备根据所述第一相位信息和所述N个参考信号资源分别对应的参考信号接收功率生成第一发送波束。
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的方法,其特征在于,所述接入网设备根据所述第一相位信息和所述N个参考信号资源分别对应的参考信号接收功率生成第一发送波束,包括:
    所述接入网设备根据所述第一相位信息和所述N个参考信号资源对应的参考信号接收功率确定第一合成权;
    所述接入网设备根据所述第一合成权和第二权值集合生成所述第一发送波束,所述第二权值集合包括所述N个参考信号资源对应的N个发送波束的权值。
  27. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:
    终端设备接收接入网设备发送的第二参考信号资源,所述第二参考信号资源是所述接入网设备通过所述接入网设备的R个端口并在R个发送波束上发送的参考信号资源,所述R个端口与所述R个发送波束一一对应,所述R个发送波束为所述接入网设备生成的与R个参考信号资源对应的发送波束,R为大于或等于2的整数;
    所述终端设备测量所述第二参考信号资源,得到第二测量信息,所述第二测量信息包括第二相位信息,所述第二相位信息为所述终端设备分别测量所述R个端口的所述第二参考信号资源得到的相位信息;
    所述终端设备向所述接入网设备发送第二消息,所述第二消息携带所述第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第二相位信息。
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二参考信号资源用于波束合成,所述第二相位信息用于所述接入网设备生成第二发送波束,所述第二发送波束用于所述接入网设备与所述终端设备之间进行通信。
  29. 根据权利要求28所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二发送波束不属于发送波束集合,所述发送波束集合包括所述接入网设备生成的与M个参考信号资源对应的发送波束,所述M个参考信号资源用于波束管理,所述M个参考信号资源包括所述R个参考信号资源,M为大于或等于2的整数,所述M大于或等于所述R。
  30. 根据权利要求27至29中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二相位信息包括所述R个端口的所述第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;或者,
    所述R个端口上所述第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位分别与第二基准相位之间的相位差,所述第二基准相位为所述R个端口中端口号最小的端口的所述第二参考信号资源对应的相位。
  31. 根据权利要求27至30中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二测量信息包括所述R个端口的所述第二参考信号资源分别对应的参考信号接收功率;
    所述第二相位信息包括R*(R-1)个相位差,或者,R-1个相位差;
    所述R*(R-1)个相位差为所述R个端口的所述第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;
    所述R-1个相位差为所述R个端口上所述第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位分别与第二基准相位之间的相位差。
  32. 根据权利要求31所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备接收接入网设备发送的第二参考信号资源,包括:
    所述终端设备使用同一接收波束接收所述接入网设备发送的所述第二参考信号资源。
  33. 根据权利要求27至32中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备接收接入网设备发送的第二参考信号资源之前,所述方法还包括:
    所述终端设备接收所述接入网设备发送的M个参考信号资源,所述M个参考信号资源用于波束管理;
    所述终端设备分别测量所述M个参考信号资源,得到所述M个参考信号资源中的R个参考信号资源分别对应的参考信号接收功率,且所述终端设备通过第一接收波束接收所述R个参考信号资源,所述R和所述M均为大于或等于2的整数,所述M大于或等于所述R;
    所述终端设备向所述接入网设备发送第五指示信息和第六指示信息,所述第五指示信息用于指示所述R个参考信号资源分别对应的参考信号资源指示CRI,所述第六指示信息用于指示R个参考信号资源分别对应的参考信号接收功率;
    所述终端设备接收接入网设备发送的第二参考信号资源,包括:
    所述终端设备通过所述第一接收波束接收所述接入网设备发送的所述第二参考信号资源。
  34. 根据权利要求27至33中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备测量所述第二参考信号资源,得到第二测量信息之前,所述方法还包括:
    所述终端设备接收所述接入网设备发送的第七指示信息;
    所述终端设备根据所述第七指示信息确定对所述接入网设备的R个端口的第二参考信号资源的相位进行测量,所述R个端口为所述接入网设备中已被配置的用于发送第二参考信号资源的P个端口中的前R个端口,P为大于R的整数。
  35. 根据权利要求27至34中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备接收接入网设备发送的第二参考信号资源之前,所述方法还包括:
    所述终端设备向所述接入网设备发送所述终端设备的第二能力信息;
    其中,所述第二能力信息携带第八指示信息,所述第八指示信息用于指示所述终端设备是否支持参考信号发送模式;所述参考信号发送模式为:所述接入网设备通过所述R个发送波束并通过所述接入网设备的R个端口在时域上连续的R个符号发送所述第二参考信号资源对应的第二参考信号;所述R个发送波束与所述R个端口一一对应,所述R个端口与所述R个符号一一对应。
  36. 根据权利要求35所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二能力信息还携带所述终端设备支持的最大符号个数,所述最大符号数为所述终端设备支持的连续测量参考信号的最大符号个数。
  37. 根据权利要求27至36中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备接收接入网设备发送的第二参考信号资源之前,所述方法还包括:
    所述终端设备接收所述接入网设备发送的第二配置信息;
    所述终端设备根据所述第二配置信息确定:所述第二参考信号资源用于波束合成以及 上报所述R个端口的第二参考信号资源的第二相位信息。
  38. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:
    接入网设备通过所述接入网设备的R个端口并在R个发送波束上向终端设备发送第二参考信号资源,所述R个端口与所述R个发送波束一一对应,所述R个发送波束为所述接入网设备生成的与R个参考信号资源对应的发送波束,R为大于或等于2的整数;
    所述接入网设备接收所述终端设备发送的第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息指示第二相位信息,所述第二相位信息为所述终端设备分别测量所述R个端口的所述第二参考信号资源得到的相位信息;
    所述接入网设备根据所述第四指示信息指示的第二相位信息生成第二发送波束,所述第二发送波束用于所述接入网设备与所述终端设备之间进行通信。
  39. 根据权利要求38所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二参考信号资源用于波束合成。
  40. 根据权利要求39所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二发送波束不属于发送波束集合,所述发送波束集合包括所述接入网设备生成的与M个参考信号资源对应的发送波束,所述M个参考信号资源用于波束管理,所述M个参考信号资源包括所述R个参考信号资源,M为大于或等于2的整数,所述M大于或等于所述R。
  41. 根据权利要求38至40中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二相位信息包括所述R个端口的所述第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;或者,
    所述R个端口上所述第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位分别与第二基准相位之间的相位差,所述第二基准相位为所述R个端口中端口号最小的端口的所述第二参考信号资源对应的相位。
  42. 根据权利要求38至41中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    所述接入网设备接收所述终端设备发送的第十一指示信息,所述第十一指示信息用于指示所述R个端口的所述第二参考信号资源分别对应的参考信号接收功率;
    所述第二相位信息包括R*(R-1)个相位差,或者,R-1个相位差;
    所述R*(R-1)个相位差为所述R个端口的所述第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;
    所述R-1个相位差为所述R个端口上所述第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位分别与第二基准相位之间的相位差。
  43. 根据权利要求38至42中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    所述接入网设备向所述终端设备发送第七指示信息,所述第七指示信息用于指示所述终端设备对所述R个端口的第二参考信号资源的相位信息进行测量,所述R个端口为所述接入网设备中已被配置的用于发送第二参考信号资源的P个端口中的前R个端口,P为大于R的整数。
  44. 根据权利要求38至43中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述接入网设备通过所述接入网设备的R个端口并在R个发送波束上向终端设备发送第二参考信号资源之前,所述方法还包括:
    所述接入网设备接收所述终端设备发送的所述终端设备的第二能力信息,所述第二能 力信息携带第八指示信息;
    所述接入网设备根据所述第八指示信息确定所述终端设备是否支持参考信号发送模式;
    所述参考信号发送模式为:所述接入网设备通过所述R个发送波束并通过所述接入网设备的R个端口在时域上连续的R个符号发送所述第二参考信号资源对应的第二参考信号;所述R个发送波束与所述R个端口一一对应,所述R个端口与所述R个符号一一对应。
  45. 根据权利要求44所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二能力信息还携带所述终端设备支持的最大符号个数,所述最大符号数为所述终端设备支持的连续测量参考信号的最大符号个数。
  46. 根据权利要求38至45中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述接入网设备通过所述接入网设备的R个端口并在R个发送波束上向终端设备发送第二参考信号资源之前,所述方法还包括:
    所述接入网设备向所述终端设备发送第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息用于配置所述第二参考信号资源用于波束合成,以及配置所述终端设备上报所述R个端口的第二参考信号资源的第二相位信息。
  47. 根据权利要求38至46中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    所述接入网设备向所述终端设备发送M个参考信号资源,所述M个参考信号资源用于波束管理;
    所述接入网设备接收所述终端设备发送的第五指示信息和第六指示信息,所述第五指示信息用于指示R个参考信号资源分别对应的参考信号资源指示CRI,所述第六指示信息用于指示所述R个参考信号资源分别对应的参考信号接收功率,所述R个参考信号资源与所述R个发送波束一一对应;
    所述接入网设备根据所述第五指示信息和所述第六指示信息确定所述R个参考信号资源分别对应的参考信号接收功率;
    所述接入网设备根据所述第四指示信息指示的第二相位信息生成第二发送波束,包括:
    所述接入网设备根据所述第二相位信息和所述R个参考信号资源分别对应的参考信号接收功率生成所述第二发送波束。
  48. 根据权利要求47所述的方法,其特征在于,所述接入网设备根据所述第二相位信息和所述R个参考信号资源分别对应的参考信号接收功率生成所述第二发送波束,包括:
    所述接入网设备根据所述第二相位信息和所述R个参考信号资源分别对应的参考信号接收功率生成第二合成权;
    所述接入网设备根据所述第二合成权和第三权值集合生成所述第二发送波束,所述第三权值集合包括所述R个参考信号资源对应的R个发送波束的权值。
  49. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置包括:
    收发模块,用于接收接入网设备发送的M个参考信号资源;
    处理模块,用于分别测量所述M个参考信号资源,得到第一测量信息,所述第一测量信息包括第一相位信息,所述第一相位信息为所述通信装置分别测量所述M个参考信号资源中的N个参考信号资源得到的相位信息,所述N和所述M均为大于或等于1的整数,所 述M大于或等于所述N;
    收发模块,用于向所述接入网设备发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一相位信息。
  50. 根据权利要求49所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述M个参考信号资源用于波束管理,所述第一相位信息用于所述接入网设备生成第一发送波束,所述第一发送波束用于所述接入网设备与所述通信装置之间进行通信。
  51. 根据权利要求50所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一发送波束不属于发送波束集合,所述发送波束集合包括所述接入网设备生成的与所述M个参考信号资源分别对应的发送波束。
  52. 根据权利要求49至51中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一相位信息包括所述N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;或者,
    所述第一相位信息包括所述N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位与第一基准相位之间的相位差,所述第一基准相位为第一参考信号资源对应的相位,所述第一参考信号资源为所述N个参考信号资源中参考信号接收功率最大或参考信号接收质量最大的参考信号资源。
  53. 根据权利要求52所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一测量信息包括N个参考信号资源指示CRI、N个参考信号接收功率和所述第一相位信息,所述第一相位信息包括N*(N-1)个相位差,或者,N-1个相位差;
    所述N个CRI为所述N个参考信号资源分别对应的CRI,所述N个参考信号接收功率为所述N个参考信号资源分别对应的参考信号接收功率;
    所述N*(N-1)个相位差为所述N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差,所述N-1个相位差为所述N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位与所述第一基准相位之间的相位差。
  54. 根据权利要求49至53中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述M个参考信号资源中的所述N个参考信号资源是由所述通信装置通过同一接收波束接收的。
  55. 根据权利要求50至54中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发模块还用于:
    向所述接入网设备发送所述通信装置的第一能力信息,所述第一能力信息携带第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述通信装置是否具备对用于所述接入网设备生成所述第一发送波束所需的第一相位信息进行测量的测量能力。
  56. 根据权利要求55所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第二指示信息为用于指示所述通信装置是否支持对用于波束管理的参考信号资源对应的相位信息的测量。
  57. 根据权利要求55或56所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一能力信息还携带以下信息中的一个或多个:
    所述通信装置支持合并用于波束管理的参考信号资源对应的发送波束的最大个数;
    所述通信装置对所述第一相位信息进行量化的量化能力信息。
  58. 根据权利要求49至57中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发模块还用于:
    接收所述接入网设备发送的第一配置信息;
    所述处理模块还用于:
    根据所述第一配置信息确定上报所述N个参考信号资源的第一相位信息。
  59. 根据权利要求58所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一配置信息包括第一资源集合的第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息包括repetition字段,所述repetition字段为OFF,所述第一资源集合包括所述M个参考信号资源。
  60. 根据权利要求59所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一配置信息还包括以下信息中的一个或多个:
    第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一资源集合用于所述接入网设备生成所述第一发送波束;
    所述第一相位信息的上报粒度信息;
    当所述第一相位信息的上报粒度为子带上报粒度时,每个子带的大小信息。
  61. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置包括:
    收发模块,用于向终端设备发送M个参考信号资源;接收所述终端设备发送的第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第一相位信息,所述第一相位信息为所述终端设备测量N个参考信号资源得到的相位信息,所述M个参考信号资源包括所述N个参考信号资源,所述N和所述M均为大于或等于1的整数,所述M大于或等于所述N;
    处理模块,用于根据所述第一指示信息指示的第一相位信息生成第一发送波束,所述第一发送波束用于所述通信装置与所述终端设备之间进行通信。
  62. 根据权利要求61所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述M个参考信号资源用于波束管理。
  63. 根据权利要求61或62所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一发送波束不属于发送波束集合,所述发送波束集合包括所述通信装置生成的与所述M个参考信号资源分别对应的发送波束。
  64. 根据权利要求61至63中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一相位信息包括所述N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;或者,
    所述第一相位信息包括所述N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位与第一基准相位之间的相位差,所述第一基准相位为第一参考信号资源对应的相位,所述第一参考信号资源为所述N个参考信号资源中参考信号接收功率最大或参考信号接收质量最大的参考信号资源。
  65. 根据权利要求64所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一测量信息包括N个参考信号资源指示CRI、N个参考信号接收功率和所述第一相位信息,所述第一相位信息包括N*(N-1)个相位差,或者,N-1个相位差;
    所述N个CRI为所述N个参考信号资源分别对应的CRI,所述N个参考信号接收功率为所述N个参考信号资源分别对应的参考信号接收功率;
    所述N*(N-1)个相位差为所述N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差,所述N-1个相位差为所述N个参考信号资源分别对应的相位与所述第一基准相位之间的相位差。
  66. 根据权利要求61至65中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述M个参考信号资源中的所述N个参考信号资源是由所述终端设备通过同一接收波束接收的。
  67. 根据权利要求61至66中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发模块还用于:
    接收所述终端设备发送的所述终端设备的第一能力信息,所述第一能力信息携带第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述终端设备是否具备对用于通信装置生成第一发送波束所需的第一相位信息进行测量的测量能力;
    所述处理模块还用于:
    根据所述第一能力信息确定所述终端设备具备对第一相位信息进行测量的测量能力。
  68. 根据权利要求67所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第二指示信息为用于指示所述终端设备是否支持对用于波束管理的参考信号资源对应的相位信息的测量。
  69. 根据权利要求67或68所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一能力信息还携带以下信息中的一个或多个:
    所述终端设备支持合并用于波束管理的参考信号资源对应的发送波束的最大个数;
    所述终端设备对所述第一相位信息进行量化的量化能力信息。
  70. 根据权利要求61至69中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发模块还用于:
    向所述终端设备发送第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息用于配置所述终端设备上报所述N个参考信号资源的第一相位信息。
  71. 根据权利要求70所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一配置信息包括第一资源集合的第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息包括repetition字段,所述repetition字段为OFF,所述第一资源集合包括所述M个参考信号资源。
  72. 根据权利要求71所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第一配置信息还包括以下信息中的一个或多个:
    第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一资源集合用于所述通信装置生成所述第一发送波束;
    所述第一相位信息的上报粒度信息;
    当所述第一相位信息的上报粒度为子带上报粒度时,每个子带的大小信息。
  73. 根据权利要求61至72中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发模块还用于:
    接收所述终端设备发送的第十二指示信息和第十三指示信息,所述第十二指示信息用于指示所述N个参考信号资源对应的N个CRI,所述第十三指示信息用于指示所述N个参考信号资源对应的参考信号接收功率;
    所述处理模块还用于:
    根据所述第十二指示信息和所述第十三指示信息确定所述N个参考信号资源对应的参考信号接收功率;
    所述处理模块具体用于:
    根据所述第一相位信息和所述N个参考信号资源对应的参考信号接收功率生成第一发送波束。
  74. 根据权利要求73所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述处理模块具体用于:
    根据所述第一相位信息和所述N个参考信号资源的参考信号接收功率确定第一合成权;
    根据所述第一合成权和第二权值集合生成所述第一发送波束,所述第二权值集合包括所述N个参考信号资源对应的N个发送波束的权值。
  75. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置包括:
    收发模块,用于接收接入网设备发送的第二参考信号资源,所述第二参考信号资源是所述接入网设备通过所述接入网设备的R个端口并在R个发送波束上发送的参考信号资源,所述R个端口与所述R个发送波束一一对应,所述R个发送波束为所述接入网设备生成的与R个参考信号资源对应的发送波束,R为大于或等于2的整数;
    处理模块,用于测量所述第二参考信号资源,得到第二测量信息,所述第二测量信息包括第二相位信息,所述第二相位信息为所述通信装置分别测量所述R个端口的所述第二参考信号资源得到的相位信息;
    所述收发模块,用于向所述接入网设备发送所述第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第二相位信息。
  76. 根据权利要求75所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第二参考信号资源用于波束合成,所述第二相位信息用于所述接入网设备生成第二发送波束,所述第二发送波束用于所述接入网设备与所述通信装置之间进行通信。
  77. 根据权利要求76所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第二发送波束不属于发送波束集合,所述发送波束集合包括所述接入网设备生成的与M个参考信号资源对应的发送波束,所述M个参考信号资源用于波束管理,所述M个参考信号资源包括所述R个参考信号资源,M为大于或等于2的整数,所述M大于或等于所述R。
  78. 根据权利要求75至77中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第二相位信息包括所述R个端口的所述第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;或者,
    所述R个端口上所述第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位分别与第二基准相位之间的相位差,所述第二基准相位为所述R个端口中端口号最小的端口的所述第二参考信号资源对应的相位。
  79. 根据权利要求75至78中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第二测量信息包括所述R个端口的所述第二参考信号资源分别对应的参考信号接收功率;
    所述第二相位信息包括R*(R-1)个相位差,或者,R-1个相位差;
    所述R*(R-1)个相位差为所述R个端口的所述第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;
    所述R-1个相位差为所述R个端口上所述第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位分别与第二基准相位之间的相位差。
  80. 根据权利要求79所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发模块具体用于:
    使用同一接收波束接收所述接入网设备发送的所述第二参考信号资源。
  81. 根据权利要求75至80中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发模块还用于:
    接收所述接入网设备发送的M个参考信号资源,所述M个参考信号资源用于波束管理;
    所述处理模块还用于:
    分别测量所述M个参考信号资源,得到所述M个参考信号资源中的R个参考信号资源分别对应的参考信号接收功率,且所述通信装置通过第一接收波束接收所述R个参考信号资,所述R和所述M均为大于或等于2的整数,所述M大于或等于所述R;
    所述收发模块还用于:
    向所述接入网设备发送第五指示信息和第六指示信息,所述第五指示信息用于指示所述R个参考信号资源分别对应的参考信号资源指示CRI,所述第六指示信息用于指示R个参考信号资源分别对应的参考信号接收功率;
    所述收发模块具体用于:
    通过所述第一接收波束接收所述接入网设备发送的所述第二参考信号资源。
  82. 根据权利要求75至81中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发模块还用于:
    接收所述接入网设备发送的第七指示信息;
    所述处理模块还用于:
    根据所述第七指示信息确定对所述接入网设备的R个端口的第二参考信号资源的相位进行测量,所述R个端口为所述接入网设备中已被配置的用于发送第二参考信号资源的P个端口中的前R个端口,P为大于R的整数。
  83. 根据权利要求75至82中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发模块还用于:
    向所述接入网设备发送所述通信装置的第二能力信息;
    其中,所述第二能力信息携带第八指示信息,所述第八指示信息用于指示所述通信装置是否支持参考信号发送模式;所述参考信号发送模式为:所述接入网设备通过所述R个发送波束并通过所述接入网设备的R个端口在时域上连续的R个符号发送所述第二参考信号资源对应的第二参考信号;所述R个发送波束与所述R个端口一一对应,所述R个端口与所述R个符号一一对应。
  84. 根据权利要求83所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第二能力信息还携带所述通信装置支持的最大符号个数,所述最大符号数为所述通信装置支持的连续测量参考信号的最大符号个数。
  85. 根据权利要求75至84中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发模块还用于:
    接收所述接入网设备发送的第二配置信息;
    所述处理模块还用于:
    根据所述第二配置信息确定:所述第二参考信号资源用于波束合成以及上报所述R个端口的第二参考信号资源的第二相位信息。
  86. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置包括:
    收发模块,用于通过所述通信装置的R个端口并在R个发送波束上向终端设备发送第二参考信号资源,所述R个端口与所述R个发送波束一一对应,所述R个发送波束为所述通信装置生成的与R个参考信号资源对应的发送波束,R为大于或等于2的整数;接收所述终端设备发送的第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息指示第二相位信息,所述第二相位信息为所述终端设备分别测量所述R个端口的所述第二参考信号资源得到的相位信息;
    处理模块,用于根据所述第四指示信息指示的第二相位信息生成第二发送波束,所述第二发送波束用于所述通信装置与所述终端设备之间进行通信。
  87. 根据权利要求86所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第二参考信号资源用于波束合成。
  88. 根据权利要求87所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第二发送波束不属于发送波束集合,所述发送波束集合包括所述通信装置生成的与M个参考信号资源对应的发送波束,所述M个参考信号资源用于波束管理,所述M个参考信号资源包括所述R个参考信号资源,M为大于或等于2的整数,所述M大于或等于所述R。
  89. 根据权利要求86至88中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第二相位信息包括所述R个端口的所述第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;或者,
    所述R个端口上所述第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位分别与第二基准相位之间的相位差,所述第二基准相位为所述R个端口中端口号最小的端口的所述第二参考信号资源对应的相位。
  90. 根据权利要求86至89中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发模块还用于:
    接收第十一指示信息,所述第十一指示信息用于指示所述R个端口的所述第二参考信号资源分别对应的参考信号接收功率;
    所述第二相位信息包括R*(R-1)个相位差,或者,R-1个相位差;
    所述R*(R-1)个相位差为所述R个端口的所述第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位之间的相位差;
    所述R-1个相位差为所述R个端口上所述第二参考信号资源分别对应的相位分别与第二基准相位之间的相位差。
  91. 根据权利要求86至90中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发模块还用于:
    向所述终端设备发送第七指示信息,所述第七指示信息用于指示所述终端设备对所述R个端口的第二参考信号资源的相位信息进行测量,所述R个端口为所述通信装置中已被配置的用于发送第二参考信号资源的P个端口中的前R个端口,P为大于R的整数。
  92. 根据权利要求86至91中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发模块还用于:
    接收所述终端设备发送的所述终端设备的第二能力信息,所述第二能力信息携带第八指示信息;
    所述处理模块还用于:
    根据所述第八指示信息确定所述终端设备是否支持参考信号发送模式;
    所述参考信号发送模式为:所述通信装置通过所述R个发送波束并通过所述通信装置的R个端口在时域上连续的R个符号发送所述第二参考信号资源对应的第二参考信号;所述R个发送波束与所述R个端口一一对应,所述R个端口与所述R个符号一一对应。
  93. 根据权利要求92所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述第二能力信息还携带所述终端设备支持的最大符号个数,所述最大符号数为所述终端设备支持的连续测量参考信号的最大符号个数。
  94. 根据权利要求86至93中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发模块还用于:
    向所述终端设备发送第二配置信息,所述第二配置信息用于配置所述第二参考信号资源用于波束合成,以及配置所述终端设备上报所述R个端口的第二参考信号资源的第二相位信息。
  95. 根据权利要求86至93中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发模块还用于:
    向所述终端设备发送M个参考信号资源,所述M个参考信号资源用于波束管理;
    接收所述终端设备发送的第五指示信息和第六指示信息,所述第五指示信息用于指示R个参考信号资源分别对应的参考信号资源指示CRI,所述第六指示信息用于指示所述R个参考信号资源分别对应的参考信号接收功率,所述R个参考信号资源与所述R个发送波束一一对应;
    所述处理模块还用于:
    根据所述第五指示信息和所述第六指示信息确定所述R个参考信号资源分别对应的参考信号接收功率;
    所述处理模块具体用于:
    根据所述第二相位信息和所述R个参考信号资源分别对应的参考信号接收功率生成所述第二发送波束。
  96. 根据权利要求95所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述处理模块具体用于:
    根据所述第二相位信息和所述R个参考信号资源分别对应的参考信号接收功率生成第二合成权;
    根据所述第二合成权和第三权值集合生成所述第二发送波束,所述第三权值集合包括所述R个参考信号资源对应的R个发送波束的权值。
  97. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置包括处理器,用于调用所述存储器中的计算机程序或计算机指令,以执行如权利要求1至12中任一项所述的方法。
  98. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置包括处理器,用于调用所述存储器中的计算机程序或计算机指令,以执行如权利要求13至26中任一项所述的方法。
  99. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置包括处理器,用于调用所述存储器中的计算机程序或计算机指令,以执行如权利要求27至37中任一项所述的方法。
  100. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置包括处理器,用于调用所述存储器中的计算机程序或计算机指令,以执行如权利要求38至48中任一项所述的方法。
  101. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置包括处理器和存储器,所述处理器用于调用所述存储器中存储的计算机程序或计算机指令,使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求1至12中任一项所述的方法;或者,使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求13至26中任一项所述的方法;或者,使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求27至37中任一项所述的方法;或者,使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求38至48中任一项所述的方法。
  102. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,包括计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如权利要求1至12中任一项所述的方法,或者,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求13至26中任一项所述的方法,或者,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求27至37中任一项所述的方法,或者,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求38至48中任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2020/117517 2020-09-24 2020-09-24 波束生成方法以及相关装置 WO2022061667A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202080103803.3A CN116097578A (zh) 2020-09-24 2020-09-24 波束生成方法以及相关装置
EP20954519.3A EP4207624A4 (en) 2020-09-24 2020-09-24 BEAM SHAPING METHOD AND APPARATUS
PCT/CN2020/117517 WO2022061667A1 (zh) 2020-09-24 2020-09-24 波束生成方法以及相关装置
US18/183,174 US20230217286A1 (en) 2020-09-24 2023-03-14 Beam generation method and related apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/117517 WO2022061667A1 (zh) 2020-09-24 2020-09-24 波束生成方法以及相关装置

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US18/183,174 Continuation US20230217286A1 (en) 2020-09-24 2023-03-14 Beam generation method and related apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022061667A1 true WO2022061667A1 (zh) 2022-03-31

Family

ID=80845995

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/117517 WO2022061667A1 (zh) 2020-09-24 2020-09-24 波束生成方法以及相关装置

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (1) US20230217286A1 (zh)
EP (1) EP4207624A4 (zh)
CN (1) CN116097578A (zh)
WO (1) WO2022061667A1 (zh)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023206566A1 (zh) * 2022-04-29 2023-11-02 北京小米移动软件有限公司 信息传输方法、装置、设备及存储介质

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN109792281A (zh) * 2016-09-29 2019-05-21 高通股份有限公司 在参考符号会话中对下行链路波束跟踪结果的使用
CN111066258A (zh) * 2017-08-18 2020-04-24 高通股份有限公司 用于毫米波多用户波束成形中的增强相位反馈的技术和装置
CN111201723A (zh) * 2017-10-10 2020-05-26 瑞典爱立信有限公司 无线电收发机设备的波束管理
CN111698005A (zh) * 2019-03-15 2020-09-22 华为技术有限公司 用于获取波束权值的方法和装置

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR102521791B1 (ko) * 2017-06-14 2023-04-13 엘지전자 주식회사 무선 통신 시스템에서 채널 상태 정보를 보고하는 방법 및 이를 위한 장치
TW201907680A (zh) * 2017-06-14 2019-02-16 美商Idac控股公司 無線網路中統一波束管理
US20200162142A1 (en) * 2018-11-15 2020-05-21 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus to enable csi reporting in wireless communication systems
US12021589B2 (en) * 2019-01-11 2024-06-25 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for reporting channel state information in wireless communication system, and apparatus therefor

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN109792281A (zh) * 2016-09-29 2019-05-21 高通股份有限公司 在参考符号会话中对下行链路波束跟踪结果的使用
CN111066258A (zh) * 2017-08-18 2020-04-24 高通股份有限公司 用于毫米波多用户波束成形中的增强相位反馈的技术和装置
CN111201723A (zh) * 2017-10-10 2020-05-26 瑞典爱立信有限公司 无线电收发机设备的波束管理
CN111698005A (zh) * 2019-03-15 2020-09-22 华为技术有限公司 用于获取波束权值的方法和装置

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023206566A1 (zh) * 2022-04-29 2023-11-02 北京小米移动软件有限公司 信息传输方法、装置、设备及存储介质

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN116097578A (zh) 2023-05-09
EP4207624A4 (en) 2023-10-04
EP4207624A1 (en) 2023-07-05
US20230217286A1 (en) 2023-07-06

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11283503B2 (en) Communication method and communications apparatus
US10939315B2 (en) Channel state information (CSI) obtaining method and apparatus
US10009083B2 (en) Communication method, base station, and user equipment
WO2021259180A1 (zh) 一种测量上报方法及装置
CN108282321B (zh) 一种信息指示的方法、网络设备和终端设备
JP7283705B2 (ja) 端末デバイスの能力を報告する方法および通信装置
US11943027B2 (en) Channel state information transmission method and apparatus
TWI681680B (zh) 一種獲取、回饋發送波束資訊的方法及裝置
CN110831047B (zh) 波束测量的方法和装置
US11971497B2 (en) Positioning reference signal sending method and related apparatus
WO2018126794A1 (zh) 一种资源指示方法、装置及系统
CN111511010A (zh) 发送和接收指示的方法和装置
US11064499B2 (en) Communication method and apparatus
CA3049296C (en) Reference signal transmission method, and apparatus
US11799520B2 (en) Communication method and communications apparatus
CN116095741A (zh) 一种信道测量方法及装置
CN110034788B (zh) 信道状态信息的测量方法和装置
US11888565B2 (en) Method for sending channel state information and related device
WO2020239125A1 (zh) 雷达测试方法及装置
US20220264584A1 (en) Measurement and reporting method and apparatus
US20230217286A1 (en) Beam generation method and related apparatus
US20230283337A1 (en) Beam Training Method and Apparatus
CN107534883A (zh) 下行信道状态信息的获取方法和装置
WO2023202338A1 (zh) 信息传输方法、装置、终端、网络侧设备及介质
CN117792443A (zh) 通信方法、装置和系统

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20954519

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2020954519

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20230329

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE